Preface, Contents

1
General Technical Specifications
2
Power Supply Modules
SIMATIC 3
Digital Modules
4
Analog Modules
S7-300 Programmable Controller 5
Module Specifications Other Signal Modules
6
Interface Modules
Reference Manual 7
RS 485 Repeater
SIMATIC TOP connect and 8
SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Appendix
Parameter Sets for Signal A
Modules
Diagnostics Data of Signal B
Modules
C
Dimension Drawings
Spare Parts and Accessories for D
S7-300 Modules
Guidelines for Handling
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices E
(ESD)
F
This manual is part of the documentation package List of Abbreviations
with the order numbers:
Programmable Controller S7-300: Glossary, Index
6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0

ET 200M Distributed I/O Device:

6ES7153-1AA00-8BA0

Edition 11/2002
A5E00105505-02
AChapter
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:

Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Correct Usage
Note the following:

Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Copyright W Siemens
Third parties using for their
AG 1998–2002 All own purposes
rights any other
reserved names
Disclaim in this document which refer to trademarks
of Liability
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its owners.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
contents is not permitted without express written authority. with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
Siemens AG welcomed.
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierungssysteme  Siemens AG 1998–2002
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications
Index-2Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens A5E00105505-02 A5E00105505-02
Preface

Purpose of the manual

The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator
actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal
modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-300 or ET 200M
system is described in the installation manuals for each system.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual, it is necessary to have a general knowledge of
automation and programmable logic controllers.

Scope of this manual

The present documentation package contains reference manuals for all the
modules current at the time the manuals were published.
We reserve the right to enclose a product information leaflet containing up-to-date
information on the module with new modules and modules with a new product
version.

Changes compared with the previous version

Compared to the previous version, of the ”Module Data” reference manual, the
following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules
added, as necessary:
 Preface
 Chapter 1 ”General Technical Specifications”
 Chapter 3 ”Digital Modules”,
 Chapter 4 ”Analog Modules”
 Appendix A ”Signal Module Parameter Sets”
 Glossary
Note: The previous version of this ”Module Data” reference manual can be
recognized by the number in the footer: A5E00105505-01.
The current number is: A5E00105505-02.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 iii
Preface

Approbations
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

CE Approval
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Identification for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Standards
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

iv A5E00105505-02
 Preface

How the manual fits in

S7-300

”CPU Data” reference manual

& ”CPU Data CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP” Description of operation, functions and
& ”CPU Data CPU 31xC and CPU 31x” technical specifications of the CPU.

”Technological Functions” manual

& Manual Description of the individual technological
4 Examples functions:
 Positioning
 Counting
 Point-to-point connection
 Rules
The CD contains examples for the
technological functions.
Installation manual
& Manual Description of configuration, installation,
wiring, networking and commissioning of an
S7-300.
”Module data” reference manual

→& Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical

You are reading this manual

specifications of signal modules, power

supply modules and interface modules.

Instruction List
& ”CPU data CPUs 312 IFM to 318-2 DP” The instruction set lists of the CPUs and their
execution times.
& ”CPU Data CPU 31xC and CPU 31x” A list of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs)
and their execution times.
Getting Started
& ”CPU 31xC: Positioning with analog output” Getting Started documents use a concrete
& ”CPU 31xC: Positioning with digital outputs” example to guide you through the individual
commissioning steps until you have a
& ”CPU 31xC: Counting”
functioning application.
& ”CPU 31xC: Point-to-point connection”
& ”CPU 31xC: Rules”
& ”CPU 31xC: Commissioning”
& ”CPU 31x: Commissioning”

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 v
Preface

ET 200M

”Distributed Peripheral” manual

& ”Manual” Description of configuration, assembly,
wiring.
Reference Manual
”Signal modules for process automation” Description of use in process automation,
& ”Reference Manual” parameterization with SIMATIC PDM, digital
input modules, digital output modules.
”Module data” reference manual

→& Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical

You are reading this manual

specifications of signal modules, power

supply modules and interface modules.

Navigation
To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following
access aids:
 At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of
the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual.
 An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on
each page of each chapter.
 You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary
contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual.
 At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you
fast access to the information you need.

Recycling and disposal

Because of its low-emission equipment, it is possible to recycle the S7-300. For
ecologically harmless recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a
certificated disposal service for electronic scrap.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

vi A5E00105505-02
 Preface

Additional support
Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about
the products described in this manual.
http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner

Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC
S7 programmable controller. Please contact your local training center or the central
training center in
Nuremberg, D 90327 Germany.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 vii
Preface

A&D Technical Support

Contact at any time of the day throughout the world:

Nuremberg
Johnson City

Peking

Technical Support

Worldwide (Nuremberg)
Technical Support

Loc. time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365 days

Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
E-mail: adsupport@
siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
Europe / Africa (Nuremberg) America (Johnson City) Asia and Australia (Peking)
Authorization Technical Support and Technical Support and
Authorization Authorization
Loc. time: Mon. through Fri. Loc. time: Mon. through Fri. Loc. time: Mon. through Fri.
8 AM to 5 PM 8 AM to 5 PM 8.30 AM to 5.30 PM
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Phone: +1 (0) 770 740 3505 Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Fax: +1 (0) 779 740 3699 Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74
E-mail: adsupport@ E-mail: isd-callcenter@ E-mail: adsupport.asia@
siemens.com sea.siemens.com siemens.com
GMT: +1:00 GMT: -5:00 GMT: +8:00
Technical Support and Authorization generally speak German and English.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

viii A5E00105505-02
 Preface

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation products and services, all our knowledge is
available to you on the Internet.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Available over the Internet are:
 the newsletter, constantly bringing you the latest information about our
products.
 the right documents for you, thanks to our Search in Service & Support.
 a forum in which users and specialists can swap experiences
world-wide.
 your local point of contact for Automation & Drives in our Contacts Database
 information about local service, repairs, spare parts. Much more is available to
you under ”Achievements”.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 ix
Preface

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

x A5E00105505-02
Contents

Preface
1 General Technical Specifications
1.1 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . 1-8
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for
Operating S7-300s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree
of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating
SIMATIC Outdoor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive Area . . . 1-17
2 Power Supply Modules
2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A;
(6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7 307-1EAx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . 2-15
3 Digital Modules
3.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC;
(6ES7 321-1BLx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32
120 VAC;
(6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC;
(6ES7 321-1BHx2-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xi
Contents

3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321;

DI 16
24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; with Hardware and
Diagnostic interrupts; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.9.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.9.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.9.3 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
DC 24 V;
Source Input; (6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
UC 24/48 V;
(6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC;
(6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
AC 120/230 V
(6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC;
(6ES7 321-1FFx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32
24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A;
(6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 16
24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BHx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed;
(6ES7 322-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16
24/48 VUC;
(6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 16
120/230 VAC/1 A: (6ES7 322-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A;
(6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/ 0.5 A; with
Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . 3-76
3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A;
(6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xii A5E00105505-02
 Contents

3.25 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A;

(6ES7 322-1FFx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL
(6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC;
(6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC;
(6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322;
DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8
230 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-103
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A;
(6ES7 322-1HFx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A;
(6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A;
(6ES7 323-1BHx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
4 Analog Modules
4.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module . . . . . . 4-8
4.3 Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . 4-39
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.7.3 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.11.1 Connecting Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . 4-61

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xiii
Contents

4.12 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.14 Connecting Loads and Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.15 Connecting Loads and Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits;
(6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.19 Analog Input ModuleSM 331; AI 8
16 bits
(6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.19.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.19.2 8-Channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4.19.3 4 Channel-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4.19.4 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the
SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
13 bits;
(6ES7 331-1KF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.20.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4.20.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits;
(6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
4.21.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4.21.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
RTD (6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0) . . . . 4-122
4.22.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the
SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
TC
(6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . 4-147
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2
12 bits;
(6ES7 331-7KBx2-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the
SM 331; AI 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.25 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8
12 bits;
(6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
4.25.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.25.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xiv A5E00105505-02
 Contents

4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits;

(6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
4.26.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits . . . 4-170
4.27 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits;
(6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
4.27.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
4.27.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits . . . 4-175
4.28 Analog Input/Output ModuleSM 332; AO 2
12 bits;
(6ES7 332-5HBx1-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
4.28.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.28.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits . . . 4-181
4.29 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;
AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits; (6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.29.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
4.29.2 Measuring/Output Method and Measuring/Output Range of the
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2
12 bits; (6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
4.30.2 Measuring/Output Method and Measuring/Output Range of the
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
5 Other Signal Modules
5.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;
(6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;
(6ES7 338-4BC01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.1 Isochrone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.2 Terminal connection diagram and block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.4 Encoder Value Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.5 Gray / Binary Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.6 Transmitted Encoder Value and Normalizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.7 Enable FREEZE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.8 Assigning Parameters to the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4.9 Addressing SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.4.10 Diagnostics of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.4.12 Technical specifications of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xv
Contents

6 Interface Modules
6.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
7 RS 485 Repeater
7.1 Application and Characteristics;
(6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA
8.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Wiring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect with Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . 8-14
8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection 8-16
8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect TPA with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Assignment and
Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4.4 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xvi A5E00105505-02
 Contents

A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . A-1
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.6 Parameters der SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
B Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules
B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . B-1
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C Dimension Drawings
C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
D Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules
E Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
E.1 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . E-4
F List of Abbreviations
Glossary
Index

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xvii
Contents

Figures
2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . 2-12
2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . 2-16
3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module
SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-3 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module
SM 321; DI 32
120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module
SM 321; DI 16
24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-5 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-7 Terminal Assignment for the Redundant Supply of Encoders of the
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (Source Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-9 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module
SM 321; DI 16
24/48VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC . . . . . . 3-37
3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
120/230 VAC . . 3-39
3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC . . . 3-41
3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module
SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-15 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; D0 32
120 VAC/1.0 A 3-49
3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-18 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A 3-53
3-19 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16
24/48 VUC . . . . . . 3-59
3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 322; DO 16
120/230 VAC/1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3-23 Module View of the SM 322; DO 8
24 V DC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3-24 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
DC 24 V/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3-25 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3-26 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xviii A5E00105505-02
 Contents

3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC 3-93
3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC . . 3-96
3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A 3-99
3-31 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical
Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical
Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3-35 Terminal Assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . 3-112
3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module . . . . . . 4-32
4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module . . . . . 4-33
4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-4 Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-12 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-13 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters Supplied from L+ to an
Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-14 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to
an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to
an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to
an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-19 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-20 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4-22 Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an
Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI 4-67
4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point
(Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-26 Connecting Thermocouples via a Reference Junction to the
SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xix
Contents

4-27 Connecting Thermocouples with External Compensation via Resistance

Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a
Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a
Two-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the
Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4-33 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-35 8-Channel Mode Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4-36 4-Channel Mode Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4-37 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
4-38 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
4-40 Hardware Filter 8 Channels Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4-41 Software Filter 8 Channels Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
4-42 Hardware Filter 4 Channels Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4-43 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4-44 Hardware Filter 8 Channels Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4-45 Software Filter 8 Channels Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
4-46 Hardware Filter 4 Channels Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4-47 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4-48 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module
SM 332; AO 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4-49 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits . . . . . . . . 4-167
4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module
SM 332; AO 4
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module
SM 332; AO 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
4-52 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits . . . 4-190
5-1 Module View of Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2 Module View of Dummy Module DM 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . 5-10
6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7-1 RC Network with 10 MΩ for Configuration with Ungrounded
Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-3 Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . 8-8

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xx A5E00105505-02
 Contents

8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

8-5 Insert the Connecting Cable into the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-6 Spring-Loaded Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . 8-22
8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate . . . . . . . 8-23
8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to
SM 321; AI 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI
8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A-15 Data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8
16 bits (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A-16 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331;
AI 8
16 bits (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . A-41
B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a
SM 331 with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a
SM 332 with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-7
B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-8
B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xxi
Contents

C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

C-2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . C-5
C-7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for ”Insert and Remove”
Function with Active Bus Module,
S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with
CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with
CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-17 Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-18 Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C-19 Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-20 Signal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C-23 SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C-24 SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xxii A5E00105505-02
 Contents

Tables
1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-7 Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-8 Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-9 Rated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-10 ”SIMATIC Outdoor Modules” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-11 Outdoor Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-12 Outdoor Modules Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance (continued) . . . . . . . 3-7
3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . 3-26
3-9 Assigning the Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC
(6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply
Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . 3-28
3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC
(6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC
(6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0), Causes of Error and Remedial Measures . . . 3-30
3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3-16 Structure of the Data Record for SM 322 DO 16
UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3-17 System Diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16
UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3-19 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and
on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A. . . . . . . . 3-76
3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of
Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xxiii
Contents

3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . 3-90
3-24 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL,
Error Causes and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A . . . 3-103
3-27 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A,
Error Causes and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2 Analog input modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 4-8
4-6 Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-7 Possible Analog Value Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges
 10 V to  1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-11 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges
 500 mV to  80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges
1 to 5 V and 0 to 10V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges
 20 mA to  3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges
0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters
from 10 kΩ and from 150 Ω to 600 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-16 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature
Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-17 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature
Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-18 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature
Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-19 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature
Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-20 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature
Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-21 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature
Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-22 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-23 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-24 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-25 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-26 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-27 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-28 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-29 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type R, S . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-30 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-31 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xxiv A5E00105505-02
 Contents

4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . 4-29
4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and
4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State
of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . 4-64
4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits to
Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of
SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4-54 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4-55 Assignment of the Channels of the Isolated Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8
16 bits to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4-56 Scan Times in 8-Channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
4-57 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4-58 Content of the 4 Bytes with Additional Information from OB40 during a
Hardware Interrupt or an End-of-Scan-Cycle Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4-59 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4-60 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits Using Measuring
Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4-61 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
4-62 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits to
Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
4-63 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-64 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4-65 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD to
Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4-66 Scan Times in ”Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
4-68 Content of the 4 Bytes with Additional Information from OB40 during a
Hardware Interrupt or an End-of-Scan-Cycle Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-69 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xxv
Contents

4-70 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
TC to Channel Groups . . 4-142

4-71 Scan Times in ”Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4-72 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4-73 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of
SM 331; AI 8
TC in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-74 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of
SM 331; AI 8
TC in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4-75 Content of the 4 Bytes with Additional Information from OB40 during a
Hardware Interrupt or an End-of-Scan-Cycle Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4-76 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits Using Measuring
Range Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
4-77 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
4-78 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-79 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module der SM 332;
AO 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
4-80 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits . . . 4-170
4-81 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits . . . 4-176
4-82 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits . . . 4-182
4-83 Measuring ranges of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
4-84 Output Ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
5-1 Other Signal Modules Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Meaning of the Switch Positions of the Dummy Module DM 370 . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-5 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-6 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: ConnecModules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of
32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-6 Selection for SIMATIC TOP connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection 8-18
8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of
SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xxvi A5E00105505-02
 Contents

A-1 SFCs for Assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . A-9
A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . A-9
A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . A-16
A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . A-18
A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . A-24
A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . A-26
A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A-19 Codes for Temperature Measurement of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . A-27
A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . A-28
A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-22 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . A-29
A-23 Codes for the Modes of SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-24 Codes for Interference Frequency Suppression of the
SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-25 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . . . . . . . A-34
A-26 Codes for the Smoothing Mode Settings of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits . . A-35
A-27 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-28 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-29 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A-30 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM332;
AO 8
12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-31 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-32 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . A-42
A-33 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . A-42
B-1 Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 xxvii
Contents

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

xxviii A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications 1
What are general technical specifications?
General technical specifications include the following:
 the standards and test values which the modules of the S7-300 programmable
logic controller maintain and satisfy
 the test criteria to which the S7-300 modules were tested.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

1.1 Standards and Approvals 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup 1-8
Batteries
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating 1-9
S7-300s
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of 1-12
Protection
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 1-13
1.7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating 1-16
SIMATIC Outdoor Modules
1.9 Using the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive 1-17
Area

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-1
General Technical Specifications

1.1 Standards and Approvals

CE approval
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and
safety-related requirements of the following EU directives and conforms with the
harmonized Euro-
pean standards (EN) for programmable controllers announced in the Official
Journals of the European Community:
 73/23/EEC ”Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage
Limits” (Low-Voltage Directive)
 89/336/EEC ”Electromagnetic Compatibility” (EMC Directive)
 94/9/EU ”Devices and protection systems for use as prescribed in potentially
explosive areas” (Guidelines for Explosion Protection)

The declarations of conformity are held

at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD4
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-2 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with
 C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
 CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

HAZ. LOC.  CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

 UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
 CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

Note
The currently applicable approvals can be found on the nameplate of the particular
module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-3
General Technical Specifications

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

in accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive

atmospheres; Type of protection ”n”)

II 3 G EEx nA II T4..T5

Identification for Australia

The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements of standard
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and criteria of
standard IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment
Requirements and Tests).

Shipbuilding approval
Classification Societies:
 ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
 BV (Bureau Veritas)
 DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
 GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
 LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
 Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-4 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Use in an industrial environment

SIMATIC products have been designed for use in an industrial environment.

Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment

EMC Directive Requirements in Respect of:

Emitted interference Immunity
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 EN 61000-6-2: 2001

Use in residential environments

If you operate an S7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure Limit Value Class
B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions.
Suitable measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value
Class B:
 installation of the S7-300 in grounded cabinets and control boxes
 use of filters in supply lines

Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can
result if you withdraw connectors while an S7-300 is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before
withdrawing connectors.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-5
General Technical Specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Introduction
In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-300 modules and
details of radio interference suppression.
The S7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law
applicable to EMC on the European domestic market.

Definition of ”EMC”
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with
that environment.

Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared
to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-300
system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design.

Table 1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference

Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with Satisfies

Degree of Se-
verity
Electrostatic discharge Discharge in air:8 kV 3
according to IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 4 kV
Bursts (fast transient bursts) to 2 kV (supply cable) 3
IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal cable > 3 m)
1 kV (signal cable < 3 m)
Energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuitry required (refer to the manual S7-300 Programmable Control-
ler, Hardware and Installation, Chapter ”Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection”)
 Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protection
elements 3
2 kV (signal/
data cable only > 3 m) possi-
bly with protection elements
 Symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protection
elements
1 kV (signal line only > 3 m)
possibly with protection ele-
ments

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-6 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-300 system to the public network, you must ensure
Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022.

Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-300 modules with regard to
sinusoidal disturbance variables.

Table 1-3 Sinusoidal Interference

Sinusoidal Interference Test values Satisfies

Degree of
Severity
HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields)
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz
3
over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
HF conductance on cables and cable Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modula-
shields according to IEC 61000-4-6 tion of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 3
80 MHz

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit
value class A, Group 1.

From 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (
V/m)Q

From 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (
V/m)Q
Measured at a distance of 10 m (98.4 ft.)

Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with

EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.

From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (
V)Q

< 66 dB (
V)M
From 0.5 to 5 MHz < 73 dB (
V)Q
< 60 dB (
V)M
From 5 to 30 MHz < 73 dB (
V)Q
< 60 dB (
V)M

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-7
General Technical Specifications

1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup

Batteries

Shipping and storage of modules

S7-300 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2, in respect of shipping
and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or
stored in their original packing.
Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC
60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation.
Mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.

Table 1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules

Condition Permitted Range

Free fall (in shipping packing)  1m
Temperature from –40 C to +70C
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponding to an alti-
tude of –1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 10 to 95 %, no condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
to IEC 60068-2-6 9 – 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

Transporting backup batteries

Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. Special
approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7-300
systems. The lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-8 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Storing backup batteries

Backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum shelf life is
5 years.

Warning
! Improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property.
If backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe
burning.
Observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7-300
programmable logic controller:
 never charge them
 never heat them
 never throw them in the fire
 never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.)

1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for

Operating S7-300s

Operating conditions
S7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the
weather. The operating conditions surpass the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3.
 Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
 Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

Use with additional measures

The S7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures:
 in locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation
 in hostile environments caused, for instance, by
– dust accumulation
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
 in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas
An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet
or in a housing.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-9
General Technical Specifications

Ambient mechanical conditions

The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-300 modules are listed in the following
table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.

Table 1-5 Mechanical Conditions

Frequency Range Continuous Occasional

in Hz
10  f  58 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude
58  f  150 0.5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration

Reducing vibrations
If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock and/or vibrations, you must
take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and/or amplitude,
respectively.
We recommend that you install the S7-300 on vibration-damping materials
(for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions.

Table 1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test accor- Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate
ding to IEC 60068 of change of 1 octave/minute.
Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) 10 Hz  f  58 Hz, constant amplitude of
0.075 mm
58 Hz  f  150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1
g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per
axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other
Shock Shock test to Type of shock: half-sine
IEC 60068, Part 2-29 Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms dura-
tion
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/– di-
rection in each of three axes perpendicular to
each other

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-10 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use S7-300s under the following climatic conditions:

Table 1-7 Climatic Conditions

Climatic Conditions Permitted Range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation: from 0 to 60C
vertical installation: from 0 to 40C
Relative humidity 10 to 95 % Non-condensing, corres-
ponds to relative humi-
dity (RH) Class 2 accor-
ding to IEC 61131, Part 2
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponding to an alti-
tude of –1000 to 2000 m
Concentration of contami- SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
nants RH < 60 %, non-condensing
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 4 days
RH < 60 %, non-condensing

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-11
General Technical Specifications

1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of

Protection

Test voltages
Insulation stability must be demonstrated in the type test with the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:

Table 1-8 Test Voltages

Circuits With Rated Voltage Ue to Other Cir- Test Voltage

cuits or to Ground
< 50 V 500 VDC
< 150 V 2500 VDC
< 250 V DC 4000 V

Protection class
Protection Class I according to IEC 60536 – in other words, protective conductor
connection to rail necessary

Protection against ingress of foreign bodies and water

Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC 60529, that is, protection against
contact with standard probes.
There is no special protection against the ingress of water.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-12 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300

Rated operating voltages

The modules of the S7-300 operate with different rated voltages. The following
table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances.

Table 1-9 Rated Voltages

Rated Voltage Tolerance Range

24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
120 VAC 93 to 132 VAC
230 VAC 187 to 264 VAC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-13
General Technical Specifications

1.7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules

Definition
SIMATIC Outdoor modules are modules that can be used under extended
environmental conditions. Extended environmental conditions mean:
 operation possible at temperatures from –25°C to +60°C
 occasional, brief condensation permitted
 increased mechanical stress permissible

Comparison with ”standard” modules

The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIMATIC Outdoor
modules correspond to those of the ”standard” modules.
The mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method
have changed.
The SIMATIC Outdoor modules have their own order numbers (refer to Table 1-10)

Configuring in STEP 7
If you have a STEP 7 version in which the SIMATIC Outdoor modules are not
contained in the hardware catalog, simply configure your system with the
corresponding ”standard” modules (refer to Table 1-10).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-14 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

SIMATIC Outdoor Modules

The following table contains all SIMATIC Outdoor modules.
The order numbers of the corresponding ”standard” modules have been included
as an aid to configuration. You can refer to the description and technical
specifications in the special section on the ”standard” module.

Table 1-10 ”SIMATIC Outdoor Modules”

Module SIMATIC outdoor module ”Standard” modules

for use under extended
environmental conditions
as of order no.
IM 153-1 6ES7 153-1AA82-0XB0 6ES7 153-1AA02-0XB0
CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF82-0AB0 6ES7 315-2AF02-0AB0
CPU 312 IFM 6ES7 312-5AC81-0AB0 6ES7 312-5AC01-0AB0
CPU 314 6ES7 314-1AE83-0AB0 6ES7 314-1AE03-0AB0
CPU 314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE83-0AB0 6ES7 314-5AE03-0AB0
IM 365 6ES7 365-0BA81-0AA0 6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0
Power supply module
PS 305 6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0 ---
PS 307 6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0
SM 321 digital input module;
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC 6ES7 321-1BH82-0AA0 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0
SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC 6ES7 321-1BL80-0AA0 6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC 6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0 6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16
24 V-125 VDC 6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0 ---
SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC 6ES7 321-1FF81-0AA0 6ES7 321-1FF01-0AB0
SM 322 digital output module;
SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A 6ES7 322-1BH81-0AA0 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A 6ES7 322-1HF80-0AA0 6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0
SM 322, DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A 6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0 ---
SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A 6ES7 322-1FF81-0AA0 6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A 6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0 6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0
Digital Input/Output Module
SM 323; DI8/DO8
DC 24V/0.5A 6ES7 323-1BH81-0AA0 6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0
Analog input module
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2
12 bits 6ES7 331-7KB82-0AB0 6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0
Analog output module
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2
12 6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0
bits
SM 334 analog I/O module;
SM 334; AI4/AO 2
12 bits 6ES7 334-0KE80-0AB0 6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-15
General Technical Specifications

Table 1-10 ”SIMATIC Outdoor Modules”, continued

Module SIMATIC outdoor module ”Standard” modules

for use under extended
environmental conditions
as of order no.
FEPROM 64 KByte memory card 6ES7 951-0KF80-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KF00-0AA0
FEPROM 32 kByte memory card 6ES7 951-0KE80-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KE00-0AA0
FEPROM 16 kByte memory card 6ES7 951-0KD80-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KD00-0AA0
Bus connector 6ES7 972-0BAx0-0XA0
6ES7 972-0BBx0-0XA0

1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for

Operating SIMATIC Outdoor Modules

Ambient mechanical conditions

Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3M4.

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table provides information about the type and extent of tests for
mechanical ambient conditions on SIMATIC Outdoor modules.

Table 1-11 Outdoor Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test according to Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
IEC 6008 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) change of
1 octave/minute.
5 Hz  f  9 Hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm
9 Hz  f  150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
oscillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in
each of three axes perpendicular to each other
Shock Shock test according to IEC 6008 Type of shock: half-sine
Part 2-27 severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/–
direction in each of three axes perpendicular to
each other

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-16 A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
The SIMATIC Outdoor modules can be used under the following climatic ambient
conditions:
Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3K5.

Table 1-12 Outdoor Modules Climatic Conditions

Ambient Condition Permitted Range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation –25 °C to 60 °C
vertical installation –25 °C to 40 °C
Relative humidity From 5 to 95 % Occasional, brief condensation,
corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class
2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to a height of –1000 to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration Test:
(according to IEC 721 3-3; SO2: < 0.5 ppm; 10 ppm; 4 days
class 3C3) Relative humidity < 60%
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; 1 ppm; 4 days
Relative humidity < 60%

1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive

Area

The following sections contain important information in the following languages.

In this chapter

Section Topic
1.9.1 Einsatz der ET 200M / S7-300 im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich Zone 2
1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
1.9.3 Utilisation de l’ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement à risque d’explosion
en zone 2
1.9.4 Aplicación del ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2
1.9.5 Impiego dell’ET 200M / S7-300 nell’area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2
1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosieve gebied zone 2
1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2
1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2
1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskområde zon 2
1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de explosão, zona 2
1.9.11 p  
 ET 200M / S7-300 


S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 1-17
General Technical Specifications

1.9.1 Einsatz der ET 200M / S7-300 im explosions-

gefährdeten Bereich Zone 2

Zone 2
Explosionsgefährdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden
nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfähigen
Atmosphäre unterschieden.
Zone Explosionsgefahr Beispiel
2 explosive Gasatmosphäre tritt Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit
nur selten und kurzzeitig auf Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in
geschlossenen Räumen
sicherer nein • außerhalb der Zone 2
Bereich • Standardanwendungen von dezentraler
Peripherie

Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise für die Installation des Dezentralen
Peripheriegerätes ET 200M und der SIMATIC S7-300 im explosionsgefährdeten
Bereich.

Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zum ET 200M und zu den verschiedenen S7-300-
Baugruppen finden Sie im Handbuch.

Fertigungsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Zulassung

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 nach EN 50021 : 1999

Prüfnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Hinweis
Baugruppen mit der Zulassung II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dürfen nur in
Automatisierungssysteme SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M der Gerätekategorie 3
eingesetzt werden.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Instandhaltung
Für eine Reparatur muss die betroffene Baugruppe an den Fertigungsort geschickt
werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgeführt werden.

Besondere Bedingungen
1. Das Dezentrale Peripheriegerät ET 200M und die SIMATIC S7-300 müssen in
einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches Gehäuse eingebaut werden. Diese
müssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54 (nach EN 60529) gewährleisten. Dabei
sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu berücksichtigen, in denen das Gerät
installiert wird. Für das Gehäuse muss eine Herstellererklärung für Zone 2
vorliegen (gemäß EN 50021).
2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinführung dieses Gehäuses unter Betriebs-
bedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 °C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs-
bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 °C sein kann,
müssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsächlich
gemessenen Temperaturen übereinstimmen.
3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinführungen müssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und
dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gemäß EN 50021) entsprechen.
4. Alle Geräte, einschließlich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgängen von
ET 200M- und S7-300-Systemen angeschlossen werden, müssen für den
Explosionsschutz Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.
5. Es müssen Maßnahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch
Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % überschritten werden kann.
6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0° C bis 60° C
7. Innerhalb des Gehäuses ist an einem nach dem Öffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein
Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:
Warnung
Das Gehäuse darf nur kurze Zeit geöffnet werden, z. B. für visuelle Diagnose.
Betätigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und
trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).
Diese Warnung kann unberücksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine
explosionsgefährdete Atmosphäre herrscht.

Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen finden Sie im Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2

Hazardous Area

Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone Explosion Hazard Example
2 Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat
occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
short time
Safe area No • Outside zone 2
• Standard distributed I/O applications

Below you will find important information on the installation of the ET 200M
distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 in a hazardous area.

Further Information
You will find further information on the ET 200M and the various S7-300 modules in
the manual.

Production Location
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Certification

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999

Test number: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Note
Modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be used in
SIMATIC S7-300/ET 200M automation systems belonging to equipment
category 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected module must be sent to the production location.
Repairs can only be carried there.

Special Conditions
1. The ET 200M distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 must be installed
in a cabinet or metal housing. These must comply with the IP 54 degree of
protection as a minimum. The environmental conditions under which the
equipment is installed must be taken into account. There must be a
manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available for the housing (in accordance
with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of fail-safe signal modules must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC
explosion protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:
Warning
The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not
hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Modules

You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.3 Utilisation de l'ET 200M / S7-300 dans un

environnement à risque d'explosion en zone 2

Zone 2
Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se
distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive.
Zone Risque d'explosion Exemple
2 Formation rare et brève d'une Environnement de raccords à joints plats
atmosphère gazeuse explosive dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux
fermés
Zone sûre Non • A l'extérieur de la zone 2
• Utilisation standard de périphérie
décentralisée

Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station

de périphérie décentralisée ET 200M et du SIMATIC S7-300 dans un
environnement présentant un risque d'explosion.

Informations complémentaires
Des informations complémentaires sur l'ET 200M et les divers modules S7-300 se
trouvent dans le manuel.

Lieu de production
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Homologation

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999

Numéro de contrôle : KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Nota
Les modules homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent être utilisés
que dans des automates SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M de catégorie 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Entretien
Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module concerné doit être expédié au lieu de
production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.

Conditions particulières
1. La station de périphérie décentralisée ET 200M et le SIMATIC S7-300 doivent
être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer
au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions
d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est installé. Le boîtier doit faire
l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon
EN 50021).
2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au
niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la
température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les
capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux
températures effectivement mesurées.
3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et
être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).
4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées
et sorties de modules de signaux à sécurité intrinsèque doivent être
homologués pour la protection antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être
dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires.
6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C
7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture,
une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :
Avertissement
Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un
diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez
aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions).
Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que
l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion.

Liste des modules homologués

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules homologués :
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
référence ID 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.4 Aplicación de la ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con

peligro de explosión, zona 2

Zona 2
Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se
diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir
una explosión.
Zona Peligro de explosión Ejemplo
2 La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con
sólo se presenta rara vez y muy juntas planas en tuberías en locales
brevemente cerrados
Área segura No • fuera de la zona 2
• Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia
descentralizada

A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de la

unidad periférica descentralizada ET 200M y del SIMATIC S7-300 en áreas con
peligro de explosión.

Otras informaciones
Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a la ET 200S y a los distintos módulos
S7-300 en el Manual.

Lugar de fabricación
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Homologación

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 según norma EN 50021 : 1999

Número de comprobación: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Nota
Los módulos con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden utilizarse
únicamente en los autómatas programables SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M de la
categoría de equipo 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Mantenimiento
Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo afectado al lugar de fabricación.
Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.

Condiciones especiales
1. La unidad periférica descentralizada ET 200M y el SIMATIC S7-300 se han de
montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos
deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de protección IP 54. Para ello se han
de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el
equipo. La caja deberá contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2
(conforme a EN 50021).
2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la
entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la
bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables
a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.
3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP
exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).
4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas
y salidas de módulos de señales de alta disponibilidad deben estar
homologados para la protección contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión
nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.
6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C
7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su
apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:
Precaución
Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este
tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar
módulos ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables).
Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no
hay peligro de explosión.

Lista de los módulos homologados

En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos homologados:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
bajo el ID de asignación 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.5 Impiego dell'ET 200M / S7-300 nell'area a

pericolo di esplosione zona 2

Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono
distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona Pericolo di esplosione Esempio
2 L'atmosfera esplosiva si Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con
presente solo raramente e guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in
brevemente ambienti chiusi
Area sicura No • Al di fuori della zona 2
• Applicazioni standard di periferia
decentrata

Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione dell'unità
di periferia decentrata ET 200M e del SIMATIC S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di
esplosione.

Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sull'ET 200M e sulle diverse unità S7-300 si trovano nel
manuale.

Luogo di produzione
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Autorizzazione

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999

Numero di controllo: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Avvertenza
Le unità con l'autorizzazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere
impiegate solo nei sistemi di controllori programmabili SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M
della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, l'unità interessata deve essere inviata al luogo di produzione.
La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.

Condizioni particolari
1. L'unità di periferia decentrata ET 200M e il SIMATIC S7-300 devono essere
montati in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono
assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere
conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata.
Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la
zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).
2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in
condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la
temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di
temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente
misurata.
3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto
e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).
4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli
ingressi/uscite di unità di segnale ad elevata sicurezza, devono essere stati
omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa
essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti.
6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C
7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura,
una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:
Attenzione
Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una
diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare
o innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).
Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è
un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione.

Elenco delle unità abilitate

La lista con le unità omologate si trova in Internet al sito:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
all’ID di voce 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het

explosief gebied zone 2

Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt
onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een
explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld
2 Een explosieve gasatmosfeer Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met
treedt maar zelden op en voor pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten
korte duur vertrekken
Veilig Neen • Buiten de zone 2
gebied • Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
periferie

Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van het decentrale

periferieapparaat ET 200M en van de SIMATIC S7-300 in het explosief gebied.

Verdere informatie
In het handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de ET 200M en over de
verschillende
S7-300-modulen.

Productieplaats
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Strasse 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Vergunning

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999

Keuringsnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Opmerking
Modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden
gebruikt in automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M van de
apparaatcategorie 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moet de betreffende module naar de plaats van vervaardiging
worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.

Speciale voorwaarden
1. Het decentrale periferieapparaat ET 200M en de SIMATIC S7-300 moeten
worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze
moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening
te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt
geïnstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor
zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021).
2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan
zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met
de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.
3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad
hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).
4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in-
en uitgangen van tegen fouten beveiligde signaalmodulen, moeten zijn
goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.
5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door
transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.
6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C
7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een
bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:
Waarschuwing
De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele
diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en
ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).
Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er
geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.

Lijst van de toegelaten modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten modulen vindt u in het internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige

område zone 2

Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter
hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære.
Zone Eksplosionsfare Eksempel
2 Eksplosiv gasatmosfære Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med
optræder kun sjældent og varer flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede
kort rum
Sikkert Nej • Uden for zone 2
område • Standardanvendelser decentral periferi

I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af det decentrale

periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige område.

Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om ET 200M og de forskellige S7-300-komponenter findes
i manualen.

Produktionssted
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Godkendelse

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 efter EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrolnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Bemærk
Komponenter med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun monteres i
automatiseringssystemer SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M - udstyrskategori 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Vedligeholdelse
Skal den pågældende komponent repareres, bedes De sende den til
produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.

Særlige betingelser
1. Det decentrale periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 skal monteres i et
kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre
beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages højde for de
omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal være
udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).
2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på
> 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan
være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber
stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles.
3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den
krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).
4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til
fejlsikre signalkomponenter, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af
type EEx nA eller EEx nC.
5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via
transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.
6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C
7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes.
Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:
Advarsel
Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne
forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke
elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).
Denne advarsel skal der ikke tages højde for, hvis man ved, at der ikke er
nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.

Liste over godkendte komponenter

Listen med de godkendte komponenter findes på internettet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
under bidrags-ID 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö

räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2

Vyöhyke 2
Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan
räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan.
Vyöhyke Räjähdysvaara Esimerkki
2 Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla
ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
lyhytaikaisesti
turvallinen Ei • vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella
alue • Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset

Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita hajautetun ulkopiirilaitteen ET 200M ja

SIMATIC S7-300 asennukseen räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.

Lisätietoja
Lisätietoja ET 200M:ään ja erilaisiin S7-300-rakenneryhmiin löydätte ohjekirjasta.

Valmistuspaikka
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Hyväksyntä

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999

Tarkastusnumero: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Ohje
Rakenneryhmät hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan
käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 automatisointijärjestelmissä SIMATIC S7-300 /
ET 200M.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä lähettää valmistuspaikkaan.
Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.

Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Hajautettu ulkopiirilaite ET 200M ja SIMATIC S7-300 täytyy asentaa
kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään
kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet,
johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2
varten (EN 50021 mukaan).
2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C
lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C,
täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja.
3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja
kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.
4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään virheiltä
suojattujen signaalirakenneryhmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä
tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten.
5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä
enemmän kuin 40 %.
6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C
7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa
on seuraava varoitus:
Varoitus
Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia
varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä,
äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä).
Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista
räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.

Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien lista

Lista hyväksiytyistä rakennesarjoista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i

explosionsriskområde zon 2

Zon 2
Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att
en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger.
Zon Explosionsfara Exempel
2 Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår Områden kring flänsförbindelser med
endast sällan eller kortvarigt packningar vid rörledningar i slutna
utrymmen
Säkert Nej • Utanför zon 2
område • Standardanvändning av decentral
periferi

Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av den decentrala

periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATIC°S7-300 i ett explosionsriskområde.

Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om ET 200M och de olika S7-300-komponentgrupperna
finner du i handboken.

Tillverkningsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Godkännande

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 enligt EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrollnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Anvisning
Komponentgrupper med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får endast
användas i automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET°200M från
apparatgrupp 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Underhåll
Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgruppen insändas till tillverkaren.
Reparationer får endast genomföras där.

Särskilda villkor
1. Den decentrala periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATIC°S7-300 måste monteras
i ett kopplingsskåp eller metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass
IP 54. Därvid ska omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För
kåpan måste en tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021).
2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under
driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under
driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den
verkligen uppmätta temperaturen.
3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IP-
skyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).
4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till felsäkrade signalenheters
in- och utgångar, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller
EEx nC.
5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än
40°% genom transienter.
6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C
7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt
synligt ställe huset:
Varning
Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid
inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska
ledningar (insticksanslutningar).
Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder
någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper

Lista över godkända enheter återfinns i Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
under bidrags-ID 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao

perigo de explosão 2

Zona 2
As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são
diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera
explosiva.
Zona Perigo de explosão Exemplo
2 Só raramente e por um breve Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas
período de tempo surgem com vedações chatas em tubulações em
atmosferas explosivas recintos fechados
Área segura Não • fora da zona 2
• Aplicações descentralizadas de
periferia descentralizada

A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação do aparelho periférico

descentralizado ET 200M e da SIMATIC S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de
explosão.

Mais informações
Para obter mais informações sobre o ET 200M e os diversos grupos construtivos
S7-300, consulte o manual.

Local de produção
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Licença

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999

Número de ensaio: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Aviso
Componentes com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só podem ser
aplicados em sistemas de automação SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M da categoria de
aparelho 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Reparo
Os grupos construtivos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de produção
a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o reparo.

Condições especiais
1. O aparelho periférico ET 200M e a SIMATIC S7-300 devem ser montados em
um armário de distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no
mínimo o tipo de proteção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em
consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a
caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de
acordo com EN 50021).
2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições
operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições
operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as
caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente
medidas.
3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de
proteção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).
4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em
entradas e saídas de módulos de sinais protegidos contra erro, devem possuir
a licença para a proteção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de
transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.
6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C
7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem
visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:
Advertência
A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para
diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte
nenhum módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada).
Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma
atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.

Lista dos componentes autorizados

A lista com os módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
sob o número de ID 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

1.9.11 Χρήση της συσκευής ET 200M / S7-300 σε

επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή, ζώνη 2

Ζώνη 2
Οι επικίνδυνες για έκρηξη περιοχές χωρίζονται σε ζώνες. Οι ζώνες διαφέρουν
σύµφωνα µε την πιθανότητα ύπαρξης ενός ικανού για έκρηξη περιβάλλοντος.
Ζώνη Κίνδυνος έκρηξης Παράδειγµα
2 Εκρηκτικό περιβάλλον αερίου Περιοχές γύρω από φλαντζωτές
παρουσιάζεται µόνο σπάνια και συνδέσεις µε τσιµούχες σε σωληνώσεις σε
για σύντοµο χρονικό διάστηµα κλειστούς χώρους
Ασφαλής Όχι • Εκτός της ζώνης 2
περιοχή • Τυπικές εφαρµογές αποκεντρωµένης
περιφέρειας

Στη συνέχεια θα βρείτε σηµαντικές υποδείξεις για την εγκατάσταση της

αποκεντρωµένης περιφερειακής συσκευής ET 200M και του δοµικού
συγκροτήµατος SIMATIC S7-300 σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή.

Επιπλέον πληροφορίες
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες για τη συσκευή ET 200M και για τα διάφορα δοµικά
συγκροτήµατα (ενότητες) S7-300 θα βρείτε στο εγχειρίδιο.

Τόπος κατασκευής
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Άδεια

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο

EN 50021 : 1999
Αριθµός ελέγχου: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Υπόδειξη
Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα µε την άδεια II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 επιτρέπεται να
τοποθετηθούν µόνο σε συστήµατα αυτοµατισµού SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M της
κατηγορίας συσκευής 3.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
 General Technical Specifications

Συντήρηση
Για µια επισκευή πρέπει να σταλθεί το αντίστοιχο δοµικό συγκρότηµα στον τόπο
κατασκευής. Μόνο εκεί επιτρέπεται να γίνει η επισκευή.

Ιδιαίτερες προϋποθέσεις
1. Η αποκεντρωµένη περιφερειακή συσκευή ET 200M και το δοµικό συγκρότηµα
SIMATIC S7-300 πρέπει να ενσωµατωθούν σε ένα ερµάριο ζεύξης ή σε ένα
µεταλλικό περίβληµα. Αυτά πρέπει να εξασφαλίζουν το λιγότερο το βαθµό
προστασίας IP 54. Σε αυτήν την περίπτωση πρέπει να ληφθούν υπόψη οι
περιβαλλοντικές συνθήκες, στις οποίες θα εγκατασταθεί η συσκευή. Για το
περίβληµα πρέπει να προβλέπεται δήλωση του κατασκευαστή για τη ζώνη 2
(σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο EN 50021).
2. Εάν στο καλώδιο ή στην είσοδο του καλωδίου αυτού του περιβλήµατος κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία ξεπεράσει τους 70 °C ή όταν κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία στη διακλάδωση του σύρµατος
µπορεί να είναι µεγαλύτερη από 80 °C, πρέπει οι θερµοκρασιακές ιδιότητες των
καλωδίων να ταυτίζονται µε τις πραγµατικά µετρηµένες θερµοκρασίες.
3. Οι χρησιµοποιούµενες εισόδοι καλωδίων πρέπει να συµµορφώνονται µε το
βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 στην ενότητα 7.2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021).
4. Όλες οι συσκευές, συµπεριλαµβανοµένων διακοπτών κ.α., που συνδέονται στις
εισόδους και εξόδους δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων ασφαλών σηµάτων, πρέπει να
φέρουν εγκριµένη προστασία κατά έκρηξης τύπου EEx nA ή EEx nC.
5. Πρέπει να ληφθούν µέτρα, να µην µπορεί να γίνει υπέρβαση της ονοµαστικής
τάσης µέσω αιφνίδιας µεταβολής της τάσης πάνω από 40 %.
6. Περιοχή θερµοκρασίας περιβάλλοντος: 0° C έως 60° C
7. Πρέπει να τοποθετηθεί µέσα στο περίβληµα σε ευδιάκριτο σηµείο µετά το
άνοιγµα µία πινακίδα µε την ακόλουθη προειδοποίηση:
Προειδοποίηση
Το περίβληµα επιτρέπεται να ανοίγει µόνο για µικρό χρονικό διάστηµα, π.χ. για
τη διενέργεια οπτικής διάγνωσης. Μην κάνετε χρήση διακοπτών, µην τραβάτε ή
εµβυσµατώνετε δοµικά συγκροτήµατα και µη διαχωρίζετε ηλεκτροφόρους
αγωγούς (εµβσυµατώσιµες συνδέσεις).
Η προειδοποίηση αυτή δε χρειάζεται να ληφθεί υπ’ όψιν, εάν είναι γνωστό ότι
δεν υφίσταται ατµόσφαιρα παρουσιάζουσα κίνδυνο έκρηξης.

Κατάλογος των εγκεκριµένων δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων

Η λίστα µε τα εγκριµένα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα υπάρχει στο διαδίκτυο:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
µε τον κωδικό συνδροµής 13702947

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02
General Technical Specifications

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

1-18 A5E00105505-02
Power Supply Modules 2
Introduction
Various power supply modules are available to supply your S7-300 programmable
controller and the sensors/actuators with 24 VDC.

Power supply modules

This chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of
the S7-300 programmable controller.
In addition to the technical specifications, this chapter describes the following:
 The characteristics
 Connection diagram
 Block diagram
 Line protection
 Reaction to atypical operating conditions

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0) 2-2
2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0) 2-6
2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7 307-1EAx0-0AA0) 2-10
2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0) 2-15

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-1
Power Supply Modules

2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0)

Order number ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 305 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features:
 Output current 2 A
 Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
 Connection to DC power supply
(rated input voltage 24/48/72/96/110 VDC)
 Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
 Can be used as load power supply

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-2 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Wiring schematic of the PS 305; 2 A

LED for ”24 VDC

output voltage
available”
24 VDC

On/Off switch
for 24 VDC
I
Terminals for system
voltage and protective
grounding conductor

L+1
M1
L+2 Terminals for 24
M VDC output
L+2
2 voltage
M
L+2
2
M
2

Strain-relief assembly

Figure 2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-3
Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 305; 2 A (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W
H
D 80
125
120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 grounding conductor
(DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Weight Approx. 740 g
Insulation
Input Rating
 Isolation voltage rating 150 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to input)
 Rated value 24/48/72/96/110 VDC
 Tested with 2800 VDC
 Voltage range 16.8 to 138 VDC
Reliable isolation SELV circuit
Rated input current
 At 24 V 2.7 A Buffering of supply failures > 10 ms
(at 24/48/72/96/110 V)
 At 48 V 1.3 A
 At 72 V 0.9 A  Repeat rate min. 1 s
 At 96 V 0.65 A Efficiency 75%
 At 110 V 0.6 A
Power input 64 W
Inrush current (at 25 C) 20 A
Power loss 16 W
I2t (at inrush current) 5 A2s
Diagnostics
Output Rating
LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
 Rated value 24 VDC
 Permitted range 24 V  3 %, stable at
no load

 Ramp-up time max. 3 s

Output current
 Rated value 2 A; 1)
Can be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
from 1.65 to 1.95
IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

1) With limited input voltage range > 24 V (24 to 138 VDC) the PS 305 can be loaded with 3 A.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-4 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 305; 2 A

L+1 L+2

M1 M2

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 305 power supply module (2 A):
 Rated current at 110 VDC: 10 A
 Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
 I > 3.9 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
Voltage drop, shortening of service
 3 A < I  3.9 A (static) life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction -
side
There is an undervoltage on the pri- Automatic disconnection; automatic Dark
mary side voltage recovery

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-5
Power Supply Modules

2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A;

(6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features:
 Output current 2 A
 Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
 Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
 Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
 Can be used as load power supply

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-6 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 2 A

LED for ”24 VDC output

voltage available”
24 VDC

230V Voltage selector

On/Off switch for

I 24 VDC

L1 Terminals for system

N voltage and protective
grounding conductor

L+
Terminals for 24 VDC
M output voltage
L+
M

Strain-relief
assembly

Figure 2-3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 2 A

L1 L+

N M

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-7
Power Supply Modules

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 307 power supply module (2 A):
 Rated current at 230 VAC: 6 A
 Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
 I > 2.6 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
Voltage drop, shortening of service
 2 A < I  2.6 A (static) life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction -
side
There is an undervoltage on the pri- Automatic disconnection; automatic Dark
mary side voltage recovery

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-8 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 2 A (6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W
H
D 50
125
120 Protection class according to I, with protective groun-
(in millimeters) IEC 536 ding conductor
(DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Weight Approx. 420 g
Insulation
Input Rating  Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
 Rated value 120 / 230 VAC  Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
 Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
 Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current  Repeat rate min 1 s
 At 230 V 0.5 A
 At 120 V 0.8 A Efficiency 83 %
Inrush current (at 25°C) 20 A Power input 58 W
I2t (at inrush current) 1 A2s Power loss typ. 10 W
Output Rating Diagnostics
Output voltage LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
 Rated value 24 VDC
 Permitted range 24 V  5 %, stable at
no load
 Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s
Output current
 Rated value 2 A,
Cannot be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
1.1 to 1.3
IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-9
Power Supply Modules

2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7 307-1EAx0-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module

6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0

Order number ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (5 A) has the following salient features:
 Output current 5 A
 Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
 Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
 Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
 Can be used as load power supply

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-10 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 5 A

LED for ”24 VDC

output voltage
available”
24 VDC

Voltage Selector
230V

On/Off switch
for 24 VDC
I
Terminals for system
voltage and protective
grounding conductor

L1
N
L+ Terminals for
M 24 VDC output
L+ voltage
M
L+
M

Strain-relief assembly

Figure 2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-11
Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 5 A

L1 L+

N M

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 307 power supply module (5 A):
 Rated current at 230 VAC: 10 A
 Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
 I > 6.5 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
Voltage drop, shortening of service life
 5 A < I  6.5 A (static)
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage reco- Dark
very after short circuit has been eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the pri- Possible destruction –
mary side
There is an undervoltage on the Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
primary side recovery

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-12 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W
H
D 80
125
120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 grounding conductor
(DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Weight Approx. 740 g
Insulation
Input Rating
 Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
 Rated value 120 / 230 VAC
 Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency
Reliable isolation SELV circuit
 Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
 Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current  Repeat rate min 1 s
 At 120 V 2A
 At 230 V 1A Efficiency 87 %

Inrush current (at 25 C) 45 A Power input 138 W

I2t (at inrush current) 1.2 A2s Power loss typ. 18 W

Output Rating Diagnostics

Output voltage LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
 Rated value 24 VDC
 Permitted range 24 V  5 %,
stable at no load

 Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s

Output current
 Rated value 5A
Cannot be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
from 1.1 to 1.3
IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-13
Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W
H
H 80
125
120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 grounding conductor
(DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Weight Approx. 570 g
Insulation
Input Rating
 Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
 Rated value 120/230 VDC  Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
 Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
 Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz and/or 187 V)
Rated input current  Repeat rate min. 1 s
 At 120 V 2.1 A Efficiency 84%
 At 230 V 1.2 A Power input 143 W
Inrush current (at 25 C) 45 A Power loss 23 W
I2t (at inrush current) 1.8 A2s Diagnostics
Output Rating LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
 Rated value 24 VDC
 Permitted range 24 V  3 %
 Ramp-up time max. 3 s

Output current
 Rated value 5 A; cannot be
connected in parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic,
nonlatching,
from 1.1 to 1.3
IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-14 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (10 A) has the following salient features:
 Output current 10 A
 Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
 Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
 Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
 Can be used as load power supply

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 10 A

LED for ”24

VDC output
voltage
available” 24 VDC

Voltage selector 230V

On/Off switch for I

24 VDC
Terminals for
24 VDC
output voltage
L+
M
L+
M
L1 L+
N M
L+
M

Terminals for system

Strain-relief assembly voltage and protective
grounding conductor

Figure 2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-15
Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 10 A

L1 L+

N M

24 VDC

I/

Figure 2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example,
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 307 power supply module (10 A):
 Rated current at 230 VAC: 16 A
 Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions

If ... Reaction of the Module 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
 I > 13 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
Voltage drop, shortening of service
 10 A < I  13 A (static) life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction –
side
There is an undervoltage on the pri- Automatic disconnection; automatic Dark
mary side voltage recovery

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-16 A5E00105505-02
 Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 10 A (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W
H
D 200
125
120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 grounding conductor
(DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Weight 1.2 kg
Insulation
Input Rating
 Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
 Rated value 120 / 230 VAC  Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
 Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
 Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current  Repeat rate min 1 s
 At 230 V 1.7 A
Efficiency 89 %
 At 120 V 3.5 A
Power input 270 W
Inrush current (at 25 °C) 55 A
Power loss typ. 30 W
I2t (at inrush current) 9 A2s
Diagnostics
Output Rating
LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
 Rated value 24 VDC
 Permitted range 24 V  5 %, stable at
no load
 Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s

Output current
 Rated value 10 A,
Cannot be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
1.1 to 1.3
IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 2-17
Power Supply Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

2-18 A5E00105505-02
Digital Modules 3
Changes and improvements compared to the previous edition of the
Reference Manual
This chapter describes all new digital modules. Furthermore, two new overview
sections will make it easier for you to access the information:
 The ”Module Overview” section shows you the modules that are available,
together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find
the module suitable for your task.
 The section entitled ”Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the
Module” provides the answer to the question ”What must I do in succession to
commission the module quickly and successfully?

Structure of the chapter

The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description
2. Information that is generally valid – in other words, relating to all digital modules
(for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics)
3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for digital input modules
b) for digital output modules
c) for relay output modules
d) for digital input/output modules

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-1
Digital Modules

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

3.1 Module Overview 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital 3-10
Module
3.3 Assigning Parameters to Digital Modules 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of Digital Modules 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC; 3-13
(6ES7 321-1BLx0-0AA0)
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32  120 VAC; 3-16
(6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0)
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; 3-18
(6ES7 321-1BHx2-0AA0)
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC High Speed; 3-21
(6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0)
3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; with Hardware and 3-23
Diagnostic Interrupts, Clocked; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; Source Input; 3-33
(6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0)
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 × UC 24/48 V ; 3-35
(6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0)
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC; 3-37
(6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0)
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
120/230 VAC; 3-39
(6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0)
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC; 3-41
(6ES7 321-1FFx1-0AA0)
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321; 3-43
DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0)
3.16 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 A; 3-45
(6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0)
3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A; 3-48
(6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0)
3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A; 3-52
(6ES7 322-1BHx1-0AA0)
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A 3-55
High Speed; (6ES7 322-1BH10-0AA0)
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16
24/48 VUC 3-58
(6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0)
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 × 120/230 VAC/1 A 3-64
(6ES7 322-1FH00-0AA0)
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A; 3-67
(6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-2 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Section Contents Page

3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A; 3-70
with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0)
3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A; 3-80
(6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0)
3.25 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A; 3-83
(6ES7 322-1FFx1-0AA0)
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322; 3-86
DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0)
3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-92
DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0)
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC; 3-95
(6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0)
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-98
DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0)
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; 3-105
(6ES7 322-1HFx0-0AA0)
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-110
DI 16/DO16
24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0)
3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-114
DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BHx1-0AA0)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-3
Digital Modules

3.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

Table 3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module DI 32
DI 32 DI 16 DI 1624 DI 16 DI 16
24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC VDC High 24 VDC with 24 VDC;
Speed hardware and source input
diagnostic
Charac-
interrupts
teristics (-1BLx0-) (-1EL00-) (-1BHx2-) (-1BH10-) (-7BHx0-) (-1BH50-)

Number of inputs 32 DI; 32 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI,

isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in groups of 16 source input,
groups of 16 groups of 8 groups of 16 groups of 16 isolated in
groups of 16

Rated input 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

voltage
Suitable for... Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No Yes No No
clocked
operation

Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Hardware No No No No Yes No
interrupt upon
edge change
Settable No No No No Yes No
input delays
Special features – – – - 2 short-circuit- –
proof sensor
supplies for 8
channels each
External
redundant power
supply possible
to supply
sensors

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-4 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Table 3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance (continued)

SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module
DI 16UC DI 1648-125 DI 16120/230 DI 8120/230 DI 8120/230
24/48V VDC VAC VAC VAC ISOL
Charac-
teristics (-1CH00-) (-1CH80-) (-1FH00-) (-1FFx1-) (-1FF10-)
Number of inputs 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 8 DI, isolated in 8 DI; isolated in
groups of 1 groups of 8 groups of 4 groups of 2 groups of 1
Rated input 24 to 48 VDC, 24 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
voltage to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Switches; Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity two and three-wire AC proximity switches
switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No No No
clocked
operation

Programmable No No No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No No
Interrupt
Hardware No No No No No
interrupt upon
edge change

Settable No No No No No
input delays
Special features – –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-5
Digital Modules

Table 3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 32
DO 32

DO 16
DO 16
DO 16
DO 16

24 VDC 120VAC/ 24 VDC/ 24 VDC/ 24/48 VUC 120/230 VDC/
0.5 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A High 1A
Charac- Speed
teristics (-1BL00-) (-1EL00-) (-1BHx1-) (-1BH10-) (-5GH00-) (-1FH00-)
Number of 32 DO; 32 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO;
outputs isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 1 groups of 8
Output current 0.5 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 to 48 VDC, 120/230 VAC
voltage 24 to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No Yes No No
clocked
operation

Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
Interrupt
Substitute value No No No No Yes No
output
Special features –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-6 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Table 3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance (continued)

SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 8
24 VDC/ DO 8
24 VDC/ DO 8
48-125 DO 8
DO 8

2A 0.5 A with VDC/ 1.5 A 120/ 230 VAC/2A 120/ 230 VAC/
Charac- diagnostic 2A ISOL
teristics interrupt
(-1BF01-) (-8BFx0-) (-1CF80-) (-1FFx1-) (-5FF00-)
Number of 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in
outputs groups of 4 groups of 8 and reverse groups of 4 groups of 1
polarity
protection, in
groups of 4
Output current 2A 0.5 A 1.5 A 2A 2A
Rated load 24 VDC 24 VDC 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
voltage
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor
starters, fractional h.p. motors and
indicator lights.
Supports No No No No No
clocked
operation

Programmable No Yes No No Yes

diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No No Yes
Interrupt
Substitute value No Yes No No Yes
output
Special features – Redundant – Fuse blown -
driving of a load display.
possible Replaceable fuse
for each group

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-7
Digital Modules

Table 3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 322; DO SM 322; DO SM 322; DO SM 322; DO

16
Rel. 120 VAC 8
Rel. 230 VAC 8
Rel. 230 VAC/ 8
Rel. 230 VAC/
Charac- 5A 5A
teristics (-1HH01-) (-1HF01-) (-5HF00-) (-1HFx0-)

Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 2 groups of 1 groups of 1
Rated load voltage 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC,
48 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC 24 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC
Suitable for... AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and
indicator lights
Supports No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic Interrupt No No Yes No
Substitute value output No No Yes No
Special features –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-8 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Table 3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 323; SM 323;
Module
DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/ 0.5 A DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A
Characteristics (-1BL00-) (-1BHx1-)

Number of inputs 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8

Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
Rated input voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC
Output current 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC
Inputs suitable for... Switches and two, three and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs).
Outputs suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic Interrupt No No
Hardware interrupt upon No No
edge change
Settable input delay No No
Substitute value output No No
Special Features –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-9
Digital Modules

3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Digital Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps

Table 3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module

Step Procedure Refer to...

1. Select the module Section 3.1 and specific module section from
Section 3.5
2. Install the module in the ”Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
 S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
 ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
3. Assign parameters to module Section 3.3
4. Commission configuration ”Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
 S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
 ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
5. If commissioning was not Section 3.4
successful, diagnose
configuration

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-10 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment

Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of dome modules by means of parameter assignment.
The information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital
modules:
 Digital input module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC with hardware and diagnostic
interrupts; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)
 Digital output module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0)
 Digital output module SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0)
 Relay output module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0)

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter
assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP  to RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can also change the dynamic parameters in the running user program in an S7
logic control using SFC. Note, however, that after a change from RUN  STOP,
STOP  RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find
a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating State

Static PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-11
Digital Modules

Parameters of the digital modules

The settable parameters are listed in the special section on the module.

3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules

Introduction
The information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with
diagnostics capability. For the S7-300, these modules are as follows:
 Digital input module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC with hardware and diagnostic
interrupts; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)
 Digital output module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0)
 Digital output module SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0)
 Relay output module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0)

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
”Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7.
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
 The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the digital module and
forwarded to the CPU.
 The SF LED on the digital module lights.
 If you have programmed ”Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-12 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix ”Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

The digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of
their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic
message is triggered by the digital module. It goes out when all errors have been
rectified.
The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).

Diagnostic messages interrupt processing by the digital modules

You will find the diagnostic messages with their possible causes and remedial
action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on
the module.

3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC;

(6ES7 321-1BLx0-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 321-1BL80-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC has the following salient
features:
 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-13
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC

Backplane bus
interface

24V 24V

Channel
number
Status display -green

Figure 3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC

Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC

The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Input byte x Input byte (x+2)

Input byte (x+1) Input byte (x+3)

Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-14 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
120 Current consumption
(in millimeters)  From the backplane bus max. 15 mA
Weight Approx. 260 g Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Supports clocked No Status display Green LED per channel
operation
Interrupts None
Number of inputs 32
Diagnostic functions None
Length of cable
 Unshielded max. 600 m Data for Selecting a Sensor

 Shielded max. 1000 m Input voltage

Voltages, Currents, Potentials  Rated value 24 VDC

 For signal ”1” 13 to 30 V
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously  For signal ”0” –30 to + 5 V

 Horizontal configuration Input current

Up to 40 C 32  At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
Up to 60 C 16 Input delay
 Vertical configuration  At ”0” to ”1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Up to 40 C 32  At ”1” to ”0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Isolation Input characteristic curve According to IEC
 Between channels and 61131, type 1
backplane bus Yes
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
 Between the channels Yes BEROs
In groups of 16
 Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA
Permitted potential difference
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-15
Digital Modules

3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32
120 VAC;

(6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 32
120 VAC features the following characteristics:
 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 8
 120 VAC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32
120 VAC

1L 3L

1N 3N
Back-
plane
bus inter- 4L
2L face

2N 4N

Channel
number
Status display -green

Figure 3-3 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32  120 VAC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-16 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32
120 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W
H
D 40125117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 300 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No
Input voltage
operation
 Rated value 120 VAC
Number of inputs 32
 For ‘‘1’’ signal 74 to 132 V
Length of cable
 For ‘‘0’’ signal 0 to 20 V
 Unshielded max. 600 m
 Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
 Shielded max. 1000 m
Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 At ‘‘1’’ signal typ. 21 mA
Number of inputs that can be
Input delay
triggered simultaneously
 From ‘‘0’’ to ‘‘1’’ max. 15 ms
 Horizontal configuration
 From ‘‘1’’ to ‘‘0’’ max. 25 ms
Up to 40 C 32
Input characteristic curve According to IEC
Up to 60 C 24 61131, type 2
 Vertical configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 40 C 32 BEROs
 Permitted bias current max. 4 A
Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
 Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permitted potential difference
 Between Minternal and the 120 VAC
inputs
 Between the inputs of the 250 VAC
different groups
Insulation tested with 2500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 16 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-17
Digital Modules

3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC;

(6ES7 321-1BHx2-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 321-1BH82-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC has the following salient
features:
 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-18 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Backplane bus
interface

M
24 V

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24VDC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-19
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Input voltage

(in millimeters)  Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g  For signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

Data for Specific Module  For signal ”0” –30 to + 5 V

Supports clocked No Input current

operation  At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable  At ”0” to ”1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
 Unshielded max. 600 m  At ”1” to ”0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
 Shielded max. 1000 m Input characteristic curve According to IEC
61131, type 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Number of inputs that can be
BEROs
triggered simultaneously
 Horizontal configuration
 Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA

Up to 60 C 16
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16

Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus

Permitted potential difference

 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 10 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-20 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321;

DI 16
24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0)

Order number:
6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC High Speed has the following salient features:
 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).
 Supports clocked operation

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC High

Speed

Backplane bus
interface

M
24 V

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-5 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC High Speed

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-21
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Input voltage
(in millimeters)  Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g  For signal ”1” 13 to 30 V
Data for Specific Module  For signal ”0” –30 to + 5 V

Supports clocked Yes Input current

operation  At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable  At ”0” to ”1” 25 to 75
s
 Unshielded max. 600 m  At ”1” to ”0” 25 to 75
s
 Shielded max. 1000 m
Input characteristic curve According to IEC
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 61131, type 1

Number of inputs that can be Connection of Two-Wire Possible

triggered simultaneously BEROs
 Horizontal configuration  Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA
Up to 60 C 16
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16

Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus

Permitted potential difference

 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 110 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.8 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-22 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; with

Hardware and Diagnostic interrupts;
(6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts features
the following characteristics:
 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 Input characteristic curve according to IEC 61131, Type 2
 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).
 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each
 External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors
 ”Sensor supply (Vs)” status display
 Group error display
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable hardware interrupt
 Programmable input delays

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-23
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

SF L+
L+

Vs Vs
L+
M
Vs
Vs

Backplane bus M M
interface
24 V

Channel number
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red
Encoder supplies Vs - green

Figure 3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders

The figure below shows how encoder can additionally be supplied by means of Vs
with a redundant voltage source – for example, via another module).

L+ 1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module 
to the sensors

Figure 3-7 Terminal Assignment for the Redundant Supply of Encoders of the SM 321;
DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-24 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Interrupts

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117  Hardware interrupt Parameters can be
(in millimeters)  Diagnostic Interrupt assigned
Parameters can be
Weight Approx. 200 g assigned
Data for Specific Module Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
Supports clocked No assigned
operation  Group error display Red LED (SF)
Number of inputs 16  Diagnostics information Possible
Length of cable read-out
 Unshielded max. 600 m Sensor Power Supply Outputs
 Shielded max. 1000 m Number of outputs 2
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output voltage
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC  With load min. L+ (–2.5 V)
electronics and encoder L+
Output current
 Reverse polarity protection Yes  Rated value 120 mA
Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously  Permitted range 0 to 150 mA

 Horizontal configuration Additional (redundant) supply Permitted

 Up to 60 C 16 Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic
 Vertical configuration Data for Selecting a Sensor
 Up to 40 C 16
Input voltage
Isolation  Rated value 24 VDC
 Between channels and Yes  For signal ”1” 13 to 30 V
backplane bus
 For signal ”0” 30 to + 5 V
Permitted potential difference
Input current
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC  At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
circuits
Input characteristic curve According to IEC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC 61131, type 2
Current consumption Connection of Two-Wire Possible
 From the backplane bus max. 55 mA BEROs

 From load voltage L + max. 40 mA

 Permitted bias current max. 2 mA
(without sensor supply VS) Time/Frequency
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4 W Internal preparation time for
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics  Only interrupt processing max. 250
s
Status display  Interrupt and diagnostics max. 250
s
processing
 Inputs Green LED per channel
Input delay
 Sensor power supplies (Vs) Green LED per output
 Parameters can be Yes
assigned
 Rated value typ. 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-25
Digital Modules

3.9.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
Input delay/voltage type 0.1 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Module
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
15 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Diagnostics
 Sensor supply missing Yes/no No Static Channel
group
Trigger for hardware interrupt
 Rising edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
 Falling edge Yes/no No group

Assignment of the encoder supplies to channel groups

The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups:
inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the
diagnostics for the encoder supply, too.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-26 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Assigning interrupt parameters to channel groups

The table below shows the channels that can be combined to form a channel
group if you would like to parameterize interrupt processing.
You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program
with an SFC.

Table 3-9 Assigning the Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16
24
VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

Parameter... Can Be Set in Following Channel Group

Channel Groups Number
0 and 1 0
2 and 3 1
4 and 5 2
Hardware interrupt
6 and 7 3
(for falling, rising or both types of pulse
8 and 9 4
edges)
10 and 11 5
12 and 13 6
14 and 15 7
Diagnostic Interrupt 0 to 7
-
(with missing encoder supply) 8 to 15

Tolerances of the programmable input delays

Table 3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

(6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)
Programmed Input delay Tolerance
0.1 ms 87.5 to 112.5
s
0.5 ms 0.43 to 0.57 ms
3 ms (preset) 2.62 to 3.38 ms
15 ms 13.1 to 16.9 ms
20 ms 20 to 25 ms

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-27
Digital Modules

3.9.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 321; DI 16
24 DC depend on the operating mode of
the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply
Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

CPU Operating State Power Supply L+ Input Value of Digital

to Digital Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER OFF – L+ exists –
L+ missing –

Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 321;
DI 16
24 VDC.

Table 3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

(6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0)

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Parameters

Diagnostics can be assi-
gned
Sensor supply missing SF Channel group Yes
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module
Internal auxiliary power missing SF Module
Fuse blown SF Module
Incorrect parameter on module SF Module
No
Watchdog timeout SF Module
EPROM error SF Module
RAM error SF Module
Hardware interrupt lost SF Module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-28 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.

Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

A failure of the supply voltage of the SM 321; DI 16
24 DC is always indicated
by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on
the module.
The input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to
the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not modify the process value (refer to
Table 3-11).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 3.9.3).

Failure of the supply voltage with redundant encoder incoming supply

Note
If an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply
(Vs), a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and/or
external sensor supply and/or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular
sensor supply failure.

Short-circuit of sensor supply Vs

Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a
short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-29
Digital Modules

Causes of error and remedial measures

Table 3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0), Causes of
Error and Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Lack of encoder Overload of sensor supply Eliminate overload
supply
Short circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate short circuit
External auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Internal auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Fuse in module defective Replace module
Fuse blown Fuse in module defective Replace module
Wrong parameters in One parameter or the combination of Reassign module parameter
module parameters is not plausible
Watchdog tripped Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference
interference
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference and switch on/off
interference power supply of CPU
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference and switch on/off
interference power supply of CPU
Module defective Replace module
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, Change interrupt processing in CPU
since the previous interrupt was not and reconfigure module parameters, if
acknowledged; configuration error required
possible The error continues until the module is
configured with new parameters

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-30 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.9.3 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Introduction
This section describes the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC with regard to its interrupt
behavior. The following interrupts exist:
 Diagnostic Interrupt
 Hardware interrupt
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.9.1).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-31
Digital Modules

Hardware interrupt
The SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC can trigger a hardware interrupt for every channel
group with a rising or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change.
Perform parameter assignment one channel group at a time. It can be modified at
any time (in RUN mode using the user program).
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU
(OB 40). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority
classes with low priority.
You can set in the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40) how the
programmable logic controller has to react to an edge change. When the hardware
interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
The module can buffer one interrupt per channel. If no higher priority run-time
levels are waiting to be processed, the buffered interrupts (of all modules) are
serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they
occurred.

Hardware interrupt lost

In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that
channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostic interrupt ”hardware
interrupt lost” is triggered.
More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt
buffered on this channel has been executed.

Interrupt-triggering channels
The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware
interrupt OBs (in the OB start information). The start information is two words long
(bits 0 to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not
assigned.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-32 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
DC 24 V;

Source Input; (6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC (source input) has the following salient features:
 16 inputs, source input, isolated in groups of 16
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two- / three- / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

L+

Backplane bus
interface

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-8 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC
(Source Input)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-33
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Input voltage (reference potential is L+)
(in millimeters)
 Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g  For signal ”1” –13 V to –30 V
Data for Specific Module  For signal ”0” +30 V to –5 V
Supports clocked No Input current
operation  At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable  At ”0” to ”1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
 Unshielded max. 600 m  At ”1” to ”0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
 Shielded max. 1000 m Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131,
Voltages, Currents, Potentials type 1

Number of inputs that can be Connection of Two-Wire Possible

triggered simultaneously BEROs
 Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA
 Horizontal configuration
Up to 60 C 16
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16
Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Permitted potential difference
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 10 mA
Power dissipation of the typ. 3.5 W
module
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-34 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 × UC 24/48 V

(6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 × UC24/48 V features the following characteristics:
 16 inputs, isolated electrically
 Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V
 Rated input voltage from 24 to 48 DC)
 Inputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required configuration

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
24/48 VUC

1 21
2 22
0 0
3 23
4 24
1 1
5 25
6 26
2
Backplane bus interface

2
7 27
8 28
3 3
9 29
10 30

11 31
4 4 12 32
13 33
5 5 14 34
15 35
6 6 16 36
17 37
7 7 18 38
19 39
20 40

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-9 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
24/48VUC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-35
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16
24/48 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117 Status display Green LEDs per

Interrupts channel
Weight Approx. 260 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module None
Supports clocked No Data for Selecting a Sensor
operation
Input voltage
Number of inputs 16
 Rated value 24 or 48 VDC/ 24 or 48
Length of cable VAC
 Unshielded max. 600 m  At signal ”1” 14 V to 60 V
 Shielded max. 1000 m  At signal ”0” -5 V to 5 V
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  Frequency range 0 to 63 Hz

Number of inputs that can be Input current

triggered simultaneously
 At signal ”1” typ. 2.7 mA
 Horizontal configuration 16
up to 60°C  At signal ”0” -1 to +1 mA

 All other configuration types 16 Input delay

up to 40° C  At ”0” to ”1” max. 16 ms
Isolation  At ”1” to ”0” max. 16 ms

 Between channels and Yes Input characteristic curve According to IEC

backplane bus 61131, type 1

 Between channels Yes Connection of Two-Wire Possible

In groups of 1 BEROs

Permitted potential difference  Permitted bias current max. 1 mA

 Between the channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC

the backplane bus

 Between the inputs of the 170 VDC, 120 VAC

different groups

Insulation tested with

 Between the channels and 1500 VAC

the backplane bus

 Between the inputs of the 1500 VAC

different groups

Current consumption

 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA

Power dissipation of the module

 Operation with 24 V typ. 1.5 W

 Operation with 48 V typ. 2.8 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-36 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC;

(6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0)

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC features the following characteristics:
 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 8
 Rated input voltage 48 to 125 VDC
 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC

2
3
4
M
5
6
7
8
9
10 1M
48 to 125 V

12
13
14
M
15
Backplane bus 16
interface 17
18
19
20 2M
48 to 125 V

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-37
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16
48-125 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W
H
D 40  125  120 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 200 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Sensor Selection Data
Supports clocked No
operation Input voltage

Number of inputs 16  Rated value 48 VDC to

125 VDC
Length of cable
 Unshielded max. 600 m  For signal ”1” 30 V to 146 V

 Shielded max. 1000 m  For signal ”0” -146 V to 15 V

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Input current

Number of inputs that can be  At signal ”1” typ. 3.5 mA

triggered simultaneously at UE Up to 60 V Up to 146 Input delay
V
 At ”0” to ”1” 0.1 ms to 3.5 ms
 Horizontal installation  At ”1” to ”0” 0.7 ms to 3.0 ms
Up to 50 C 8 8
Input characteristic curve According to IEC
Up to 60 C 8 6 61131, type 1
 Vertical configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 40 C 8 8 BEROs

Isolation  Permitted bias current max. 1 mA

 Between channels and Yes

backplane bus
 Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permiss. potential differences
 Between the different 146 VDC / 132 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with 1500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 40 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.3 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-38 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16
AC 120/230 V

(6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 × 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
 16 inputs, electrically isolated in groups of 4
 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three-wire proximity switches (alternating
voltage)

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

N
M

Backplane bus N
interface

N
M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 × 120/230 VAC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-39
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117 Status display Green LED per channel

(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 240 g Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module Sensor Selection Data
Supports clocked No Input voltage
operation
 Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 16  For signal ”1” 79 to 264 V
Length of cable  For signal ”0” 0 to 40 V
 Unshielded max. 600 m  Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
 Shielded max. 1000 m Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At signal ”1”
120 V, 60 Hz typ. 8.0 mA
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 V
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 16.0 mA
All load voltages must be of the
same phase Input delay

Number of inputs that can be

 ”0” to ”1” max. 25 ms
triggered simultaneously  ”0” to ”1” max. 25 ms

 Horizontal configuration 16 Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131,

Up to 60 °C type 1

 Vertical configuration 16
Connection of Two-Wire
BEROs
Possible
Up to 40 °C
 Permitted bias current max. 2 mA
Isolation

 Between channels and Yes

backplane bus

 Between channels Yes

In groups of 4

Permitted potential difference

 Between Minternal and the 500 VAC

inputs

 Between the inputs of the 230 VAC

different groups

Insulation tested with 4000 VDC

Current consumption

 From the backplane bus max. 29 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-40 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC;

(6ES7 321-1FFx1-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 321-1FF81-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 2
 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC

1N

2N
M
Backplane bus
interface 3N

4N
M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-41
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 240 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No
Input voltage
operation
 Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 8
 For signal ”1” 79 to 264 V
Length of cable
 For signal ”0” 0 to 40 V
 Unshielded max. 600 m
 Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
 Shielded max. 1000 m
Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 At signal ”1”
Number of inputs that can be 120 V, 60 Hz typ. 6.5 mA
triggered simultaneously
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 11 mA
 Horizontal configuration
Input delay
Up to 60 C 8
 At ”0” to ”1” max. 25 ms
 Vertical configuration
 At ”1” to ”0” max. 25 ms
Up to 40 C 8
Input characteristic curve According to IEC
Isolation 61131, type 1
 Between channels and Yes Connection of Two-Wire Possible
backplane bus BEROs
 Between the channels Yes  Permitted bias current max. 2 mA
In groups of 2
Permitted potential difference
 Between Minternal and the 230 VAC
inputs
 Between the inputs of the 500 VAC
different groups
Insulation tested with 4000 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 29 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-42 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321;

DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 8 × 120/230 VAC ISOL has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL

4
7

10
M
11
14

17

M 20

Backplane bus
interface 21
24

27
30
31

34
37

40
M

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-43
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8
120/230 VAC ISOL

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117 Status display Green LED per channel

(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 240 g Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No Input voltage
operation
 Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 8  For signal ”1” 79 to 264 V
Length of cable  For signal ”0” 0 to 40 V
 Unshielded max. 600 m  Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
 Shielded max. 1000 m Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At signal ”1”
120 V, 60 Hz typ. 7.5 mA
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 17.3 W
All load voltages must be of the
same phase Input delay
Number of inputs that can be  ”0” to ”1” max. 25 ms
triggered simultaneously  ”0” to ”1” max. 25 ms
 Horizontal configuration 8 Input characteristic curve According to IEC
Up to 60 °C 61131, type 1

 Vertical configuration 8 Connection of Two-Wire Possible

Up to 40 °C BEROs

Isolation  Permitted bias current max. 2 mA

 Between channels and Yes

backplane bus

 Between channels Yes

In groups of 1

Permitted potential difference

 Between Minternal and the 230 VAC

inputs

 Between the inputs of the 500 VAC

different groups

Insulation tested with

 Between Minternal and the 1500 VAC

inputs

 Between the inputs of the 2000 VAC

different groups

Current consumption

 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA

Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-44 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 32
24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 A has the following
salient features:
 32 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 0.5 A output current
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 32
DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a ”1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-45
Digital Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/ 0.5 A

1 L+ 3 L+
24 V 24 V

M M

Backplane bus
interface
1M 3M

2L+ 4 L+
24 V 24 V

M M

2M 4M

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 A

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-15 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-46 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/ 0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At signal ”1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 260 g Output current
Data for Specific Module  At signal ”1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 32  At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
 Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
 Shielded max. 1000 m  At ” 0” to ”1” max. 100
s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At ”1” to ”0” max. 500
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 5 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of 2
 Horizontal configuration outputs
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
 For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A a load of the same group)
 Vertical configuration  To increase performance Not possible
Up to 40 C max. 2 A Triggering a digital input Possible
Isolation Switch rate
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus  For resistive load max. 100 Hz

 Between the channels Yes  Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz

according to IEC 947-5-1,
In groups of 8 DC 13
Permitted potential difference  For lamp load max. 10 Hz
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuits
circuit interruption voltage up
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Current consumption output
 From the backplane bus max. 110 mA  Threshold on 1 A, typ.
 From load voltage L + max. 160 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.6 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-47
Digital Modules

3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A;

(6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 32  120 VAC/1.0 A features the following characteristics:
 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
 1.0 A output current
 120 VAC rated load voltage
 Blown fuse indicator for each group
 Suitable for AC solenoids, contactors, starters, fractional horsepower motors
and indicator lights
 Group error display

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-48 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A

SF1 SF3
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7

SF2 SF4
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
X 2
3 4

Channel numbers
Status display – green
Error display - red

SF

1L 3L

Back-
plane
bus
interface

SF 1N 3N
2L 4L

2N 4N

Figure 3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; D0 32  120 VAC/1.0 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-49
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-50 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 32
120 VAC/1.0 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 80125117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At signal ”1” min. L1 (–1.5 V)
Weight Approx. 500 g Output current
Data for Specific Module  At ”1” signal
Supports clocked No Rated value 1A
operation
Permitted range 10 mA to 1 A
Number of outputs 32
Permitted current surge 10 A
Length of cable (per group) (for 2 AC scan cycles)
 Unshielded max. 600 m  At ”0” signal max. 3 mA
 Shielded max. 1000 m Leakage current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output delay (for resistive load)
Rated load voltage L1 120 VAC  At ”0” to ”1” 3 ms
 Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz  At ”1” to ”0” ½ AC scan cycle
Total current of the outputs Zero cross inhibit voltage Non-zero cross outputs
(per group)
Size of the motor starter max. size 4 to NEMA
 Horizontal configuration max. 3 A
Up to 60C Lamp load max. 25 W

 Vertical configuration max. 4 A Parallel connection of

Up to 40C 2 outputs

Isolation  For redundant Possible (only outputs

actuation of a load of the same group)
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus  To increase performance Not possible

 Between the channels Yes Actuation of Possible

digital input
In groups of 8
Switch rate
Permitted potential difference  For resistive load max. 10 Hz
 Between Minternal and the 120 VAC  Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
outputs to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
 Between the outputs of the 250 VAC  For lamp load 1 Hz
different groups Short-circuit protection of the No
Insulation tested with 2500 VDC output

Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
 From load voltage L1 max. 275 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. max. 25 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions Yes
 Group error display Red LED (SF)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-51
Digital Modules

3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 16
24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BHx1-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 322-1BH81-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A has the following
salient features:
 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 0.5 A output current
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A carry a ”1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-52 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

1 L+

M 24 V

Backplane bus
interface
1M

2 L+

M 24 V

2M

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 3-18 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-53
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At signal ”1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 190 g Output current
Data for Specific Module  At signal ”1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 16  At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
 Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay
 Shielded max. 1000 m (for resistive load)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At ”0” to ”1” max. 100
s

Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC  At ”1” to ”0” max. 500
s

Total current of the outputs Load resistor range 48  to 4 k

(per group) Lamp load max. 5 W
 Horizontal configuration Parallel connection of
Up to 40 C max. 4 A 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A  For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C max. 2 A  To increase performance Not possible

Isolation Triggering a digital input Possible

 Between channels and Yes Switch rate

backplane bus  For resistive load max. 100 Hz
 Between the channels Yes  Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
In groups of 8 according to IEC 947-5-1,
DC 13
Permitted potential difference
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
 For lamp load max. 10 Hz
circuits Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuit interruption voltage up
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Current consumption
output
 From the backplane bus max. 80 mA
 Threshold on 1 A, typ.
 From load voltage L + max. 80 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.9 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-54 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

High Speed; (6ES7 322-1BH10-0AA0)

Order number:
6ES7 322-1BH10-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed has the following salient
features:
 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 0.5 A output current
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
 Supports clocked operation

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed carry a ”1” signal for
approximately 50
s for reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-55
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO

16
24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

1 L+

M 24 V

Backplane bus
interface 1M

2 L+

24 V

2M

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 3-19 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-56 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At signal ”1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 200 g Output current
Data for Specific Module  At signal ”1”
Supports clocked Yes Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 16  At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
 Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay
 Shielded max. 1000 m (for resistive load)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At ”0” to ”1” max. 100
s

Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC  At ”1” to ”0” max. 200
s

Total current of the outputs Internal module run time

(per group) between the backplane bus and
the output driver input
 Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
 At ”0” to ”1” 0.1
s to 20
s

Up to 60 C max. 3 A  At ”1” to ”0” 0.1
s to 20
s

 Vertical configuration Load resistor range 48  to 4 k

Up to 40 C max. 2 A Lamp load max. 5 W
Isolation Parallel connection of
2 outputs
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus  For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
 Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8  To increase performance Not possible

Permitted potential difference Triggering a digital input Possible

 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC Switch rate

circuits  For resistive load max. 1000 Hz
Insulation tested with 500 VDC  Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
Current consumption according to IEC 947-5-1,
DC 13
 From the backplane bus max. 70 mA
 From load voltage L + max. 110 mA  For lamp load max. 10 Hz
(without load) Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 5 W circuit interruption voltage up

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

output
Status display Green LED per channel
 Threshold on 1 A, typ.
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-57
Digital Modules

3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 × 24/48 VUC;

(6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 16×UC24/48 V has the following features:
 16 individually isolated static relay outputs
 Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V
 Switch characteristics: RDS ON is typically 0.25 ohms and RDS OFF is typically
greater than 100 G-ohms
 Designed for load voltages up to 48 V AC or DC and there is no minimum load
voltage
 Designed for output loads up to 0.5 A and there is no minimum load current
 Outputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required
configuration
 Substitute values or ”Hold last values” can be programmed for the outputs
 The module has diagnostics for parameterization errors and external loss of
voltage
 Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional
horsepower motors and indicator lights

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-58 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 × 24/48 VUC

24V L+ 1 21
SF
0 2 22
0
3 23
1 4 24
1
5 25
2 6 26
2
7 27
3 3 8 28

Backplane bus
9 29
10 30
5V
+

11 31
4 4 12 32
13 33
5 5 14 34
15 35
6 6 16 36
17 37
7 7 18 38
19 39
M 20 40

Channel number
Status LEDs - green
Byte X Byte (X +1)

Figure 3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16×24/48 VUC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-59
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 × 24/48 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117  Between channels and 1500 VAC
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 260 g  Between channels and 1500 VAC
power supply of the
Data for Specific Module electronics
Supports clocked No  Between the outputs of the 1500 VAC
operation different groups
Number of outputs 16 Current consumption
Length of cable  From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
 Unshielded max. 600 m  From supply max. 200 mA
 Shielded max. 1000 m voltage L+
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power dissipation of the module typ. 2.8 W
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
electronics L+
Status display Green LEDs per
 Reverse polarity protection Yes channel
 Power failure min. 5 ms Diagnostic functions
jumpering
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
Total current of the outputs
(per group) Interrupts
 Horizontal configuration max. 0.5 A  Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
Up to 60° C  Diagnostics information assigned
 All other mounting positions max. 0.5 A read-out Possible
Up to 40° C Data for Selecting an Actuator
Total current of the outputs (per Output voltage
module)
 At signal ”1” min. L+ (-0.25 V)
 Horizontal configuration max. 8 A
Up to 60° C Output current

 All other mounting positions max. 8 A  At signal ”1”

Up to 40° C rated value 0.5 A
permissible surge current max. 1.5 A
Isolation (per group) (max. 50 ms)
 Between channels and Yes  For ”0” signal max. 10 uA
backplane bus (leakage current)
 Between channels and Yes Output delay (for resistive load)
power supply of the
electronics  At ”0” to ”1” max. 6 ms
 At ”1” to ”0” max. 3 ms
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 1 External fuse for relay outputs Fuse,
I2 t: 1 A2 s,
Permitted potential difference quick-acting*
 Between channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC Lamp load max. 2.5 W
backplane bus
Contact circuit (internal) parallel Varistor, 85 V
 Between channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC switching of 2 outputs
power supply of the
electronics  For redundant triggering of Possible
a load
 Between the outputs of the 170 VDC, 120 VAC  To increase performance Not possible
different groups

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-60 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Triggering a digital input Possible * Outputs must be protected by a 250 V quick-acting fuse
(recommended fuses: Wickman 194-1100 1.1 A and
Switch rate Littelfuse 0217-800 V 800 mA).
When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance with
 For resistive load max. 10 Hz the National Electric Code (NEC), use only a suitable tool
 Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz to remove the fuse if the module is not located in a
to IEC 947-5-1; DC 12 potentially explosive atmosphere.
AC/12
 For lamp load max. 0.5 Hz

Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 × UC24/48 V

Parameterization
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the data record numbers for static and dynamic
parameters.

Table 3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters):

Parameter Comments
Enable diagnostics Enabling an interrupt when the module fails
because of an operation code error, a hardware
fault or a voltage error.

Table 3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters):

Parameter Comments
Behavior on CPU STOP
Hold last value
Substitute value output
Substitute value
Substitute value Each bit corresponds to an output.

This module supports failure state/substitute value outputs when the CPU changes
from RUN to STOP.

Status display
Each output of this module has a green LED to indicate the status of the relay.
There is also a red LED (SF) that indicates the diagnostics status of the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-61
Digital Modules

Diagnostics, troubleshooting
Diagnostic data is assigned in accordance with the following technical
specifications.
In the additional interrupt information, the four system diagnostics data bytes can
be read as data record 0 or in the first 4 bytes of data record 1.

Structure of the data record

The structure of data record 1 is as specified in Table 3-16.

Table 3-16 Structure of the Data Record for SM 322 DO 16×UC 24/48 V

Data record 1 Available information Contents

byte address
0..3 System-specific diagnostics data 4 Bytes
4 Channel type 72h
5 Diagnosis length per channel in bytes 0
6 Number of channels 16
7 Channel error vector 0 byte per
channel
8..15 Channel-specific diagnostic data 0 byte per
channel

Table 3-17 shows the system diagnostics for module SM 322;

DO 16 × UC24/48 V.

Table 3-17 System Diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16×UC 24/48 V

System diagnosis byte 1: Technical specification

D0: Module error Yes
D1: Internal malfunction Yes
D2: External malfunction Yes
D3: Channel error No
D4: External auxiliary supply missing Yes
D5: Front connector missing No
D6: Module not parameterized. Yes
D7: Wrong parameters Yes

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-62 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Table 3-17 System Diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16×UC 24/48 V

System diagnosis byte 2:

D0..D3 Module Type 1111
D4: Channel information available No
D5: User information available No
D6: Diagnostic alarm from substitute No
D7: Spare
System diagnosis byte 3:
D0: Memory module incorrect/missing No
D1: Communication error No
D2: RUN/STOP mode No
D3: Time monitoring triggered Yes
D4: Internal power failure No
D5: Battery 1 empty No
D6: Complete backup failure No
System diagnosis byte 4:
D7: Spare
D0: Rack failure No
D1: Processor failure Yes
D2: EPROM error Yes
D3: RAM error Yes
D4: DAC error No
D5: Blown fuse No
D6: Hardware interrupt lost No
D7: Spare
Channel-specific diagnosis byte
D0: Parameter setup error No
D1: Grounding error No
D2: Short-circuit to P No
D3: Short-circuit to M No
D4: Wire-break No
D5: Spare
D6: Auxiliary supply missing No
D7: Overtemperature No

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-63
Digital Modules

3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 × 120/230 VAC/1 A: (6ES7 322-1FH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 322-1FH00-0AA0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 × 120/230 VAC/1 A has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
 16 outputs, fused and electrically isolated in groups of 8
 1 A output current
 Rated load voltage 120/230 VAC
 Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional
horsepower motors and indicator lights

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-64 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322 DO 16 × 120/230 VAC/1 A

SF 5V L1
SF

Backplane bus
interface
N
5V

L1
SF

Channel number
Status LEDs - green
Fault indicator – red

Figure 3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-65
Digital Modules

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117 Output voltage

Weight Approx. 275 g

 At signal ”1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Output current
Data for Specific Module
Supports clocked No
 At signal ”1”
operation Rated value 1A
Permitted range for 0° C to 10 mA to 1 A
Number of outputs 16
40° C
Length of cable Permitted range for 0° C to 10 mA to 0.5 A
 Unshielded max. 600 m 60° C
 Shielded max. 1000 m Permitted surge current max. 20 A
(per group) (with 2 half-waves)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 At signal ”0” max. 2 mA
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC (leakage current)
All load voltages must be of the
same phase Inhibit voltage max. 60 V

Total current of the outputs Zero cross inhibit voltage

(per group) Size of the motor starter max. size 4 to NEMA
 Horizontal configuration Lamp load max. 50 W
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
Connecting two outputs in
Up to 60 C max. 2 A parallel
 Vertical configuration  For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Up to 40 C max. 2 A a load of the same group)
Isolation  To increase performance No
 Between channels and Yes Triggering a digital input No
backplane bus
Switch rate
 Between channels Yes
 For resistive load max. 10 Hz
In groups of 8
 Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
Permitted potential difference to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
 Between Minternal and the 500 VAC  For lamp load max. 1 Hz
outputs
Short-circuit protection of output Fuse 8 A,
 Between the outputs of the 230 VAC 250 V; per group
different groups
 Min. current required for min. 40 A
Insulation tested with 4000 VDC fuse to blow
Current consumption  Max. response time max. 300 ms
 From the backplane bus max. 200 mA
Replacement fuses 8 A fuse, quick-acting
 From load voltage L+ max. 2 mA
(without load)  Wickman 19 194-8 A

Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W  Schurter SP001.1014

 Littlefuse 217.008
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Fuse carrier
Status display Green LED per channel
 Wickman 19 653
Interrupts
 Diagnostic Interrupt No
Diagnostic functions
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
(fuse or no L1/N)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-66 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A;

(6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A has the following salient
features.
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 4
 2 A output current
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A carry a ”1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-67
Digital Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A

1 L+

M
24 V

Backplane bus
interface
1M

2 L+

M
24 V

2M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-68 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At signal ”1” min. L + –0.8 V
Weight Approx. 190 g Output current
Data for Specific Module  At signal ”1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 2A
operation Permitted range 5 mA to 2.4 A
Number of outputs 8  At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
 Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
 Shielded max. 1000 m  At ”0” to ”1” max. 100
s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At ”1” to ”0” max. 500
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 12  to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 10 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of
 Horizontal configuration 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 4 A  For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
 Vertical configuration a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A  To increase performance Not possible
Isolation Triggering a digital input Possible
 Between channels and Yes Switch rate
backplane bus
 For resistive load max. 100 Hz
 Between the channels Yes
 Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
In groups of 4 according to IEC 947-5-1,
Permitted potential difference DC 13
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC  For lamp load max. 10 Hz
circuits
Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–48 V)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC circuit interruption voltage up
Current consumption Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
 From the backplane bus max. 40 mA output
 From load voltage L+ max. 60 mA  Threshold on typ. 3 A
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.8 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-69
Digital Modules

3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/ 0.5 A;

with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO
24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 0.5 A output current
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
 2 terminals per output
– Output without series diode
– Output with series diode (for redundant load control)
 Group error display
 Channel-specific status and error LEDs
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable substitute value output

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-70 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

SF
F0
0
F1
1
F2
2
F3
3

F4
4
F5
5
F6
6
F7
7

Connection diagram
Channel number, channel fault (F)
Status display -green
Fault indicator – red

Figure 3-23 Module View of the SM 322; DO 8
24 V DC/0.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-71
Digital Modules

L+ Monitoring

L+
Fuse
Monitoring

Control
Output

Diagnostics
Output Output
Status (8x)
drivers
Backplane (8 x)
bus Logic M

Channel status LED (8x) 0 to 7

green

Channel fault LED (8x) F 0 to 7

red

Group error display (1x) SF

red

Figure 3-24 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
DC 24 V/0.5 A

Redundant control of a load

The output with series diode can be used for redundant control of a load.
Redundant control is possible from two different signal modules without external
circuitry. Both modules must have the same reference potential, M.

Note
If the output with series diode is used, external short-circuits to L+ cannot be
detected.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-72 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts
Weight Approx. 210 g  Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
Data for Specific Module assigned

Supports clocked No Diagnostic functions Parameters can be

operation assigned
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
Number of outputs 8
Length of cable  Channel error display (F) Red LED (F) per
 Unshielded max. 600 m channel
 Shielded max. 1000 m  Diagnostics information Possible
readable
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Total current of the outputs (per
group) without series diode
 Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
Up to 60 C max. 3 A
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
Total current of the outputs (per
group) with series diode
 Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C max. 3 A
Up to 60 C max. 2 A
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C max. 3 A
Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Permitted potential difference
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 70 mA
 From load voltage L+ max. 90 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 5 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-73
Digital Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator  To increase performance Not possible

Output voltage Triggering a digital input Possible
 At signal ”1” 1 binary input
Without series diode min. L + (–0.8 V) according to IEC
61131, Type 2;
With series diode min. L + (–1.6 V)
Type 1 with disabled
Output current open-circuit monitoring

 At signal ”1” Switch rate

Rated value 0.5 A  For resistive load max. 100 Hz
Permitted range 10 mA to 0.6 A1)  Inductive load according to max. 2 Hz
IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
 At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA
 For lamp load max. 10 Hz
(leakage current)
Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–45 V)
Output delay (for resistive load)
circuit interruption voltage up
 At ”0” to ”1” max. 180
s
max. 245
s Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
 At ”1” to ”0”
output
Load resistor range 48  to 3 k
 Threshold on typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A
Lamp load max. 5 W
1) 5 mA to 0.6 A with disabled open-circuit monitoring
Parallel connection of
2 outputs
 For redundant Output with series
actuation of a load diode only, must have
the same reference
potential

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-74 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Parameterization
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Apply substitute value (EWS) EWS
Hold last value (LWH)
Diagnostics
 Wire-break Yes/no No
 No load voltage L+ Yes/no No Static Channel
 Short-circuit to M Yes/no No
 Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No
Apply substitute value ”1” Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-75
Digital Modules

3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the output values

The output values of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the operating
mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 3-19 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on
the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A.

CPU Operating State Power Supply L+ to Digital Output Value of Digital

Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Substitute value/last value
(0 signal preset)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER – L+ exists 0 signal
OFF
L+ missing 0 signal

Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A is always
indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made
available on the module (entry in diagnosis).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 3.23.3).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-76 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

The following table provides an overview of the diagnostic messages of the
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A.

Table 3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagno- Parameters can

stics be Assigned
Wire-break SF Channel Yes
Load voltage missing SF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ SF Channel Yes
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Internal auxiliary power missing SF Module No
Fuse blown SF Module No
Watchdog timeout SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No
* Open-circuit detection is performed at a current < 1 mA.
When suitably parameterized, a wire-break results only in the
SF LED and the corresponding channel error LED lighting up.

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-77
Digital Modules

Causes of error and remedial action

Table 3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial
Action

Diagnostics Error Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message Detection ...
Wire-break Only with Open circuit between module Close circuit
output to ”1” and actuator
Channel not connected Disable the ”Diagnose
(open) Wire-break” parameter for the
channel in STEP 7
No load voltage Only with Defective output Replace module
output to ”1”
Short-circuit to M Only with Overload of output Eliminate overload
output to ”1”
Short-circuit of output to M Eliminate short circuit
Short-circuit to L+ Always Short-circuit at output to L+ of Eliminate short circuit
module supply
No external auxiliary Always Power supply L+ to module Feed supply L+
voltage missing
No internal auxiliary Always Power supply L+ to module Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Fuse in module defective Replace module
Fuse blown Always Fuse in module defective Replace module
Watchdog tripped Always Temporary high Eliminate interference
electromagnetic interference
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interference and
electromagnetic interference switch on/off power supply of
CPU
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interference and
electromagnetic interference switch on/off power supply of
CPU
Module defective Replace module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-78 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Introduction
The SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.23.1).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-79
Digital Modules

3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A;

(6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0)

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A features the following characteristics:
 8 outputs, reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 4
 1.5 A output current
 Rated load voltage 48 to 125 VDC
 Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
 Group error display

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the
SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A carry a ”1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-80 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5A

+5V 1 1 L+
SF

SF
5

48 to
7
125 V

9
Backplane bus
interface 10 1M

+5V 11 2 L+

13

15
48 to
17 125 V

19
20 2M

Channel number
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red

Figure 3-25 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-81
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
48-125 VDC/1.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 40  125  117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At ” 1” signal min. L + (–1.,2 V)
Weight Approx. 250 g Output current
Data for Specific Module  At ” 1” signal
Supports clocked No Rated value 1.5 A
operation Permitted range 10 mA to 1.5 A
Number of outputs 8  Permitted surge current max. 3 A for 10 ms
Length of cable  For ”0” signal max. 0.5 mA
 Unshielded max. 600 m (leakage current)
 Shielded max. 1000 m Output delay (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At ”0” to ”1” max. 2 ms
Rated load voltage L+ 48 VDC to 125 VDC  At ”1” to ”0” max. 15 ms

 Reverse polarity protection Yes, by means of Lamp load max. 15 W at 48 V

fuse1) max. 40 W at 125 V

Total current of the outputs Parallel connection of 2 outputs

(per group)  For redundant actuation of Possible (only outputs
 Horizontal configuration a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 6 A  To increase performance Not possible
Up to 50 C max. 4 A Triggering a digital input Possible
Up to 60 C max. 3 A
Switch rate
 Vertical configuration  For resistive load max. 25 Hz
Up to 40 C max. 4 A  For inductive load max. 0.5 Hz
Isolation  For lamp load max. 10 Hz
 Between channels and Yes Limit (internal) of the in typ. M (–1V)
backplane bus ductive circuit interruption
 Between the channels Yes voltage up
In groups of 4 Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic3)
output
Permitted potential difference
 Threshold on typ. 4.4 A
 Between the different 146 VDC / 132 VAC
circuits Replacement fuses Fuse 6.,3 A/250 V,
quick blow, 5 x 20 mm
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC
 Schurter SP0001.1012
Current consumption
 Wickmann 194-1630-0
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
 From the load voltage L+ max. 2 mA Fuse carrier
(no load)  Schurter FEK 0031.3562
Power dissipation of the module typ. 7.2 W
1) The fuses on this module are merely supplementary
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for
branch circuits conforming to the local regulations for
Status display Green LED per channel electrical engineering) is required in the supply cables of
Interrupts None the load circuit.
2) Potential errors are:
Diagnostic functions - No load voltage
 Group error display Red LED (SF)2)
- Fuse defective
- Output overloaded
3) If an overload condition is detected, the output is
inhibited for approximately 2.4 s.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-82 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.25 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A; (6ES7 322-1FFx1-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 322-1FF81-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A features the following characteristics:
 8 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 4
 2 A output current
 120/230 VAC rated load voltage
 Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.
 Group error display

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-83
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A

5V
SF 1L
SF 1N

Backplane bus
interface

5V
2L
2N

M
*
M

Channel number
Status display – green
Fault indicator – red * Zero cross inhibit voltage triac

Figure 3-26 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-84 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Output voltage
(in millimeters)  At signal ”1”
Weight Approx. 275 g – At maximum current min. L1 (–1.5 V)
Data for Specific Module – At minimum current min. L1 (–8.5 V)

Supports clocked No Output current

operation  At signal ”1”
Number of outputs 8 Rated value AC 2 A1)
Length of cable Permitted range for 0 C to 10 mA to 2 A
 Unshielded max. 600 m 40 C
 Shielded max. 1000 m Permitted range for 40 C 10 mA to 1 A
to 60 C
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Permitted current surge max. 20 A
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
(per group) (not more than 1 AC
 Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz scan cycle)
Total current of the outputs  At signal ”0” max. 2 mA
(per group) (leakage current)
 Horizontal configuration Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A  From ”0” to ”1” Not more than 1 AC
Up to 60 C max. 2 A scan cycle

 Vertical configuration  From ”1” to ”0” Not more than 1 AC

scan cycle
Up to 40 C max. 2 A
Minimum load current 10 mA
Isolation
Zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 V
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
 Between the channels Yes Lamp load max. 50 W
In groups of 4
Connecting two outputs in parallel
Permitted potential difference
 For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
 Between Minternal and the 230 VAC a load of the same group)
outputs
 To increase performance Not possible
 Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
Triggering a digital input Possible
different groups
Switch rate
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC
 For resistive load max. 10 Hz
Current consumption
 Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
 From load voltage L1 max. 2 mA  For lamp load 1 Hz
(without load)
Short-circuit protection Fuse, 8 A/250 V; per
Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W of output group
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics  Min. current required for min. 40 A
Status display Green LED per channel fuse to blow

Interrupts None  Max. response time max. 300 ms

Diagnostic functions Yes

 Group error display Red LED (SF) 2)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-85
Digital Modules

1) The load current must not be half-wave

Replacement fuses 8 A fuse/quick-acting 2) Potential errors are:
 Wickmann 194-1800-0 - No load voltage
 Schurter SP001.1013 - Fuse defective
 Littelfuse 217.008

Fuse carrier
 Wickmann 653 07

3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 8
120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 × 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
 8 outputs, isolated in one group
 Group error display
 Channel-specific status LEDs
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable substitute value output
 2 A output current
 120/230 VAC rated load voltage
 Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-86 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 y 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Group error display – red

SF

1
1L

4
7 2L

10
11 3L
M
14
17 4L
Backplane bus 20
interface
21 L5

24
27 L6

30
31 7L
M 34
37 8L

40

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-87
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 y 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117 Status display Green LED per channel

(in millimeters)
Interrupts
Weight Approx. 275 g  Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Data for Specific Module
Diagnostic functions
Supports clocked No
operation  Group error display Red LED (SF)
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage
Length of cable
 Unshielded max. 600 m
 At signal ”1” min. L1 (-8.5 V)

 Shielded max. 1000 m Output current

Voltages, Currents, Potentials  At signal ”1”

Rated value 2A
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
Permitted range for 0 °C to 10 mA to 2 A
Total current of the outputs 40 °C
(module)
Permitted range for 10 mA to 1 A
 Horizontal configuration 40 °C to 60 °C
Up to 40 °C max. 8 A Permitted surge current max. 20 A
Up to 60 °C max. 4 A (per group) (with 2 half-waves)

 Vertical configuration max. 4 A  For ”0” signal max. 2 mA

(leakage current)
Up to 40 °C
Zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 V
Isolation
Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus Lamp load max. 50 W

 Between channels Yes Connecting two outputs in

parallel
In groups of 1
 For redundant triggering of Possible
Permitted potential difference a load
 Between Minternal and the 230 VAC  To increase performance Not possible
outputs
Triggering a digital input Possible
 Between outputs 500 VAC
Switch rate
Insulation tested with  For resistive load max. 10 Hz
 Between Minternal and the 1500 VAC  Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
outputs to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
 Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC  For lamp load max. 1 Hz
different groups
Short-circuit protection of output Yes,
Current consumption 3.15 A /
250 V fuse, fast-acting
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
 From load voltage L1 max. 2 mA
(without load)

Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-88 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Note
The outputs must be protected by a high-speed, fast-acting 3.15 A 250 VAC fuse.
When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code,
a tool must be used to remove the fuse and the area must be designated safe
before the fuse is removed/replaced.

Parameterization of the SM 322; DO x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

A description of the general procedure for parameterizing digital modules can be
found in section 3.3.
Detailed information on the digital output module parameters can be found in
Appendix A.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-22 shows the settable parameters with the default settings for the SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

settings type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupts Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Switch substitute value EWS Dynamic Channel
(EWS)
Hold last value (LWH)
Switch substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
”1”

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-89
Digital Modules

Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-23 gives an overview of the diagnostic messages of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.

Table 3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagnostics ParaAeters can be

assigned
Time-out SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No

Error causes and remedies

Table 3-24 shows the diagnostic messages and error causes as well as the
remedies of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.

Table 3-24 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL, Error
Causes and Remedies

Diagnostics Error Detection Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Time-out Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
Module defective Replace module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-90 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below are described in detail in the online Help for
STEP 7.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available – in other words, they are withheld without
appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling
interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged at the module.

Load restrictions with a horizontal configuration

With a horizontal configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that two
adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an
output.

Load restrictions with a vertical configuration

With a vertical configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that four
adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an
output.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-91
Digital Modules

3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC;

(6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
 Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage

Note
When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for
about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the
user program.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-92 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322;

DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC

M
Backplane bus
interface N
L+

24 V

M
N
M

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-93
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16
Rel. 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 250 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Supports clocked No
operation Continuous thermal current max. 2 A
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V / 10 mA
Number of outputs 16
Length of cable Short-circuit proof to 200 A, with B10/B16
IEC 947-5-1 circuit breaker
 Unshielded max. 600 m
 Shielded max. 1000 m
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Voltages, Currents, Potentials  For resistive load

Voltage Cur- No. of switch-
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
rent ing cyc. (typ.)
relay L +
Total current of the outputs max. 8 A
(per group) 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.1 million
1.0 A 0.2 million
Isolation 0.5 A 1.0 million
 Between channels and Yes 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million
backplane bus 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.6 million
24 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
 Between the channels Yes 48 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
In groups of 8 60 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
120 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 million
Permitted potential difference 1.0 A 1.5 million
 Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 0.5 A 2.0 million
supply voltage of the relays 230 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 million
1.0 A 1.5 million
 Between Minternal and 230 VAC 0.5 A 2.0 million
supply voltage of the relays
and the outputs  Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15

 Between the outputs of the 500 VAC Voltage Cur- No. of switch-
different groups rent ing cyc. (typ.)

Insulation tested with

24 VDC 2.0 A 0.05 million
 Between Minternal and 500 VDC 1.0 A 0.1 million
supply voltage of the relays 0.5 A 0.5 million
 Between Minternal and 1500 VAC 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.1 million
supply voltage of the relays 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.3 million
and the outputs 24 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
48 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
 Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC 60 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
different groups 120 VAC 2.0 A 0.7 million
1.0 A 1.0 million
Current consumption
0.5 A 1.5 million
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.7 million
 From supply voltage L+ max. 250 mA 1.0 A 1.0 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.5 W
An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
of the contacts.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-94 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA Triggering a digital input Possible
Switch rate
Lamp load 50 W / 230 VAC  Mechanical max. 10 Hz
5 W / 24 VDC
 For resistive load 1 Hz
Contact protection (internal) None
 Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
Parallel connection of to IEC 947-5-1,
2 outputs DC 13/AC 15
 For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs  For lamp load 1 Hz
a load of the same group)
 To increase performance Not possible

3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC;

(6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8
REL. 230 VAC features the following characteristics:
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 2
 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
 Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage

Note
Applicable only for the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC with product status 1 is:
When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about
200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user
program.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-95
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC

M
Backplane bus 24 V
interface

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
REL. 230 VAC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-96 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Diagnostic functions None

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Data for Selecting an Actuator
(in millimeters)
Continuous thermal current max. 3 A
Weight Approx. 190 g
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V /5 mA
Data for Specific Module
Short-circuit proof according to With circuit-breaker of
Supports clocked No IEC 947-5-1 2) characteristic B for:
operation cos 1.0: 600 A
Number of outputs 8 cos 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A
Length of cable With Diazed 8 A fuse:
1000 A
 Unshielded max. 600 m
 Shielded max. 1000 m Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Voltages, Currents, Potentials  For resistive load

Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC Voltage Current No. of

relay L + switching
cyc. (typ.)
Total current of the outputs max. 4 A
(per group) 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.7 million
1.0 A 1.6 million
Isolation 0.5 A 4 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million
 Between channels and Yes
120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million
backplane bus
48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million
 Between the channels Yes 60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million
120 VAC 2.0 A 0.5 million 2)
In groups of 2
1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
Permitted potential difference 0.5 A 1.5 million 2)
230 VAC 2.0 A 0.5 million 2)
 Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
supply voltage of the relays 0.5 A 1.5 million
 Between Minternal and 230 VAC  Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC
supply voltage of the relays
and the outputs Voltage Current No. of
switching
 Between the outputs of the 400 VAC cyc. (typ.)
different groups
24 VDC 2.0 A 0.3 million
Insulation tested with 1.0 A 0.5 million
 Between Minternal and 500 VDC 0.5 A 1.0 million
supply voltage of the relays 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million
120 VDC 0.2 A 0.3 million 2)
 Between Minternal and 1500 VAC 48 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
supply voltage of the relays 60 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
and the outputs 120 VAC 2.0 A 0.2 million
 Between the outputs of the 1500 VAC
1.0 A
0.7 A
0.7 million
1 million
different groups
0.5 A 2.0 million
Current consumption 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.3 million 2)
 From the backplane bus max. 40 mA 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
0.5 A 2 million 2)
 From supply voltage L+ max. 160 mA
Contact protection (internal) Varistor SIOV-CU4032
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.2 W K275 G
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
Status display Green LED per channel of the contacts.

Interrupts None

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-97
Digital Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued Connecting two outputs in parallel

Lamp load 1) max. 50 W  For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Power No. of
switching  To increase performance Not possible
cyc. (typ.)
Triggering a digital input Possible
Lamp load (230 VAC) 2) 1000 W 25000
1500 W 10000 Switch rate
 Mechanical max. 10 Hz
Energy-saving 10
58W 25000
lamps/fluorescent lamps with  For resistive load max. 2 Hz
electronic ballast2)
 Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
Fluorescent lamps, 1
58W 25000 to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
conventionally compensated 2) AC

Fluorescent lamps, 10
58W 25000  For lamp load max. 2 Hz

non-compensated 2)

1) Product status 1
2) Product status 2 or later

3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322;

DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0

Characteristics
Relay output module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
 Load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC
 Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.
 An RC quenching element can be connected via a jumper (SJ) to protect the
contacts.
 Group error display
 Channel-specific status LEDs
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable substitute value output

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-98 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Protection of contacts against overvoltages

You protect the contacts against overvoltages by inserting jumpers (SJ) on the
module between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 12 and 13 etc. (refer to Figure 3-30).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Fault indicator – red

SF 1 1L+ 2L+ 21
2 22
3 23
1L+ 1L+
4 24
SJ 5 25 SJ

6 26
7 1M 1M
27
1L+ 1L+
8 28
SJ 9 29 SJ

Backplane bus interface

10 30
1M 1M
24V 24V

11 31
1L+ 1L+
12 32
SJ SJ
13 33
14 34
1M 1M
15 35
1L+ 1L+
16 36
SJ 17 37 SJ

18 38
1M 1M
19 39

20 SF 40

1M 2M

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-99
Digital Modules

Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0 with safe and electrically
isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account:
If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the
horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more
than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages
and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC
requirements for safe electrical isolation.

If one of the two horizontally adjacent termi-

nals is operated with a safe electrical extra-
low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be
operated at not more than UC 120 V.

Figure 3-31 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight  Between channels and Yes

backplane bus
Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117
(in millimeters)  Between the channels and Yes
the relay supply voltage
Weight Approx. 320 g
 Between the channels Yes
Data for Specific Module
In groups of 1
Supports clocked No
operation Permitted potential difference

Number of outputs 8  Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC

supply voltage of the relays
Length of cable
 Between Minternal and 250 VAC
 Unshielded max. 600 m supply voltage of the relays
 Shielded max. 1000 m and the outputs
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
different groups
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
electronics L +
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Total current of the outputs
(per group)
 Horizontal configuration max. 5 A
Up to 60° C
 Vertical configuration max. 5 A
Up to 40 ° C
Isolation

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-100 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Insulation tested with  Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC

 Between Minternal and 500 VDC Voltage Current No. of
supply voltage of the relays switching
cyc. (typ.)
 Between Minternal and 1500 VAC
supply voltage of the relays 24 VDC 5.0 A 0.1 million
and the outputs 24 VDC 2.5 A 0.25 million
24 VDC 1.0 A 0.5 million
 Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC 230 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
different groups 230 VAC 2.5 A 0.25 million
Current consumption 230 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA With a connected RC quenching element (jumper ”SJ”
 From supply voltage L+ max. 160 mA inserted) or with an external protection circuit, you
lengthen the service life of the contacts.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W
Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Power No. of
Status display Green LED per channel switching
Interrupts cyc. (typ.)

 Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be Lamp load (230 VAC) 1000 W 25000
assigned 1500 W 10000

Diagnostic functions Parameters can be Energy-saving 10
58W 25000

assigned lamps/fluorescent lamps with
electronic ballast
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
Fluorescent lamps, 1
58W 25000
 Diagnostics information Possible conventionally compensated
read-out
Fluorescent lamps, 10
58W 25000
Data for Selecting an Actuator non-compensated
Continuous thermal current max. 5 A Contact protection RC quenching element
330 Ω, 0.1
F
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V /10 mA1)
Connecting two outputs in parallel
Leakage current 11.5 mA 2)
 For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Short-circuit proof according to With circuit-breaker of a load with identical load vol-
IEC 947-5-1 characteristic B for: tage)
cos 1.0: 600 A
 To increase performance Not possible
cos 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A
With Diazed 8 A fuse: Triggering a digital input Possible
1000 A Switch rate
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts  Mechanical max. 10 Hz
 For resistive load  For resistive load max. 2 Hz
Voltage Current No. of  Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
switching to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
cyc. (typ.) AC
24 VDC 5.0 A 0.2 million  For lamp load max. 2 Hz
24 VDC 2.5 A 0.4 million
24 VDC 1.0 A 0.9 million
1) Without inserted jumper (SJ).
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.2 million
230 VAC 2.5 A 0.4 million 2) For AC load voltage and inserted jumper (SJ). Without
230 VAC 1.0 A 0.9 million jumper (SJ) inserted there is a leakage current

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-101
Digital Modules

Note
Due to the leakage current of the RC quenching element, wrong signal states
might occur when an IEC Type 1 input is connected (remove SJ jumper)

3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization

Parameterization
You will find the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in
Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 322; DO 8
230 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.

Table 3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

settings type
Enable
 Diagnostic Interrupts Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Switch substitute value EWS Dynamic Channel
(EWS)
Hold last value (LWH)
Switch substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
”1”

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-102 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8
230 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the
SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A.

Table 3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagnostics Parameters can be

Assigned
Time-out SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-103
Digital Modules

Error causes and remedies

Table 3-27 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A, Error Causes and Remedies

Diagnostics Error Detection Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Time-out Always Temporary high Remove interference and
electromagnetic turn the CPU power supply
interference off and on
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Always Temporary high Remove interference and
electromagnetic turn the CPU power supply
interference off and on
Module defective Replace module
RAM error Always Temporary high Remove interference and
electromagnetic turn the CPU power supply
interference off and on
Module defective Replace module

Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Introduction
The SM 322; DO8
Rel. 230 VAC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling
interrupts.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-104 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Diagnostic Interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A;

(6ES7 322-1HFx0-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 322-1HF80-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A features the following characteristics:
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
 Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

Measures with switching currents > 3 A

Note
To keep the additional temperature rise of the module near the connectors as low
as possible, you must select a cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2 for connecting
cables with switching currents > 3 A.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-105
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

L+
L+

L+ L+

1)
M M
L+ L+

Backplane bus interface

M M
24 V
1)

L+ L+

1)
M M
L+ L+

M M
M
M

Channel
1) Connection possibility for contact supply
number
I aggregate current 8 A for Ta 30 C
Status display -green I aggregate current 5A for Ta 60 C

Figure 3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-106 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 322-1HF10 with safe and electrically isolated
extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account:
If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the
horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more
than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages
and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC
requirements for safe electrical isolation.

If one of the two horizontally adjacent termi-

nals is operated with a safe electrical extra-
low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be
operated at not more than UC 120 V.

Figure 3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-107
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8
Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight Permitted potential difference

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
120  Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
(in millimeters) supply voltage of the
relays
Weight Approx. 320 g
 Between Minternal and 250 VAC
Data for Specific Module supply voltage of the
Supports clocked No relays and the outputs
operation  Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
Number of outputs 8 different groups

Length of cable Insulation tested with

 Unshielded max. 600 m  Between Minternal and 500 VDC
 Shielded max. 1000 m supply voltage of the
relays
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 Between Minternal and 1500 VAC
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC supply voltage of the
relay L + relays and the outputs
Total current of the outputs  Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC
(per group) different groups
 Horizontal configuration Current consumption
Up to 30 C max. 8 A  From the backplane bus max. 40 mA
Up to 60 C max. 5 A  From supply voltage L+ max. 125 mA
 Vertical configuration max. 5 A
Power dissipation of the typ. 4.2 W
Up to 40 C module
Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
 Between the channels Yes
In groups of 1

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-108 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics 48 VAC 3.0 A 0.5 million

1.5 A 1 million
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupt None 60 VAC 3.0 A 0.3 million
Diagnostic functions None 1.5 A 1 million

Data for Selecting an Actuator 120 VAC 3.0 A 0.2 million

2.0 A 0.3 million
Continuous thermal current max. 8 A 1.0 A 0.7 million
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V / 5 mA 0.5 A 2.0 million

Short-circuit proof to With circuit-breaker of 230 VAC 3.0 A 0.1 million

IEC 947-5-1 characteristic B for: 2.0 A 0.3 million
1.0 A 0.7 million
cos 1.0: 600 A
0.5 A 2.0 million
cos 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A
With Diazed 8 A fuse:
 Aux. contactors Size 0 30 mill.
(3TH28)
1000 A
An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
of the contacts.
 For resistive load
Power No. of
Voltage Current No. of switching
switching cyc. (typ.)
cyc. (typ.)
Lamp load (230 VAC) 1000W 25000
24 VDC 8.0 A 0.1 million 1500W 10000
4.0 A 0.3 million
Energy-saving 10
58W 25000
2.0 A 0.7
lamps/fluorescent lamps with
0.5 A 4.0 million
electronic ballast
60 VDC 0.5 A 4 million
Fluorescent lamps, 1
58W 25000
120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 mill. conventionally compensated

48 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million Fluorescent lamps, 10
58W 25000

2.0 A 1.6 million non-compensated

60 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million Contact protection (internal) None

2.0 A 1.2 million
Connecting two outputs in parallel
120 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.3 million
 For redundant actuation of Possible
a load
2.0 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 0.7 million  To increase performance Not possible
0.5 A 1.5 million
Triggering a digital input Possible
230 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.3 million Switch rate
2.0 A 0.5 million  Mechanical max. 10 Hz
1.0 A 0.7 million
0.5 A 1.5 million  For resistive load max. 2 Hz

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts  Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
 Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC AC
Voltage Current No. of  For lamp load max. 2 Hz
switching
cyc. (typ.)
24 VDC 2.0 A 0.3 million
1.0 A 0.5 million
0.5 A 1 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million
0.3 A 1 million

120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 mill.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-109
Digital Modules

3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;

DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity
switches)
 Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A carry a ”1” signal for approximately
50
s for reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-110 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323;

DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

2L+
24V

M
2M
Backplane bus
interface
3L+
24V

1M M 3M
24 V

Channel
number
Status display -green

Figure 3-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-111
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment
The figure below shows the assignment of the channels to the input and output
addresses.

Inputs Outputs
Input byte x Output byte x

Input byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 1)

Figure 3-35 Terminal Assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight  Horizontal configuration

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Up to 40 C max. 4 A
(in millimeters) Up to 60 C max. 3 A
Weight Approx. 260 g  Vertical configuration
Data for Specific Module Up to 40 C max. 2 A

Clocked No Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
Number of inputs 16 backplane bus
Number of outputs 16  Between the channels Yes
Length of cable Inputs in groups of 16
 Unshielded max. 600 m Outputs in groups of 8
 Shielded max. 1000 m Permitted potential difference
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously Current consumption

 Horizontal configuration
 From the backplane bus max. 80 mA

Up to 40 C 16
 From load voltage L+ max. 80 mA
(without load)
Up to 60 C 8
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16
Total current of the outputs
(per group)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-112 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Switch rate

Status display Green LED per channel  For resistive load max. 100 Hz
 Inductive load according to max.0.5 Hz
Interrupts None
IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC max. 10 Hz
Diagnostic functions None  For lamp load
Data for Selecting a Sensor Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuit interruption voltage up
Input voltage
 Rated value 24 VDC Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
output
 For signal ”1” 13 to 30 V
 For signal ”0” –30 to + 5 V  Threshold on 1 A, typ.

Input current
 At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
Input delay
 At ”0” to ”1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
 At ”1” to ”0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic curve According to IEC
61131, type 1
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
BEROs max. 1.5 mA
 Permitted bias current
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Output voltage
 At signal ”1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Output current
 At signal ”1”
Rated value 0.5 A
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
 At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA
(leakage current)
Output delay
(for resistive load)
 At ”0” to ”1” max. 100
s
 At ”1” to ”0” max. 500
s
Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Lamp load max. 5 W
Parallel connection of
2 outputs
 For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
 To increase performance Not possible
Triggering a digital input Possible

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-113
Digital Modules

3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;

DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BHx1-0AA0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 323-1BH81-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8
 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 24 VDC rated load voltage
 Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity
switches)
 Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A carry a ”1” signal for approximately 50
s
for reasons associated with the circuitry.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-114 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323;

DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

1M
24V

2L+

M
24V

Backplane bus
interface

2M

Channel number
Status display – green

Figure 3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-115
Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 200 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No
operation Input voltage
 Rated value 24 VDC
Number of inputs 8
 For signal ”1” 13 to 30 V
Number of outputs 8  For signal ”0” –30 to 5 V
Length of cable
Input current
 Unshielded max. 600 m
 At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA
 Shielded max. 1000 m
Input delay
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 At ”0” to ”1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC  At ”1” to ”0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Number of inputs that can be Input characteristic curve According to IEC
triggered simultaneously 61131, type 1
 Horizontal configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 60 C 8 BEROs
 Vertical configuration  Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA
Up to 40 C 8

Total current of the outputs

(per group)
 Horizontal configuration
Up to 60 C max. 4 A
 Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C max. 4 A

Isolation
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
 Between the channels Yes
Inputs in groups of 8
Outputs in groups of 8
Permitted potential difference
 Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 40 mA
 From load voltage L+ max. 40 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-116 A5E00105505-02
 Digital Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Parallel connection of

2 outputs
Output voltage
 At signal ”1” min. L + (–0.8 V)  For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Output current
 To increase performance Not possible
 At signal ”1”
Triggering a digital input Possible
Rated value 0.5 A
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A Switch rate

 At signal ”0” max. 0.5 mA

 For resistive load max. 100 Hz
(leakage current)  Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
Output delay (for resistive load)
 For lamp load max. 10 Hz
 At ”0” to ”1” max. 100
s
Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
 At ”1” to ”0” max. 500
s circuit interruption voltage up
Load resistor range 48  to 4 k Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
output
Lamp load max. 5 W
 Threshold on 1 A, typ.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 3-117
Digital Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

3-118 A5E00105505-02
Analog Modules 4
Changes and improvements compared to the previous edition of the Reference
Manual
This chapter describes all new analog modules. Furthermore, two new overview
sections will make it easier for you to access the information:
 The ”Module Overview” section shows you the modules that are available,
together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find
the module suitable for your task.
 The section entitled ”Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the
Module” provides the answer to the question ”What must I do in succession to
commission the module quickly and successfully?

Structure of the chapter

The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description
2. Information that is generally available – in other words, affects all analog
modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics)
3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules
c) for analog input/output modules

STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use the blocks FC 105 ”SCALE” (Scale Values) and FC 106 ”UNSCALE”
(Unscale Values) for reading and outputting analog values in STEP 7. You will find
the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called
”TI-S7-Converting Blocks” (for a description refer to the STEP 7 online Help for the
FCs).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-1
Analog Modules

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

4.1 Module Overview 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog 4-8
Module
4.3 Analog Value Representation 4-10
4.4 Setting the Type of Measurement and Measuring Ranges of 4-31
Analog Input Channels
4.5 Behavior of Analog Modules 4-34
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of 4-39
Analog Modules
4.7 Assigning Parameters to Analog Modules 4-43
4.8 Connecting Sensors/Transmitters to Analog Inputs 4-49
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors 4-54
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors 4-55
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 4-57
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples 4-63
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 4-72
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs 4-73
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs 4-76
4.16 Diagnostics of Analog Modules 4-77
4.17 Analog Module Interrupts 4-81
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits; 4-83
(6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0)
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits 4-92
(6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0)
4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
13 bits; 4-105
(6ES7 331-1KF00-0AB0)
4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits; 4-111
(6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0)
4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
RTD 4-122
(6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-2 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Section Contents Page

4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
TC 4-135
(6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0)
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2
12 bits; 4-150
(6ES7 331-7KBx2-0AB0)
4.25 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8
12 bits 4-160
(6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0)
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits; 4-166
(6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0)
4.27 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits; 4-171
(6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0)
4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits; 4-177
(6ES7 332-5HBx1-0AB0)
4.29 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; 4-183
AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits; (6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0)
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; 4-189
AI 4/AO 2
12 bits; (6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0)

4.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-3
Analog Modules

Table 4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;

AI 816 bits AI 816 bits AI 8
13 bits AI 8
12 bits
Character-
istics (-7NF00-) (-7NF10-) (-1KF00-) (-7KF02-)
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 8 8 inputs in 4
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel groups
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
 15 bits + sign  15 bits + sign  12 bits+sign  9 bits+sign
 12 bits+sign
 14 bits+sign
Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
method channel group: channel group: channel: channel group:
 Voltage  Voltage  Voltage  Voltage
 Current  Current  Current  Current
 Resistors  Resistors
 Temperature  Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, Arbitrary, per
measuring range channel group channel group per channel channel group
Supports No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable Yes Yes No Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable No Adjustable
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for No Adjustable for
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 2 channels
Hardware Adjustable Adjustable No Adjustable
interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Yes No No
interrupt at end of
cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships to: to: to: to:
 CPU  CPU  CPU  CPU
 Load voltage
(not for 2-DMU)
Permitted 50 VDC 60 VDC 2.0 VDC 2.5 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special features – - – –
Sign Sign
2-DMU Two-wire transmitter

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-4 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-2 Analog input modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

Module SM 331; AI 8
RTD SM 331; AI 8
TC SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

Characteristics (-7PF00-) (-7PF10-) (-7KBx2-)

Number of 8 inputs in 4 channel 8 inputs in 4 channel 2 inputs in 1 channel

inputs groups groups group
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group:
 15 bits + sign  15 bits + sign  9 bits+sign
 12 bits+sign
 14 bits+sign
Measuring method Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group:
 Resistors  Temperature  Voltage
 Temperature  Current
 Resistors
 Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per channel Arbitrary, per channel Arbitrary, per channel
measuring range group group group
Programmable Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Supports clocked No No No
operation
Diagnostic Interrupt Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
Limit value Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable for 1 channel
monitoring

Hardware interrupt Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable

upon limit violation
Hardware interrupt Adjustable Adjustable No
at end of cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation to: Galvanic isolation to: Galvanic isolation to:
relationships  CPU  CPU  CPU
 Load voltage (not for
2-DMU)
Permitted potential 75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 2.5 VDC
difference between
the inputs (ECM)
Special features – –
Sign Sign
2-DMU Two-wire transmitter

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-5
Analog Modules

Table 4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 332; SM 332; SM 332; SM 332;

AO 8
12 bits AO 4
16 bits AO 4
12 bits AO 2  12 bits
Charac-
teristics (-5HF00-) (-7ND01-) (-5HD01-) (-5HBx1-)
Number of 8 outputs in 8 4 outputs in 4 4 outputs in 4 2 output in 2
outputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channels groups
Resolution 12 bits 16 bits 12 bits 12 bits
Output type Channel by Channel by Channel by Channel by
channel: channel: channel: channel:
 Voltage  Voltage  Voltage  Voltage
 Current  Current  Current  Current
Supports No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Substitute value No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
output
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships between: between: to: to:
 CPU  CPU and  CPU  CPU
 Of the load channel  Of the load  Of the load
voltage  The channels voltage voltage
 Output and L+,
M
 CPU and L+, M
Special features – – – –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-6 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 334; SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits AI 4/AO 2  12 bits
Characteristics (-0CE01-) (-0KE00-)
Number of inputs 4 inputs in 1 channel group 4 inputs in 2 channel groups
Number of outputs 2 outputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group
Resolution 8 bits 12 bits + sign
Measuring Method Adjustable for each channel Adjustable for each channel
group: group:
 Voltage  Voltage
 Current  Resistors
 Temperature
Output type Channel by channel: Channel by channel:
 Voltage  Voltage
 Current
Supports clocked No No
operation
Programmable diagnostics No No
Diagnostic Interrupt No No
Limit value monitoring No No
Hardware interrupt upon limit No No
violation
Hardware interrupt at end of No No
cycle
Substitute value output No No
Potential relationships  Non-isolated to CPU Galvanic isolation to:
 Galvanic isolation to load  CPU
voltage  Of the load voltage
Special features Not parameterizable, setting of –
measurement and output type by
means of wiring

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-7
Analog Modules

4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps

Table 4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module

Step Procedure Refer to...

1. Select the module Section 4.1 and specific module section from
Section 4.21
2. With some analog input Section 4.4
modules: set the measuring
method and measuring range by
means of the measuring range
module
3. Install the module in the ”Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
 S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
4. Assign parameters to module Section 4.7
5. Connect measuring sensor or Sections 4.8 to 4.15
loads to module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-8 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module, continued

Step Procedure Refer to...

6. Commission configuration ”Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
 S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
 ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
7. If commissioning was not Section 4.16
successful, diagnose
configuration

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-9
Analog Modules

4.3 Analog Value Representation

Introduction
This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output
ranges which you can use with the analog modules.

Converting analog values

The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only.
Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.

Analog value representation with 16-bit resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the
same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number
in two’s complement. The resulting assignment is as follows:

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value of bits 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Sign
The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15:
 ”0” 
 ”1”  

Resolution less than 16 bits

If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is
stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are
padded with zeros (”0”).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-10 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Example
In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with ”0” are
written for low resolution.

Table 4-6 Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value

Resolution Analog value

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the
various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables
apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-8 to 4-9 contain the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same,
starting at 4-10 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-11
Analog Modules

Measured-value resolution
The resolution of the analog values may differ, depending on the analog module
and its parameterization. With resolutions < 15 bits, the bits indicated by ”x” are set
to ”0”.
Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted
temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module (see Tables
4-16 to 4-31).

Table 4-7 Possible Analog Value Resolutions

Resolution Units Analog value

in bits (+ sign)
decimal hexadecimal High-order byte Low-order byte
8 128 80H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1xxxxxxx
9 64 40H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01xxxxxx
10 32 20H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 001xxxxx
11 16 10H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0001xxxx
12 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
13 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
14 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
15 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-12 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Binary representation of the input ranges

The input ranges shown in Tables 4-8 to 4-9 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

Table 4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32767
118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649
100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 –100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under-
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–32768 –117.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32767 118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range

27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under-
–4864 –17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range

–32768 –17.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-13
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges

Table 4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 10 V to ± 1 V

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V ±2.5 V ±1 V
118.515 % 32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
117.593% 32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100.000% 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
75.000 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7
V 180.8
V 90.4
V 36.17
V
0% 0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Rated range
–1 FFFF
–75.00 % –20736 AF00 –7.5 V –3.75 V –1.875 V –0.75 V
–100.000% –27648 9400 –10 V –5 V –2.5 V –1 V
–27649 93FF
Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –11.759 V –5.879 V –2.940 V –1.176 V
–117.596 % –32513 80FF Underflow
–118.519% –32768 8000 –11.851 V –5.926 V –2.963 V –1.185 V

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-14 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-11 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 500 mV to ± 80 mV

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±500 mV ±250 mV ±80 mV
118.515 % 32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV Overflow
117.593% 32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV Overrange
27649 6C01
100.000% 27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV
75.00 % 20736 5100 375 mV 187.5 mV 60 mV
0.003617% 1 1 18.08
V 9.04
V 2.89
V
0% 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV Rated range
–1 FFFF
–75.00 % –20736 AF00 –375 mV –187.5 mV –60 mV
–100.000% –27648 9400 –500 mV –250 mV –80 mV
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –587.9 mV –294.0 mV –94.1 mV
–117.596 % –32513 80FF Underflow
–118.519% –32768 8000 –592.6 mV –296.3 mV –94.8 mV

Table 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10V

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
118.515 % 32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V
Overflow
117.593% 32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
100.000% 27648 6C00 5V 10 V
75% 20736 5100 3.75 V 7.5 V
Rated range
0.003617% 1 1 1 V + 144.7
V 0 V + 361.7
V
0% 0 0 1V 0V
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–17.593% –4864 ED00 0.296 V
Negative values
–4865 ECFF not possible
Underflow
–17.596 % –32768 8000

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-15
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges

Table 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges ± 20 mA to ± 3.2 mA

System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA ±10 mA ±3.2 mA
118.515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
117.593% 32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100.000% 27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 3.2 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 2.4 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 115.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF
–75%% –20736 AF00 –15 mA –7.5 mA –2.4 mA
–100.000% –27648 9400 –20 mA –10 mA –3.2 mA
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –23.52 mA –11.76 mA –3.76 mA
–117.596 % –32513 80FF Underflow
–118.519% –32768 8000 –23.70 mA –11.85 mA –3.79 mA

Table 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118.515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 22.96 mA
Overflow
117.593% 32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA
Overrange
27649 6C01
100.000% 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA
Rated range
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–17.593% –4864 ED00 –3.52 mA 1.185 mA
–4865 ECFF
Underflow
–17.596 % –32768 8000

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-16 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters

Table 4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 10 k and from 150  to
600 

System Resistance-Type Transmitter Range

Dec. Hex. 10 k 150  300  600 
118.515 % 32767 7FFF 11.852k 177.77 355.54  711.09  Overflow
117.593% 32512 7F00 150.01 300.01  600.02 
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.759 176.38 352.77  705.53  Overrange
k 
27649 6C01
100.000% 27648 6C00 10 k 150  300  600 
75% 20736 5100 7.5 k 112.5  225  450 
0.003617% 1 1 361.7m 5.43 m 10.85m 21.70m Rated range
0% 0 0 0 0 0 0

(neg. values physically Underrange

not possible)

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

standard

Table 4-16 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500,
1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa- Range
(1 digit mal decimal (1 digit mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal
=0.15C) =0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH > 1273.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H 1123.3 11233 2BE1H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH 30.2 302 12EH
< –243.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H < 30.2 32768 8000H Underflow

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-17
Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

climate

Table 4-17 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500,
1000

Pt x00 cli- Units Pt x00 cli- Units

mate mate
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- Range
(1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
>155.00 32767 7FFFH >311.00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
: : : : : : Overrange
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
: : : : : : Rated range
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< –145.00 –32768 8000H < –229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

standard

Table 4-18 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200,
500, 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa- Range
(1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal
0.15C) 0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
>295.0 32767 7FFFH >563.0 32767 7FFFH >568.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH 568.2 5682 1632H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H 523.3 5233 1471H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H 523.2 5232 1470H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H 213.2 2132 854H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H 213.1 2131 853H
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH 168.2 1682 692H
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H <168.2 32768 8000H Underflow

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-18 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

climate

Table 4-19 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200,
500, 1000

Ni x00 cli- Units Ni x00 cli- Units

mate mate
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- Range
(1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 295.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

standard

Table 4-20 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa- Range
(1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F) 0.01 K)
> 312.0 32767 7FFFH >593.6 32767 7FFFH >585.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
312.0 3120 C30H 593.6 5936 1730H 585.2 5852 16DCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
260.1 2601 A29H 500.1 5001 12D5H 533.3 5333 14D5H
260.0 2600 A28H 500.0 5000 1389H 533.2 5332 14D4H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –400.0 –4000 F060H 33.2 332 14CH
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –400.0 –32768 8000H <33.2 32768 8000H Underflow

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-19
Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

climate

Table 4-21 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 cli- Units Cu 10 cli- Units

mate mate
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- Range
(1 digit = mal decimal (1 digit = mal decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 180.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180.00 18000 4650H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
150.01 15001 3A99H 280.01 28001 6D61AH
150.00 15000 3A98H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–50.00 –5000 EC78H –58.00 –5800 E958H
–50.01 –5001 EC77H –58.01 –5801 E957H
: : : : : : Underrange
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
< –60.00 –32768 8000H < –76.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Table 4-22 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type B

Units Units Units

Type B Type B Type B Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
>2070.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH >2343.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2343.2 23432 5B88H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1821.0 18210 4722H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 2094.2 20942 51CEH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H 2093.2 20932 51C4H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H 273.2 2732 0AACH

: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H 153.2 1532 05FCH
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H <153.2 32768 8000H Underflow

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-20 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C

Table 4-23 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type C

Units Units
Type C Type C Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal
>2500.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2500.0 25000 61A8H 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
2315.1 23151 5A6FH 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
2315.0 23150 5A6EH 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
: : : : : : Rated range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
0.1 –1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E

Table 4-24 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type E

Units Units Units

Type E Type E Type E Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
> 1200.0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH > 1473.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1000.1 10001 2711H 1833.8 18338 47A2H 1274.2 12742 31C6H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-21
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J

Table 4-25 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type J

Units Units Units

Type J Type J Type J Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
> 1450.0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH > 1723.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H 1723.2 17232 4350H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1201.0 12010 2EEAH 2193.8 21938 55B2H 1474.2 14742 3996H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–210.0 –2100 F7CCH –346.0 –3460 F27CH 63.2 632 0278H
< –210.0 < –2100 <F7CCH < –346.0 < –3460 <F27CH <63.2 < 632 < 0278H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H. ... of FDC8H and outputs 8000H.

Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Table 4-26 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type K

Units Units Units

Type K Type K Type K Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
> 1622.0 32767 7FFFH >2951.6 32767 7FFFH > 1895.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH 1895.2 18952 4A08H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1373.0 13730 35A2H 2503.4 25034 61CAH 1646.2 16462 404EH
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H 1645.2 16452 4044H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-22 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Table 4-27 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type L

Units Units Units

Type L Type L Type L Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
>1150.0 32767 7FFFH >2102.0 32767 7FFFH >1423.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH 1423.2 14232 3798H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
901.0 9010 2332H 1653.8 16538 409AH 1174.2 11742 2DDEH
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H 1173.2 11732 2DD4H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 < F830H < –328.0 < –3280 <F330H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N

Table 4-28 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type N

Units Units Units

Type N Type N Type N Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
> 1550.0 32767 7FFFH >2822.0 32767 7FFFH > 1823.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH 1823.2 18232 4738H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2373.8 23738 5CBAH 1574.2 15742 3D7EH
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H 1573.2 15732 3D74H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% <0 < 0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-23
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S

Table 4-29 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type R, S

Units Units Units

Types R, S Types R, Types R,
deci- hexa- S deci- hexa- S deci- hexa- Range
in 5C mal decimal in 5F mal decimal in K mal decimal

>2019.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH >2292.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2292.2 22922 598AH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1770.0 17770 4524H 3218.0 32180 7DB4H 2043.2 20432 4FD0H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H 2042.2 20422 4FC6H
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH 223.2 2232 08B8H
–51.0 –510 FE02H –59.8 –598 FDAAH 222.2 2222 08AEH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–170.0 –1700 F95CH –274.0 –2740 F54CH 103.2 1032 0408H
< –170.0 –32768 8000H < –274.0 –32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T

Table 4-30 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type T

Units Units Units

Type T Type T Type T Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
>540.0 32767 7FFFH >1004.0 32767 7FFFH >813.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H 813.2 8132 1FC4H
: : : Overrange
401.0 4010 0FAAH
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H 673.2 6732 1AACH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 3.2 32 0020H
< –270.0 < –2700 <F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <3.2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-24 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U

Table 4-31 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples Type U

Units Units Units

Type U Type U Type U Range
in 5C deci- hexa- in 5F deci- hexa- in K deci- hexa-
mal decimal mal decimal mal decimal
>850.0 32767 7FFFH >1562.0 32767 7FFFH >1123.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 2738.0H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
601.0 6010 177AH 1113.8 11138 2B82H 874.2 8742 2226H
600.0 6000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H 873.2 8732 221CH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 <F830H < –328.0 < –3280 <F330H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-25
Analog Modules

4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output
channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all
modules with the corresponding output ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-32 to 4-33 contain the binary representation of the output values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at
4-34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units.

Output ranges for the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits

The analog input/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits has output ranges
from 0 to 10 V and from 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334
has a lower resolution, however. Please not that the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits
with product status 1 does not have overranges.

Binary representation of the output ranges

The output ranges shown in Tables 4-32 to 4-33 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-26 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges

Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under-
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Under-
flow

Table 4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges

Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
0.000 rated
range
lower limit
–32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V and
0 mA
32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-27
Analog Modules

Analog value representation in voltage output ranges

Table 4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±10 V

System Voltage Output Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7 µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V
–1 FFFF –361.7 µV
–75 % –20736 AF00 –7.5 V
–100 % –27648 9400 –10 V
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –11.76 V
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-28 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V

System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-
energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7µV 1V+144.7µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V 1V
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0V
–6913 E4FF Not possible.
The output value is limited
–117.593% –32512 8100 to 0 V.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and
de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-29
Analog Modules

Analog value representation in current output ranges

Table 4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±20 mA

System Current Output Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF –723.4 nA
–75 % –20736 AF00 –15 mA
–100 % –27648 9400 –20 mA
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –23.52 mA
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA

Table 4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

System Current Output Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit
and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA Rated range
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0 mA
–6913 E4FF Not possible. The
output value is limi-
–117.593% –32512 8100 ted to 0 mA.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit
and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-30 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of

Analog Input Channels

Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring
ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules:
 With measuring range module and STEP 7
 By means of wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7
Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on
the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the
module in STEP 7 is described in Section 4.7.
The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the
measuring range by means of measuring range modules.

Setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges with measuring range
modules
If the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the
measuring range modules plugged in.
If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range.

Note
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input
module.
Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring
range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another
measuring range.

Possible settings for the measuring range modules

The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: ”A”, ”B”, ”C” and
”D”.
Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual
measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific
module section.
The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also
printed on the analog module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-31
Analog Modules

Replugging measuring range modules

If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps:
1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input
module.

Figure 4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-32 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on
module (2).

Figure 4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module

Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules.
The next step is to install the module.

Caution
! If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be
destroyed.
Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before
connecting a sensor to the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-33
Analog Modules

4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this section, you will find information on:
 How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the
CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module
 The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie
within the value range
 The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and
output value, as illustrated by an example

4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode

Effect of supply voltage and operating mode on the modules

The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating state
of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-34 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the
Supply Voltage L+

CPU Operating Supply Vol- Input Value of the Output Value of the
State tage L+ at Analog Input Module Analog Output Module
Analog Mo-
dule
POWER RUN L+ present Measured value CPU values
ON
7FFFH until first conversion Until the first conversion...
following power-up or after  after power-up has been
parameter assignment of the completed, a signal of 0 mA
module has been completed or 0 V is output.
 after parameter
assignment has been
completed, the previous
value is output.
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Measured value Substitute value/last value
ON (default values: 0 mA/0 V)
7FFFH until first conversion
following power-up or after
parameter assignment of the
module has been completed
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER – L+ present – 0 mA/0 V
OFF
L+ missing – 0 mA/0 V

Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF
LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module
(entry in diagnostic buffer).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 4.7).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-35
Analog Modules

4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values

Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with
analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter
assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 4.16.

Effect of range of values on the analog input module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within
the range of values.

Table 4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values

Measured Va- Input Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

lue In
Rated range Measured – – –
value
Overrange/und Measured – – –
errange value
Overflow 7FFFH Flashes1 Entered1 Diagnostic
interrupt1
Underflow 8000H Flashes1 Entered1 Diagnostic
interrupt1
Beyond the Measured – – Hardware interrupt1
programmed value
limit
1) Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-36 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Effect of range of values on the analog output module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within
the value range.

Table 4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values

Process Value Output Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Lies Within
Rated range CPU value – – –
Overrange/und CPU value – – –
errange
Overflow 0 signal – – –
Underflow 0 signal – – –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-37
Analog Modules

4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module
over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated
range of the module.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C, referred to the rated range of
the module.

Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical
specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output
value in the rated range of the module.

Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits is being used for voltage output.
The output range from ”0 to 10 V” is being used. The module is operating at an
ambient temperature of 30 °C. Thus the operational limit applies. The technical
specifications of the module state:
 Operational limit for voltage output:
0.5 %
An output error, therefore, of 0.05 V (0.5% of 10 V) over the whole rated range
of the module must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95
V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is 5 % in this case.
The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes
increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated
range of 10 V.

0.05 V 0.05 V 0.05 V

( 5 %) ( 0.625 %) ( 0.5 %*)

Output value
–1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V
* Operational limit
Figure 4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-38 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog

Modules

Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing
times of the module for:
 Resistance test
 Wire-break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the
analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion).
In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct
influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference
frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7.1).
For the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different
analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned,
starting at Section 4.21.

Scan time of analog input channels

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to
the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially – in other
words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time
– in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is
the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the
analog input module.
The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel
analog module.

Conversion time, channel 1

Conversion time, channel 2

Scan time

Conversion time, channel n

Figure 4-4 Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-39
Analog Modules

Conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups
When the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into
account the conversion time channel group by channel group.

Example
Two analog input channels channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2
12
bits are combined to form a channel group. You must therefore grade the scan
time in steps of 2.

Setting smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input
modules.

Using smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured
values – for example, with temperature measurements.

Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished
by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted
(digitized) analog values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low,
average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for
averaging.
The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog
value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a
step response (refer to the following example).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-40 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Example
The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after
which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100% applied, as a function of
the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at
the analog input.

Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100

63

50

0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing: low:
Module cycles
average:
high:
Figure 4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response

Additional information on smoothing

Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 4.21) to
determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any
special features that have to be taken into account.

Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the
digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog
conversion.

Scan time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially – in other words, the
analog output channels are converted one after the other.
The scan time – in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is
again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output
channels (refer to 4-4).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-41
Analog Modules

Tip
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan
time in STEP 7.

Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules

tA

tE
tZ

t1 t2 t3

tA = Response time
tZ = Scan time corresponds to n
conversion time (n = activated channels)
tE = Settling time
t1 = New digitized output value is present
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
t3 = Specified output value reached

Figure 4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels

Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application the
converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output – is
load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive
loads.
For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load
refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at
Section 4.27.

Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application of
the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached
at the analog output – in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the
settling time.
You have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output
value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all
other channels are converted (scan time).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-42 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment

Introduction
Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of the modules by means of parameter assignment.

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to  RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules.
In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the
module in the necessary position (refer to Section 4.4).

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by
means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN  STOP, STOP 
RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a
description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating

State
Static PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-43
Analog Modules

4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.21, for the subset ”mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
 Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
 Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring
interrupt range Channel or
 Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
 Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 group

Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No Channel or
Static Channel
 With wire-break Yes/no No group
check

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-44 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
 Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance (four-conductor
connection)
R-3L Resistance (three-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
RTD-3L Bulb resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection)
TC-I1) Thermocouple
(internal comparison)
TC-E1) Thermocouple Channel or
Dynamic Channel
(external comparison)
TC-IL2) Thermocouple group
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL2) Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C2) Thermocouple
(linear, reference
temp. 0 °C)
TC-L50C2) Thermocouple
(linear, reference
temp. 50°C)
 Measuring range For the settable measuring ranges of 10 V
the input channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
 Reaction with open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
 Temperature unit3 Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Degrees
Dynamic Module
degrees Kelvin Celsius
 Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
8 channels software filter channels
4 channels hardware filter , Dynamic Module
hardware
filter

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-45
Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
 Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 Dynamic Channel or
coefficient for 0.00385 / °C channel
temperature 0.003916 / °C group
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0.003851 / °C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 / °C
0.00672 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
 Interference 400/60/50 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50 Hz Dynamic Channel or
frequency 10 Hz channel
suppression group
 Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel or
Low Channel
Average group
High

1) The module supplies a decimal value of the measured thermal voltage to the CPU –
for example, 27648 at 80 mV (refer to Table 4-11)
2) The module supplies a temperature value to the CPU – for example, 120°C (refer to Table 4-17)
3) 1 digit =0.1 °C; 1 digit =0.1 °F

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-46 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.27, for the subset ”mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
 Diagnostic Yes/no No Dynamic Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
Output
 Output type Deactivated U
Voltage
Current Dynamic Channel
 Output range For the settable measuring ranges of the 10 V
output channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
Response with ASS Outputs de-energized ASS
CPU-STOP LWH Hold last value Dynamic Channel
EWS Apply substitute value

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-47
Analog Modules

4.7.3 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

The analog input/output modules make available the parameters in the following
table. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment
in STEP 7.

Table 4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Input
Measurement
 Measuring Deactivated RTD-4L
method U Voltage
R-4L Resistance (four-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor Dynamic Channel
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
 Measuring range 0 to 10 V Pt 100
10000  climate
Pt 100 climate
 Integration time 20 ms; 16.6 ms 20 ms
Output
 Output type Deactivated U
Voltage Dynamic Channel
 Output range 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-48 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs

Introduction
You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the
measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for
the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at
both cable ends.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated analog input modules

With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU.
You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between
the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that UISO does not
exceed the permitted value.

Non-isolated analog input modules

With the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU. Establish IM 153. For this purpose, connect the MANA terminal with the M
terminal of the CPU and IM 153. A potential difference between MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU and the IM 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal.

Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur
between the measuring lines M– of the input channels and the reference point of
the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being
exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the
potential connection of the sensors.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-49
Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
UCM: Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of
the MANA measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU

Connecting isolated measuring sensors

Isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground).
They can be operated free of potential.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different
sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the
local distribution of the sensors.
To prevent the permissible value for UCM being exceeded when they are used in
environments with a high level of EMC interference, we advise you to link M– with
MANA.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-50 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

You can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or
Ungrounded mode.

L+
M

M+
M–
Isolated

Logic
M+ ADC
sensors Backplane
M–
bus
Recommended
connection MANA

CPU

UISO
Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

L+
M

M+
Isolated M–
sensors ADC
M+ Logic
M– Backplane
bus
Recommended
connection MANA
CPU

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-51
Analog Modules

Note
Do not connect M– to MANA when connecting 2-wire transmitters for current
measurement and resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are
not used.

Non-isolated sensors
The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local
ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to the local
ground.

Connecting non-isolated sensors

Caused by local conditions or interferences potential differences UCM (static or
dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If
the potential difference UCM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide
equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
When connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can
operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded
mode.

L+
M

M+
Non-isolated M–
sensors
Logic

M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus

UCM
MANA

Equipotential CPU
bonding UISO
conductor
Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-52 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

When connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate

the CPU only in Grounded mode.

L+
M

M+
Non-isolated
M–
sensors

Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus

UCM MANA
CPU

Equipotential Minternal
bonding L+
M
conductor
Ground bus

Figure 4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI

Note
You must not use non-isolated two-wire transmitters and non-isolated
resistance-type sensors with a non-isolated AI!

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-53
Analog Modules

4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

Connection of voltage sensors

L+
M

+ M+
U M–
–
Logic

+ M+ ADC
U M– Backplane bus
–

MANA

Figure 4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-54 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.10 Connecting Current Sensors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

Supply voltage of the sensors

The 2-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the
terminals of the analog input module.
This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Two-wire
transmitters must be isolated sensors.
Four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-55
Analog Modules

Connecting 2-wire transmitters

L+
Sensor,
M
for example,
pressure gauge
Two-wire
P transmitter + M+
– M–

Logic
M+ ADC
Two-wire + Backplane
M–
P transmitter – bus

MANA

Figure 4-12 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI

When the supply voltage L+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters
to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in STEP 7.

Sensor,
for example, L+
pressure gauge M

Two-wire +
P transmitter M+
–
Logic
ADC
M– Backplane
bus

MANA

Figure 4-13 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters Supplied from L+ to an

Isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-56 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Connecting four-wire transmitters

L+
Sensor,
M
for example,
pressure gauge
M+
+
P M–

transmitter
–

Logic
Four-wire
M+ ADC
+
P M– Backplane
–
bus

MANA
L+ M

Figure 4-14 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI

4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
IC+: Constant-current lead (positive)
IC–: Constant-current lead (negative)
M+: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L+: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
S–: Detector lead (negative)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-57
Analog Modules

Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-conductor,
three-conductor or two-conductor connection.
With four-conductor and three-conductor connections, the module supplies a
constant current via terminals IC+ and IC– so that the potential drop occurring on
the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant
current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Measurements with four-conductor or three-conductor connections supply a more
precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a
two-conductor connection.

Four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and
M– terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable
(connect IC+ and M+ as well as IC– and M– to the resistance thermometer).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ and the
cables IC– and M– are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–
Logic

ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-58 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a three-conductor connection on modules with four terminals, you must
normally insert a jumper between M– and IC– (refer to Figure 4-16). Take note of
the exception for the SM 331; AI 8
RTD (refer to Figure 4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ are
connected directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–

Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

Two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M+ and IC+ and between M– and IC– .

L+
M

M+
M–
Logic

ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-59
Analog Modules

Three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

With a three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8
RTD you must insert a
jumper between M+ and IC+ (refer to figure4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC– and M– are connected
directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–

Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8
RTD

Caution
! Due to incorrect wiring of the three-conductor connection, unforeseen operation of
the module and dangerous conditions can result in the system.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-60 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.11.1 Connecting Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8
13 bits

Two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M– and S–.

S–

Logic
M+ ADC
Backplane
M– bus

Figure 4-19 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8
13 bits

Three-conductor connection

S–
Logic

M+ ADC
Backplane
M–
bus

Figure 4-20 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8
13 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-61
Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection
With a four-conductor connection, you must not connect the fourth conductor (the
conductor is not used at all, see Figure 4-21).

Four-conductor S–

Logic
not connected M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus

Figure 4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8
13 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-62 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.12 Connecting Thermocouples

Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or
metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the
material used – for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.

Measuring junction
Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs

Connecting point
Compensating leads

Reference junction

Leads

Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured

°C

Figure 4-22 Design of Thermocouples

Principle of operation of thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free
ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs
at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the
difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature
at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends
must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine
the temperature of the measuring junction.
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference
junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of
the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire.
Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise
there will be considerable measuring errors.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-63
Analog Modules

Compensation of the reference junction temperature

You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference
junction by means of compensating leads.
There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference
junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the
difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the
reference junction to be.

Table 4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

Option Explanation
No compensation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature
between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal
(refer to Figure 4-23 for connection) temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the
module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with compensating You have already acquired and compensated the
box in the leads of an individual reference junction temperature (thermocouple external
thermocouple (refer to Figures 4-24 and comparison) using a compensating box, which you have
4-25 for its connection) looped into an individual thermocouple.
No further processing is necessary owing to the module.
Only for SM 331; AI 8
TC: You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a
External compensation with resistance resistance thermometer (platinum or nickel) and have it
thermometer for acquisition of the reference calculated by the module for any thermocouple.
junction temperature
(refer to Figure 4-26 and 4-27 for
connection)

Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the
terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the
compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor
acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage.
Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-64 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of
the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference
junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the
ends of the thermocouple’s compensating leads.
If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the
temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or
negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
IC+: Positive connection of constant current output
IC-: Negative connection of constant current output
COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP –: Compensating terminal (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
P5V: Module logic power supply

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-65
Analog Modules

Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation

Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means
of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type
supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.

L+
Thermocouple M

M+
K0 M–

Logic
. ADC
. Backplane
. bus
M+
K7 M–

Compensating leads
(same material as COMP+
thermocouple) COMP–/MANA

Figure 4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an

Isolated AI

Connecting the compensating box

Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module, locating the
compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. The
compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have
adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding.
The terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not
required and must therefore be shorted (refer to Figure 4-25 for an example).
The following constraints apply:
 The parameters of a channel group are general valid for all channels of that
group (for example, input voltage, integrating time etc.)
 External compensation with connection of the compensating box to the COMP
terminals of the module can be performed only for one thermocouple type. In
other words, all channels operating with external compensation must use the
same type.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-66 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with compensating box

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Copper L+
wire M

M+
M–

Logic
Thermocouples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Compensating L+ M
leads (same
material as Comp. COMP+
thermocouple) Box COMP–/MANA
Ref. junction

Figure 4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI

Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0C for
analog input modules.

Recommended compensating box

We recommend you to use a comparison point (with integrated power supply unit)
from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in
the table below.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-67
Analog Modules

Table 4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point

Recommended Compensating Box Order number

Reference junction with integrated power supply M72166-
unit, for rail mounting

Auxiliary power 220 VAC B

1
110 VAC
B
24 VAC
2
24 VDC
B
3
Connection to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Type L B 1
Fe/Cu Ni Type J 4 2
Ni Cr/Ni Type K 3
Pt 10% Rh/Pt Type S 4
Pt 13% Rh/Pt Type R 5
Cu/Cu Ni Type U 6
Cu/Cu Ni Type T 7

Reference temperature 0 C 0
0

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-68 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Connecting to the comparison point (Order No. M72166-xxx00)

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Compensating leads Copper L+

(same material as wire M
thermocouple)

M+
M–

Logic
Thermocouples ADC
M+
M– Back-
plane
Auxiliary power bus
+ –
3 1 COMP+
COMP–/MANA
The terminals for the SIEMENS
compensating wire must M72166-
be short-circuited!
12 11

9 8
+ –

Output (Cu wires)

Figure 4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an
Isolated AI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-69
Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the

SM 331; AI 8 × TC
All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are
connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 °C or 50 °C.

L+
Copper M
wire

M+
K0 M-
.
Reference junction .
controlled at ADUs Backplane bus
.
0C or 50C M+
K6 M-
M+
K7 M-

Figure 4-26 Connecting Thermocouples via a Reference Junction to the SM 331; AI 8 × TC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-70 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the

SM 331; AI 8 × TC
With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is
determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 °C to 85 °C.

Copper wire L+
M

M+
K0 M–
P5V
Thermocouples ADC

M+
M–

Logic
K7

Back-
M+ plane
Compensating M– bus
leads (same Pt 100
material as IC+ M internal
thermocouple) IC–

Ref. junction

Figure 4-27 Connecting Thermocouples with External Compensation via Resistance Thermometers to
the SM 331; AI 8 × TC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-71
Analog Modules

4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output

Introduction
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current
and voltage.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables
QV and S+ and M and S–, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the
interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated analog output modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between
the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that UISO does not
exceed the permitted value.

Non-isolated analog output modules

With the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU. Therefore, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU. A
potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU can lead to a
corruption of the analog signal.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-72 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.14 Connecting Loads and Actuators to Voltage Outputs

Connecting loads to a voltage output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-conductor and a
two-conductor connection. However, not all analog output modules allow both
types of connection.

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Detector lead (positive)
S–: Detector lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-73
Analog Modules

Connecting loads to a voltage output of an isolated module over a

four-conductor connection
A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-conductor
connection. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S– and S+) directly to
the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load.
Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the
sensor lead S– and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential
difference must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential
difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired.

L+
M

QV
Logic

DAC S+
Backplane
bus RL
S–

MANA

CPU
UISO

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-74 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module over a

two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, the S+ and S– terminals can be left open.
However, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-conductor connection.
Connect the load to terminals QV and the reference point of the measuring circuit,
MANA.

L+
M

QV

Logic
DAC
Backplane bus
RL

MANA

CPU

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Conductor

Connection

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-75
Analog Modules

4.15 Connecting Loads and Actuators to Current Outputs

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
QI: Analog output current
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Connecting loads to a current output

You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of
a current output.

L+
M

QI
Logic

DAC
Backplane bus
RL

MANA
CPU
UISO

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-76 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

L+
M

QI

Logic
DAC
Backplane bus
RL

CPU
MANA

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO

4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
”Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
 The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module and
forwarded to the CPU.
 The error LED on the analog module lights.
 If you have programmed ”Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” with STEP 7, a
diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.17).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-77
Analog Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix ”Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the
parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means
either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled.

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

Every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your SF LED (group
error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the
analog module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified.

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input
modules.

Table 4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules

Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Ef- Parameters can

fective for be Assigned
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Common-mode error SF Channel Yes
Wire-break SF Channel Yes
Underflow SF Channel Yes
Overflow SF Channel Yes

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-78 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Diagnostic messages of the analog output modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog
output modules.

Table 4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules

Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Parameters can

Effective for be Assigned
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Wire-break SF Channel Yes

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly
in STEP 7.

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial
Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module missing Feed supply L+
missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Check measuring range module
assignment error module
Reassign module parameter
Common-mode error Potential difference UCM between Connect M– with MANA
the inputs (M–) and reference
potential of measuring circuit (MANA)
too high
Wire-break Resistance too high in the sensor Use different type of sensor or
connection connection, e.g. use conductors with a
larger cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module and Close circuit
sensor
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel group (”measuring
procedure” parameter
Connect channel

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-79
Analog Modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial
Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Underflow Input value underflows underrange,
error may be caused:
Wrong measuring range selected
Configure other measuring range
With the measuring ranges 4 to Check terminals
20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by
polarity reversal of sensor
connection
Overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules

Table 4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module Feed supply L+
missing missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter
assignment error module

Short-circuit after M Overload of output Eliminate overload

Short-circuit of output QV after Eliminate short circuit
MANA
Wire-break Actuator resistance too high Use different type of actuator or connection,
e.g. use conductors with a larger
cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module Close circuit
and actuator
Channel not used (open) Disable channel group (”output type”
parameter)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-80 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The
following interrupts exist:
 Diagnostic interrupt
 Hardware interrupt
Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable
of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of
the modules, starting at Section 4.21, to determine which analog modules have
interrupt capability.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-81
Analog Modules

Hardware interrupt with trigger ”Upper or lower limit exceeded”

Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If
the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the
module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware
interrupt block (OB 40).
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller
is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.
When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Note
Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above
the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start
information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The following figure shows
the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8.

LB 8 LB 9 LB 11
.1 .0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 17 16 1 0 Bit no.
1 1 1 1 LD 8

Value falls below lower limit in channel 0

Value falls below lower limit in channel 1
Value exceeds upper limit in channel 0
Value exceeds upper limit in channel 1

Figure 4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit
Value

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-82 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Hardware interrupt upon trigger ”Reached end of scan cycle”

By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the
option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.
A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled
channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels one
after the other. After all the measured values have been converted, the module of
the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on
all channels.
You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values.

4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits;

(6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8  16 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 8 inputs in 4 channel groups
 Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
 Measurement mode selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
 Arbitrary measuring range and filter/update rate selection per channel group
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Two channels with limit monitoring
 Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface
 Permissible common mode voltage between channels of 50 VDC maximum

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-83
Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits

1 21

2 22

A 250 OHM + CHO

3 23 –
Fault indicator – red 24
4
250 OHM
V
+ CH1
5 25 –
SF
ADC
6 26

250 OHM
V
+ CH2
7 27 –

Isolation 28
8
250 OHM Back- V
+ CH3
9 29 –
plane
10
bus 30
interface
11 module 31

12 SF 32

250 OHM
V
+ CH4
13 33 –
34
14
250 OHM
V
+ CH5
15 35 –
ADC 36
16
250 OHM
V
+ CH6
17 37 –
38
18
250 OHM V + CH7
19 39 –
20 40

Figure 4-33 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8  16 bits

Please note that in Figure 4-33, channel 0 is configured for current measurement
and channel 7 for voltage measurement.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-84 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Wiring of the module for measuring current

Current measurements are made by paralleling a channel’s voltage input terminals
with its respective current sense resistor. This is accomplished by jumpering the
channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector.
Example: To configure channel 0 for current mode, you must jumper terminal 22 to
2 and terminal 23 to 3.
The channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the
sense resistor connected to the channel’s adjacent terminals in order to achieve
the specified accuracy.

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 272 g time/ resolution (per channel)

Data for Specific Module  Parameters can be Yes

assigned
Supports clocked operation No
 Integration time in 10 16.7 20 100
Number of inputs 8 milliseconds
Length of cable  Basic conversion time 35 55 65 305
 Shielded max. 200 m per channel group when
more than one channel
Voltages, Currents, Potentials group is active
Isolation  Channel conversion time 10 16.7 20 100
 Between channels and Yes per channel group if only
backplane bus channel group 0 or 1 is
enabled
Permitted potential difference
Channel integration time 10 16.7 20 100
 Between the inputs 50 VDC, 35 VAC (1/f1) in ms
(ECM)
 Resolution including sign 15 bits + sign
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal (UISO)  Suppression of 100 60 50 10
interference voltage for
Insulation tested with 500 VDC interference frequency f1
in Hertz
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 130 mA Basic execution time of the 140 220 260 1220
module, in ms (all channels
Power dissipation of the typically 0.6 W enabled)
module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-85
Analog Modules

Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Noise suppression for f = n
(f1 ± 1%), Interrupts

(f1 = interference frequency); n= 1, 2, ...  Hardware interrupt when Programmable
limit has been exceeded channels 0 and 2
 Common-mode noise > 100 dB
(Ucm < 50 V)  Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable
 Series-mode interference > 90 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable
(peak value of
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
interference < rated
value of input range)  Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Operational limit (over entire UCM = 0 / UCM = ±50 V
temperature range, referred Input range (rated values)/Input resistance
to input range)  Voltage ±5V / 2MΩ
 Voltage input ±0.1% / ± 0.7% 1 to 5 V / 2MΩ
± 10 V / 2MΩ
 Current input ±0.3% / ± 0.9%
 Current 0 to 20 mA; / 250 Ω
Basic error (operational limit at 25° C referred to input
range) ± 20 mA / 250 Ω
4 to 20 mA: / 250 Ω
 Voltage input ±0.05%
Maximum input voltage for max. 50 V continuous
 Current input ±0.05% voltage input (destruction
limit)
Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K
reference to the input range) Maximum input current for max. 32 mA
current input (destruction
Linearity error (with reference ±0.03%
limit)
to the input range)
Connection of the sensor
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.025%
steady state at 25°C, referred  For measuring voltage Possible
to the input range)
 For measuring current
As two-wire transmitter Possible

As four-wire transmitter Possible

 Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω

transmitter

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-86 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8  16 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation

Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring

interrupt range.
 Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic
Channel
 Lower limit value –<32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
 With wire-break Yes/no No
check
Measurement
 Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
Channel
 Measuring range Refer to Section 4.18.2 for the 10 V Dynamic
group
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
 Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
suppression

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-87
Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8  16 bits are arranged in four groups of two.
You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8  16 bits to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

High speed update mode

In the high speed update mode, updates for the two channels in the group occur
three times faster than with multiple channel groups enabled.
Example: If channels 0 and 1 are enabled with 2.5 ms filtering, data updates for
both channels will be available to the PLC every 10 msec. (For other filter settings,
the filter setting equals the update rate.)
The high speed update mode is only available when both channels are enabled on
channel group 0 or 1, in other words, the ”measuring method” parameter is set.
However, only channel group 0 or only channel 1 (in other words, not both
together) must be enabled.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note,
however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel
group in each case – in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-78.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-88 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8  16 bits

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 Voltage measurement
 Current measurement
You perform the setting with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
Set the ”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
 Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
 Current measurement 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with an
input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is
connected for each active and unused channel.
 Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the ”measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

U: Voltage ±5 V You will find the digitized analog values in
1 to 5 V Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring
±10 V range
4DMU: Current (4-wire from 0 to 20 mA You will find the digitized analog values in
transmitter) ±20 mA Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring
from 4 to 20 mA range

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-89
Analog Modules

Default settings
The default settings of the module are ”voltage” for the measuring method ”10 V”
for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and
measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits in STEP 7.

Measuring errors with common-mode voltages

The SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits can make measurements in the presence of AC or DC
common mode voltage.
For AC common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting, the
rejection is accomplished by the integration period of the A/D converter and by the
common mode rejection of the input amplifiers. For AC common mode voltages
< 35 VRMS, the rejection ratio of > 100 dB results in negligible measurement error.
For DC common mode voltages, only the rejection of the input amplifier stage is
available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage. Therefore, some
accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode voltage. The worst
case error occurs with 50 VDC between one channel and the other seven
channels. The calculated worst case error is0.7 % at 0 to 60 °C, and measured
error is typically ≤ 0.1% at 25 °C.

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits from the range of values contained in Table 4-50.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the table below.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-90 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Measuring Range Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
±10 V 11.368 V –11.369 V
31430 –31433
7AC6H 8537H
±5 V 5.684 V –5.684 V
31430 –31430
7AC6H 853AH
1 to 5 V 5.684 V 0.296 V
32376 –4864
7E78H ED00H
0 to 20 mA 22.737 mA –3.519 mA
31432 –4864
7AC8H ED00H
4 to 20 mA 22.737 mA 1.185 mA
32378 –4864
7E7AH ED00H
±20 mA 22.737 mA –22.737 mA
31432 –31432
7AC8H 8538H

Wire-break check
The wire-break check is available for the 1 to 5 V voltage range and the 4 to 20 mA
current range.
The following applies to both measuring ranges:
Enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters a wire-break in the
diagnosis if a current falls below 3.6 mA (0.9 V).
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module
triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-91
Analog Modules

4.19 Analog Input ModuleSM 331; AI 8 y 16 bits

(6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0

Characteristics
The isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits has the following
characteristic features:
 8 isolated inputs in 4 channel groups
 Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign
 Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
 Measuring method selectable per channel group
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 8 channels with limit monitoring
 Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
 Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
 Electrical isolation to the backplane bus interface

Special feature
When you use the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits in the distributed peripheral ET 200M,
you must have one of the following IM153-x:
 IM 153-1 6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
 IM 153-2 6ES7 153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
 IM 153-2 6ES7 153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-92 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Fault indicator – red

1 21 L+
2 L M 22
SF M0+
3 23
M4+
Chn. 0
Chn. 4
4 24
A V DC V A
5
250 
to 25
250 
6
DC 26
M0– M4–
M1+ 7 27 M5+
Chn. 1
Chn. 5
8 28
A V V A
9 29
250  250 
ADC ADC
10 30
M1– M5–
M2+ M6+
11 31
Chn. 2 ADC ADC Chn. 6
12 32
A V V A
13 33
250  250 
14 34
M2– Interface M6–
M3+ module M7+
15 logic 35
Chn. 3 and Chn. 7
16 back- 36
A V plane V A
17 bus 37
250  250 
18 38
M3– SF M7–

19 39

20 40 M

Figure 4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-93
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 y 16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 272 g time/ resolution (per channel)
Data for Specific Module  Parameters can be Yes
assigned
Supports clocked No
operation  Basic conversion time in 95/83/72/23
ms (8-channel mode)
Number of inputs 8
 Basic conversion time in 101)
Length of cable ms (4-channel mode)
 Shielded max. 200 m
 Resolution including sign 16 bits
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 Noise suppression for All2)/50/60/400
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC frequency f1
electronics L+ in Hz
 Reverse polarity protection Yes Smoothing of the measured None / low/
values average/ high
Isolation
Basic execution time of the 190/166/144//46
 Between channels and Yes
module, in ms
backplane bus
(8-channel-mode)
 Between channels and Yes
Basic execution time of the 101)
power supply of the
module, in ms
electronics
(4-channel-mode)
 Between the channels Yes Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error
In groups of 2
Interference suppression for
Permitted potential difference F = n × (f1 ± 1%)
(f1 = interference frequency, n = 1, 2, ...)
 Between the inputs (ECM) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
 Common-mode > 100 dB
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC interference
Minternal (UISO) (Ucm < AC 60 V)
Insulation tested with 500 VAC  Series-mode interference >90 dB 3)
Current consumption (peak value of interference
< rated value of input
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA range)

 From the power supply L+ max. 200 mA Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range)

 Input voltage 0.1%

 Input current 0.1%

Basic error (operational limit at 25 °C, referred to input

range)

 Voltage input 0.05%

 Current input 0.05%

Temperature error (with 0.005%/K

reference to the input range)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-94 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Linearity error (with reference to 0.01% Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

the input range)
Interrupts
Repeat accuracy (in the steady 0.01%
state at 25 °C, referred to the
 Hardware interrupt if the Programmable
limit value is exceeded channels 0 – 7
input range)
 Hardware interrupt at end Parameters can be
of cycle assigned

 Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be

assigned

Diagnostic functions Parameters can be

assigned

 Group error display Red LED (SF)

 Diagnostics information Possible

read-out
Data for Selecting a Sensor

Input range (rated values) /

input resistance

 Voltage 5 V / 2 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 2 MΩ
10 V / 2 MΩ

 Current 0 to 20 mA / 250 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 250 Ω
20 mA / 250 Ω

Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous;

voltage input 75 VDC for max. 1 s
(destruction limit) (duty factor 1:20)

Maximum input current for 40 mA

current input
(destruction limit)

Connection of the sensor

 For measuring voltage Possible

 For measuring current

As two-wire transmitter Possible with separate

supply for the
transmitter

As four-wire transmitter Possible

1) Interference frequency for 4-channel mode is ”All”

2) Interference frequencies 50/60/400 Hz are designated as
”All”
3) Series-mode rejection for 8-channel mode is reduced
as follows:
50 Hz > 70 db
60 Hz > 70 db
400 Hz > 80 dB
50/60/400 Hz > 90 dB

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-95
Analog Modules

4.19.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 y 16 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for parameterizing the SM 331;
AI 8 × 16 bits, in section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits in an
ET200M PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7
master, certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do
not support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these
functions are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt
enable, hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-96 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-54 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

settings Type
Enable
 Hardware interrupt if Yes/no No Dynamic
the limit value is
exceeded
Module
 Hardware interrupt at Yes/no No Dynamic
end of cycle Yes/no
 Diagnostic Interrupt No Dynamic
Hardware interrupt trigger
 Upper limit 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
 Lower limit –32512 to 32511 – Dynamic Channel
Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
 Wire-break check Yes/no No Channel
Measurement
 Module mode  8 channels Yes Dynamic Module
 4 channels No
 Interference 50 Hz Channel
suppression 60 Hz group
400 Hz
50/60/400 Hz 50/60/400 Hz
 Smoothing  None None Dynamic Channel
 Low group
 Average
 High
 Measuring method  Measuring Dynamic Channel
Range: group
Deactivated
Voltage  5V 10 V
 1 to 5 V
 10 V
Current (4-wire  0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
transmitter)  4 to 20 mA
 20 mA

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-97
Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 ×16 bits are arranged in groups of two inputs
each. You must assign the same parameters to both the inputs in a group. The
interrupt limits are the exception here.
Table 4-55 shows which channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 × 16 bits are configured as a channel group. To set the parameters by means
of SFC in the user program, you need the numbers of the channel groups. Detailed
information on this can be found in Appendix A.

Table 4-55 Assignment of the Channels of the Isolated Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8
16 bits to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one channel group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Operating states
The following modes are available for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI
8
16 bits:
 8 channels
 4 channels

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-98 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.19.2 8-Channel Mode

Description of the module cycle

In 8-channel mode, the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8
16 bits
switches between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four
analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for
channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted
all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7
(see Figure 4-35).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-35 8-Channel Mode Cycle

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-99
Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel mode of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits, the channel conversion time
is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set an interference
frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including communication time is
76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion
time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel
conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
50, 60 and 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is 88 ms. The module must then
be switched over to the other channel of the group by means of opto-MOS relays.
Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Table 4-56 shows the scan times
of the module at certain interference frequencies.

Table 4-56 Scan Times in 8-Channel Mode

Interference frequency Channel scan time Module scan time

(Hz) (ms) (All channels)
50 83 166
60 72 144
400 23 46
400/60/50 95 190

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-100 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.19.3 4 Channel-Mode

Description of the module cycle

In 4-channel mode, the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits does not switch over between the
channels of the individual groups. As the module contains four analog/digital
converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4
and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-36 4-Channel Mode Cycle

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel mode, the channel conversion time including communication time of
the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits is 10 ms. As the module does not switch over between
the channels in a group, the channel scan time and the module
scan time are the same: 10 ms.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-101
Analog Modules

4.19.4 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8 y 16 bits

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 Voltage measurement
 Current measurement (4-wire transmitter)
You perform the setting with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
Set the ”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
 Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
 Current measurement 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with an
input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is
connected for each active and unused channel.
 Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-102 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Wire-break check
The wire-break check is a module software function that is available for all the
voltage ranges and the current range of 4 to 20 mA.
 With the ± 5 V, 1 to 5 V or ± 10 V measuring ranges and an enabled wire-break
check, the isolated analog input module enters a wire-break in the diagnosis
when the process value achieves a positive full-scale deflection (32768). If you
enabled the diagnostic interrupt during configuration, the analog input module
also triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is
the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then assess the
diagnosis bytes in the user program.
 With a measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and an enabled wire-break check, the
isolated analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when the
process value falls below 3.6 mA. If you enabled the diagnostic interrupt during
configuration, the analog input module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is
the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then assess the
diagnosis bytes in the user program.
 If the wire-break check is not enabled, the isolated analog input module triggers
a diagnostic interrupt if the limit value for underflow is not reached.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the ”measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-57 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Method Selected Output Range Description

Voltage 5V You will find the digital
From 1 to 5 V analog values in
 10 V Section 4.3.1 in the voltage
and current output ranges
Current (4-wire transmitter) From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
 20 mA

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-103
Analog Modules

Short circuit to M or L
If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Overflow, underflow and hardware interrupt limits

The diagnosis operating limits for overflow and underflow for some of the
measuring ranges differ from those given in section 4.3.1 of the manual. In some
cases, numerical methods in the module software to assess the process variables
prevent values up to 32511 being signaled.
Hardware interrupt limits must not be set to values greater than the smallest
possible limit value of the overflow or underflow operating limits for the
end-of-scan-cycle interrupt in section 4.3.1.

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 4-58 Content of the 4 Bytes with Additional Information from OB40 during a Hardware
Interrupt or an End-of-Scan-Cycle Interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
Upper limit exceeded
mar- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
in channel
kers
Lower limit exceeded
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
in channel
End-of-scan-cycle 2
X
event
Unassigned bit 3

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-104 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
13 bits;

(6ES7 331-1KF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 331-1KF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8
13 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 8 inputs
 Measured-value resolution 12 bits + sign
 Measuring method selectable
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Bulb resistor
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-105
Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

The following diagram uses channels 4 to 7 to show some connection examples
for the various measuring methods. These connection examples apply to all
channels accordingly (channels 0 to 7).

Connection examples

1 Multiplexer 21
U+ U+
I+ 2 22
0 0 I+
3 23
1 1 S– S–
Ch 0 V Ch 4
2 2 M+ 4 24 M+
3 3 5 25
M– M–
4 4 6 26
U+ U+
5 5 7 27
I+ I+
6 6 8 Logic Electrical 28
S– S–
7 7 Ch 1 and isolation Ch 5
9 29
M+ backpl M+ A
10 ane 30
M– ADC M–
bus
11 interfa 31
U+ U+
0 0 I+ 12 ce 32 I+
1 1 S– 13 33 S–
Ch 2 Ch 6
2 2 M+ 14 34
M+
Current mV
3 3 15 35
M– M–
source
4 4
16 36
U+ U+
5 5
I+ 17 37 I+
6 6
18 38
7 7 S– S–
Ch 3 + 5 V from Ch 7
M+ 19 39
M+
backplane bus
M– 20 40 M–
Internal supply

Channel
number

Figure 4-37 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

Note
When connecting the voltage and current sensors, make sure that you do not
exceed the maximum permitted common-mode voltage UCM of 2 V between the
inputs. So to prevent measuring errors, interconnect the individual M– terminals.
It is not necessary to interconnect the M– terminals when measuring resistors and
resistance temperature detectors.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-106 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 250 g time/ resolution (per
channel)
Data for Specific Module
 Parameters can be Yes
Supports clocked operation No assigned
Number of inputs 8  Noise suppression for 50 60
 For resistance-type 8 frequency f1 in Hz
sensor
 Integration time in 20 162/3
Length of cable max. 200 m milliseconds
 Shielded max. 50 m at 50 mV
 Basic conversion time 66 55
Voltages, Currents, Potentials including Integration
time in milliseconds
Power rated voltage of the from bus –5 V
electronics Additional conversion 66 55
time for measuring
Constant current for resistance, in ms
resistance-type sensor
 Resolution in bits (incl. 13 13 bits
 Resistance 0.83 mA overrange) bits
temperature detectors
and resistance Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error
measurement 0 to
Noise suppression for f = n
(f1  1 %),
600 Ω
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2
 Resistance 0.25 mA
 Common-mode > 86 dB
measurement 0 to
interference
6 kΩ
(UCM < 2 V)
Isolation
 Series-mode noise > 40 dB
 Between channels and Yes (peak value of
backplane bus noise < nominal value
of input range)
 Between the channels No
Crosstalk between the > 50 dB
Permitted potential inputs
difference
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
 Between the inputs 2.0 VDC reference to the input range)
(ECM)
 Voltage input  5 V 10 V  0.6 %
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 1 to 5 V
Minternal (UISO) 0 to 10 V
Insulation tested with 500 VDC  50 mV  0.5 %
 500 mV
Current consumption 1 V
 From the backplane max. 90 mA
bus  Current input  20 mA  0.5 %
0 to 20 mA
Power dissipation of the typ. 0.4 W 4 to 20 mA
module
 Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ  0.5 %
0 to 600 Ω  0.5 %

 Resistance Pt 100  1.2 K

thermometer standard

Pt 100 1K
climate

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-107
Analog Modules

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input Data for Selecting a Sensor
range)
Input range (rated
 Voltage input 5  0.4 % values)/Input resistance
V
 10 V
1 to 5 V  Voltage  50 mV 100 kΩ
0 to 10 V  500 mV
1 V
 50 mV  0.3 %
 500 mV 5V
1 V  10 V
 Current input  20 mA  0.3 % 1 to 5 V;
0 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
 Current  20 mA 50 Ω
 Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ  0.3 %
0 to 20 mA;
0 to 600 Ω  0.3 %
4 to 20 mA:
 Resistance Pt 100 1K
thermometer standard  Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ 100 MΩ
0 to 600 Ω
Pt 100  0.8 K
climate  Resistance Pt 100 100 MΩ
thermometer standard /
Temperature error (with  0.06 %/K / 0.06 K/K climate
reference to the input
range) Maximum input voltage for max. 30 V continuous
voltage input U+
Linearity error (with  0.1 % / 0.1 K
(destruction limit)
reference to the input
range) Maximum input voltage for max. 12 V continuous;
Repeatability (in steady  0.1 % /  0.1 K voltage input M+, M-, S- 30 V for max. 1 s
state at 25 C referred to (destruction limit)
input range) Maximum input current for 40 mA
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics current input I+
(destruction limit)
Interrupts None
Connection of the sensor
Diagnostic functions None
 For measuring voltage Possible

 For measuring current

As two-wire transmitter Possible, with external

supply

As four-wire transmitter Possible

 For measuring
resistance

With two-conductor Possible

connection

With three-conductor Possible

connection

With four-conductor Possible

connection
Characteristic linearization Parameters can be
assigned

 For RTD Pt 100 standard / climate

 Technical unit for Degrees Celsius,

temperature degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin
measurement

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-108 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.20.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to the
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-59 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Measurement
 Measuring Method Deactivated U
U Voltage
I Current
R Resistors
RTD Bulb resistor
 Measuring Range Voltage
50 mV; 500 mV; 1 V; 1 to 5 V; 10 V
5 V; 0 to 10 V; 10 V Dynamic Channel
Current
0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; 20 mA 20 mA
Resistors
0 to 600 Ω; 0 to 6 kΩ 600 Ω
Bulb resistor (linear) Pt 100
Pt 100 climate; Pt 100 standard standard
 Interference 50 Hz; 60 Hz 50 Hz
Module
Suppression
 Temperature unit Degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit,
Kelvin*
* Pt 100 standard only

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-109
Analog Modules

4.20.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 Voltage measurement
 Current measurement
 Resistance test
You perform the setting with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
Set the ”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-110 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits;

(6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 8 inputs in 4 channel groups
 Measured-value resolution; settable per group (depending on the integration
time set)
– 9 bits + sign
– 12 bits + sign
– 14 bits + sign
 Measuring method selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Temperature
 Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Two channels with limit monitoring
 Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface
 Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one
coding key is inserted in position D)

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time
selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel,
the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical
Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-11).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-111
Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits

Thermocouples, Resistance test

voltage measurement
Fault indicator – red current measurement

L+ 24V
SF Internal Current Multi- Meas. range M0 + M0 + CH0
supply source plexer module
CH0
M0 M0
M1 + CH1 IC0 +
M1 IC0
M2 + CH2 M1 + CH2
M2  M1
Int. M3 + CH3 IC1 +
T Comp. M3 IC1
Ext. compensation Comp +
+
None
Comp
Comp–/ Mana
ADC M4 + CH4 M2 + CH4
M4 M2
Isolation M5 + CH5 IC2 +
M5 IC2
M6 + CH6 M3 + CH6
Backplane bus SF M6  M3
interface M7 + CH7 IC3 +
M7 IC3
M
M

Figure 4-38 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits

The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (see Technical
Specifications).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-112 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Power dissipation of the typ. 1 W

module
Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117
(in millimeters) Analog Value Generation
Weight Approx. 250 g Measuring principle Integrating
Data for Specific Module Integration time/conversion
time/ resolution (per
Supports clocked operation No channel)
Number of inputs 8  Parameters can be Yes
 For resistance-type 4 assigned
sensor
 Integration time in 2.5 162/3 20 100
Length of cable max. 200 m milliseconds
 Shielded max. 50 m at 80 mV and  Basic conversion time 3 17 22 102
thermocouples including Integration
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time in milliseconds

Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC Additional conversion 1 1 1 1

electronics L + time for measuring
resistance, in ms
 Reverse polarity Yes or
protection
Additional conversion 10 10 10 10
Power supply of the time for open-circuit
transmitters monitoring, in ms
or
 Supply current max. 60 mA (per channel)
Additional conversion 16 16 16 16
 Short-circuit-proof Yes time for measuring
Constant current for typ. 1.67 mA resistance and
resistance-type sensor open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
Isolation
 Resolution in bits (incl. 9 12 12 14
 Between channels and Yes overrange) bits bits bits bits
backplane bus
 Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10
 Between channels and Yes frequency f1 in Hz
power supply of the  Basic execution time of 24 136 176 816
electronics the module, in ms (all
Permitted potential channels enabled)
difference 2.5 VDC Smoothing of the measured None
 Between inputs and values
MANA (UCM)
– At signal = 0 V
– Not for 2-wire
transmitter
 Between the inputs 2.5 VDC
(ECM)
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal (UISO)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 50 mA
 From the backplane bus max. 30 mA
L+ (without two-wire
transmitter)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-113
Analog Modules

Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Temperature error of internal 1%

compensation
Noise suppression for F = n
(f1  1 %),
(f1 = interference frequency) Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
 Common-mode > 70 dB Interrupts
interference  Hardware interrupt Programmable
(UCM < 2.5 V) when limit has been channels 0 and 2
 Series-mode noise > 40 dB exceeded
(peak value of  Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable
noise <nominal value of
input range) Diagnostic functions Programmable

Crosstalk between the > 50 dB  Group error display Red LED (SF)
inputs  Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range) Data for Selecting a Sensor

 Voltage input 80 mV 1% Input range (rated

values)/Input resistance
250 to 1000  0.6 %
mV  Voltage  80 mV /10 MΩ

2.5 to 10 V  0.8 %  250 mV /10 MΩ

 500 mV /10 MΩ
 Current input 3.2 to 20 mA  0.7 %
1000 mV /10 MΩ
 Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω;  0, 7 %  2.5 V /100kΩ
600 Ω
5V /100kΩ
 Thermocouple Type E, N, J,  1, 1 % 1 to 5 V; /100kΩ
K, L
 10 V /100kΩ
 Resistance Pt 100/  0, 7 %
thermometer Ni 100  Current  3.2 mA /25 Ω
 10 mA /25 Ω
Pt 100  0, 8 %
climate  20 mA /25 Ω
0 to 20 mA; /25 Ω
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input
range) 4 to 20 mA: /25 Ω

 Voltage input 80 mV  0.7 %  Resistors 150 Ω /10 ΜΩ

300 Ω /10 ΜΩ
250 to  0.4 %
1000mV 600 Ω /10 ΜΩ

2.5 to 10 V  0.6 %  Thermocouples Type E, N, J, /10 ΜΩ

K, L
 Current input 3.2 to 20 mA  0.5 %
 Resistance Pt 100, /10 ΜΩ
 Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω;  0.5 % thermometer Ni 100
600 Ω
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
 Thermocouple Type E, N, J,  0.7 % voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
K, L limit) (duty factor 1:20)
 Resistance Pt 100/  0.5 % Maximum input current for 40 mA
thermometer Ni 100 current input (destruction
Pt 100  0.6 % limit)
climate
Temperature error (with  0.005 %/K
reference to the input range)
Linearity error (with  0.05 %
reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady  0.05 %
state at 25 C referred to
input range)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-114 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

 For measuring voltage Possible  For thermocouples assigned
Type E, N, J, K, L
 For measuring current
 For RTD Pt 100
As two-wire transmitter Possible (standard, climate range)
Ni 100
As four-wire transmitter Possible (standard, climate range)
 Temperature compensation Parameters can be
For measuring assigned
resistance
 Internal temperature Possible
With two-conductor Possible compensation
connection
With three-conductor Possible  External temperature Possible
connection compensation with
compensating box
With four-conductor Possible
connection  Compensation for 0 C Possible
comparison point
 Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω temperature
transmitter
 Technical unit for Degrees Celsius
temperature
measurement

4.21.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits by means of

measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range module

If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do
this are described in detail in Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in Section 4.21.2 tells you which assignment you have to
select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the
necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range modules are preset to ”B” (voltage;  10 V) when the
module is supplied.
To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only
have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting.
Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-115
Analog Modules

Table 4-60 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits Using Measuring Range Modules

Measuring Range Measuring Method Measuring Range

Module Setting
A Voltage  1000 mV
B Voltage  10 V
C Current, 4 to 20 mA
Four-wire transmitter
D Current, 4 to 20 mA
Two-wire transmitter

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-116 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-61 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation

Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring

interrupt range.
 Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
 Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
 With wire-break Yes/no No
check
Measurement
 Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance (four-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
TC-I Thermocouple Channel or
(internal comparison) Dynamic channel
TC-E Thermocouple group
(external comparison)
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
 Measuring range Refer to Section 4.21.2 for the 10 V
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
 Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-117
Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8  12 bits are arranged in four groups of two.
You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits has a measuring range module
for each channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-62 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, there is only one channel per
channel group. The ”2nd” channel of each group is used for current injection (IC).
The measured value is obtained by accessing the ”1st” channel of the group. The
”2nd” channel of the group has the default carry value ”7FFFH”.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note,
however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel
group in each case – in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-78.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-118 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.21.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8
12 bits

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 Voltage measurement
 Current measurement
 Resistance test
 Temperature measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module
and with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way,
you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the
”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this way you
shorten the scan time of the module.
If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
 Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
 Current measurement, two-wire transmitter:
There are two ways to use the channels:
a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this
channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module
triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module
comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 k. You may then
enable diagnostics for this channel group.
 Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, four-wire transmitter: Connect the
unused input in series with an input of the same channel group.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-119
Analog Modules

Special characteristic when all channels are disabled

If you disable all input channels of the module and enable diagnostics when
parameterizing the analog input module SM 331; AI 8
12 bits, the module does
not indicate that the ”external auxiliary voltage” is missing.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range
modules on the module and with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Table 4-63 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
U: Voltage  80 mV A You will find the digitized analog
 250 mV values in Section 4.3.1 in the
voltage measuring range
 500 mV
 1000 mV
 2.5 V B
5V
1 to 5 V
 10 V
TC-I: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(internal compensation) Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in  80 mV
(thermovoltage the voltage measuring range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
TC-E: Thermocouple Type L [Fe-CuNi]
(external compensation)
(thermovoltage
measurement)
2DMU: Current (two-wire 4 to 20 mA D You will find the digitized analog
transmitter) values in Section 4.3.1 in the
current measuring range
4DMU: Current (four-wire  3.2 mA C
transmitter)  10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
 20 mA
R-4L: Resistors 150  A You will find the digitized analog
(four-conductor 300  values in Section 4.3.1 in the
connection) resistance measuring range
600 

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-120 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-63 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
TC-IL: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in the
compensation) temperature range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
(temperature The characteristics are linearized:
measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni]
 Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751
Type L [[Fe-CuNi]]
TC-EL: Thermocouple  Ni 100 according to IEC DIN
(linear, external 43760
compensation)  Thermocouple to DIN 584,
(temperature type L to DIN 43710.
measurement)
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A
(linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate
connection) Pt 100 standard
(temperature
Ni 100 standard
measurement)

Default settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the ”voltage” measuring method
und the ” 10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits
inSTEP 7.

Wire-break check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements
(thermocouples and bulb resistors.

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring

range
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break
check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current
falls below 3.6 mA.
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break
check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt
when the underflow is reached.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-121
Analog Modules

4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
RTD

(6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8
RTD has the following characteristic
features:
 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel
groups
 Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group
 Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
 Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 8 channels with limit monitoring
 Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
 Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8
RTD in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153 x:
 IM 153-1; ab 6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
 IM 153-2; ab 6ES7 153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
 IM 153-2; ab 6ES7 153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-122 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Fault indicator – red

L+ 1 L+ M- 21 L+
2 22
SF M0+ M4+
3 ADC ADC 23
M0- DC M4-
4 to 24
K0 K4
Ic0+ DC Ic4+
5 25
Ic0- Ic4-
6 26
M1+ 7 27 M5+

M1- M5-
8 28
K1 Ic5+ K5
Ic1+ 9 29
Ic1- DAC DAC
10 Ic5-
30
M2+ M6+
11 31
M2- ADC ADC M6-
12 32
K2 K6
Ic2+ Ic6+
13 33
Ic2- Ic6-
14 34
M3+ Backplane M7+
bus IM
15 35
M3- 16 36 M7-
K3 K7
Ic3+ Ic7+
17 37
Ic3- Ic7-
18 DAC DAC 38

19 39

M 20 40 M

Figure 4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-123
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Weight Approx. 272 g
Integration/conversion time/
Data for Specific Module resolution (per channel)
Supports clocked No  Parameters can be Yes
operation assigned

Number of inputs 8  Basic conversion time in 80

ms
Length of cable
 Additional conversion time 185*
 Shielded max. 200 m for measuring resistance,
Voltages, Currents, Potentials in ms

Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC  Additional conversion time 100

electronics L+ for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
 Resolution including sign 16 bits
Constant measured current for max. 5 mA
resistance-type sensor  Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50
for interference frequency
Isolation f1 in Hz
 Between channels and Yes
Smoothing of the measured None / low/
backplane bus
values average/ high
 Between channels and Yes
Conversion time (per channel) 100 ms
power supply of the
electronics Basic response time of module 200 ms
(all channels enabled)
 Between the channels Yes
In groups of 2 Module filtering mode 8 channels, software

Permitted potential difference Integration/conversion time/

resolution (per channel)
 Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
 Parameters can be Yes
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC assigned
Minternal (UISO)
 Basic conversion time in 8 / 25 / 30
Insulation tested with 500 VDC ms

Current consumption  Additional conversion time 45 / 79 / 89*

 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
for measuring resistance,
in ms
 From the power supply L+ max. 240 mA
 Additional conversion time 20 / 37 / 42
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4.6 W for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms

 Resolution including sign 16 bits

 Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50

sion for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

Smoothing of the measured None / low/

values average/ high

Conversion time (per channel) 20 / 37 / 42 ms

Basic response time of module 40 / 79 / 84 ms

(all channels enabled)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-124 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Linearity error (with reference to 0.02 %
the input range)
Integration/conversion time/
resolution (per channel) Repeat accuracy (in the steady 0.01 %
 Parameters can be Yes state at 25 °C, referred to the
assigned input range)

 Basic conversion time in 3.3 Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

ms Interrupts
 Additional conversion time 185*  Hardware interrupt Programmable
for measuring resistance, (channels 0 – 7)
in ms
 Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
 Additional conversion time 85** assigned
for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
assigned
 Resolution including sign 16 bits
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
 Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50
sion for interference  Diagnostic information can Possible
frequency f1 in Hz be displayed

Smoothing of the measured None / low/ Data for Selecting a Sensor

values average/ high Input range (rated values) input
resistance
Basic response time of module 10 ms
(all channels enabled)  Resistance thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni
Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error
120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
Noise suppression for f = n
(f1 ± 1%), 1000, Cu 10
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
 Resistors 150, 300, 600 
 Common-mode > 100 dB Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous;
interference voltage input (destruction limit) 75 VDC for max. 1 s
(UCM < 60 VAC) (duty factor 1:20)
 Series-mode interference > 90 dB Connection of the sensor
(peak value of interference
< rated value of input  For measuring resistance
range)
With two-conductor Possible (without
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB connection resistance correction)

Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred With three-conductor Possible
to 0 to 60 C input range) connection

 Resistance thermometer 1.0 °C With four-conductor Possible

connection
 Resistors 0.1 %
Characteristic linearization
Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
range)
 Resistance thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni
 Resistance thermometer 0.5 °C 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
1000, Cu 10 (standard
 Resistors 0.05 % and climatic range)
Temperature error (with 0.005 %/K  Technical unit for Degrees Celsius;
reference to the input range) temperature measurement degrees Fahrenheit

* The resistance measurement for a three-conductor connection is performed every 5 minutes.

** Open-circuit monitoring in module filtering mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-125
Analog Modules

4.22.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD with

PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8
RTD in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-64 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Parameter Value Range Default Set- Parameter Scope

tings Type
Enable
Yes/no
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
 Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
 Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
 Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
 Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768

Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
 With wire-break Yes/no No
check

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-126 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-64 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Set- Parameter Scope

tings Type
Measurement
 Measuring method Deactivated RTD-4L
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
R-3L Resistance,
three-conductor connection
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor Channel
connection) Dynamic
group
RTD-3L Bulb resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection)
 Measuring range Refer to Section 4.22.2 for the Pt 100
measuring ranges of the input climate
channels that you can set. 0.003850
(IPTS-68)
 Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees
Dynamic Module
Fahrenheit Celsius
 Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels, Dynamic Module
8 channels software filter hardware
4 channels hardware filter filter
 Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.003850
coefficient for 0.003850 / °C
temperature 0.003916 / °C
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0.003850 / °C (ITS-90) Channel
Dynamic
Nickel (Ni) group
0.006180 / °C
0.006720 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
 Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50/60/400 Hz Dynamic Channel
suppression* 50 Hz group
 Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel
Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-127
Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8  RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-65 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit

violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.

Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8
RTD operates in one of the following modes:
 ”Hardware filter, 8 channels”
 ”Software filter, 8 channels”
 ”Hardware filter, 4 channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-128 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode

In ”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8
RTD
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-40).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-40 Hardware Filter 8 Channels Scan Time

Scan time of the module

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8
RTD is 85 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 12 ms to switch and settle. Each
channel needs a time of 97 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 194 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU)
2
Scan time = (85 ms + 12 ms)
2
Scan time = 194 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-129
Analog Modules

”Software filter 8 channels” mode

In ”Software filter 8 channels” mode, the analog/digital conversion occurs in exactly
the same way as in ”hardware filter 8 channels” mode. That is to say, as the
module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels are
converted, all the ADCs convert simultaneously for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-41).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-41 Software Filter 8 Channels Scan Time

Scan time of the module

The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference
frequency suppression. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the
channel conversion time including communication time is 30 ms. When you set an
interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 25 ms. When you
set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to
8 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over
by means of opto MOS relays with a switchover time of 12 ms to the other channel
of the group. This relationship is shown in the table that follows.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-130 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-66 Scan Times in ”Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Programmed Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All

Interference Frequency Channels)
Suppression
50 Hz 42 ms 84 ms
60 Hz 37 ms 74 ms
400 Hz 20 ms 40 ms

* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 12 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group

Scan time in ”Hardware Filter, 4 Channels” mode

In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different
groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the
ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-42 Hardware Filter 4 Channels Scan Time

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8
RTD is 10 ms. As
the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel
scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-131
Analog Modules

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes, the scan time
of the module is doubled, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 170 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-78.

4.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8
RTD

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 RTD 4-conductor measurement
 RTD 3-conductor measurement
 Resistor 4-conductor measurement
 Resistor 3-conductor measurement
You perform the setting with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-132 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Unused channels
Set the ”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a
nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer
to the block diagram, Figure 4-39, for the connection).
In the ”4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the ”measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM331;AI 8
RTD

Method selected Measuring Range Description

Resistors: 150  You will find the digital analog values in
(Three-conductor/four-con- 300  Section 4.3.1
ductor terminal) 600 
Resistance RTD Pt 100 climate
(Three-conductor/four-con- Pt 200 climate
ductor terminal) Pt 500 climate
Pt 1000 climate
Ni 100 climate
Ni 120 climate
Ni 200 climate
Ni 500 climate
Ni 1000 climate
Cu 10 climate
Pt 100 standard
Pt 200 standard
Pt 500 standard
Pt 1000 standard
Ni 100 standard
Ni 120 standard
Ni 200 standard
Ni 500 standard
Ni 1000 standard
Cu 10 standard

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-133
Analog Modules

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
AI 8
RTD from the range of values shown in Table 4-64.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the table below.

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 4-68 Content of the 4 Bytes with Additional Information from OB40 during a Hardware
Interrupt or an End-of-Scan-Cycle Interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
Upper limit exceeded in
mark- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
ers
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned bit 3

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-134 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8
TC

(6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8
TC has the following characteristic
features:
 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups
 Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group
 Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
 Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 8 channels with limit monitoring
 Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
 Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
 Programmable reaction to open thermocouple
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8
TC in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153-x:
 IM 153-1; ab 6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
 IM 153-2; ab 6ES7 153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
 IM 153-2; ab 6ES7 153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-135
Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Fault indicator – red

SF 1 L- M+ 21 L+
2 22
3 23
DC
4 to 24
DC
5 25

6 26
TC+0 TC+4
Chn. 7 27
0 TC-4 K4
TC-0 8 28
TC+1 TC+5
Chn. 9 29
1 ADC ADC TC-5 K5
TC-1
10 30
TC+2 TC+6
Chn. 11 31
2 TC-2 ADC ADC K6
12 32 TC-6
TC+3 TC+7
Chn. 13 33
3 Back- K7
TC-3 TC-7
14 plane 34
bus KV+
15 35
IM
16 36 KV-
Ext KV
lc+
17 37
Ext lc-
18 38
KV

19 39

20 40 M

Channel
number

Figure 4-43 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-136 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Weight Approx. 272 g
Integration time/conversion
Data for Specific Module time/ resolution (per
channel)
Supports clocked No
operation  Parameters can be Yes
assigned
Length of cable
 Shielded max. 100 m  Basic conversion time in 95
ms
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
 Additional conversion 4
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC time for open-circuit
electronics L+ monitoring, in ms
 Reverse polarity protection Yes  Resolution including 16 bits
sign
Constant measured current for typ. 0.7 mA
resistance-type sensor  Noise suppression 400/60/50
for interference
Isolation frequency f1 in Hz
 Between channels and Yes Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high
backplane bus values
 Between channels and Yes Basic response time of 190 ms
power supply of the module (all channels
electronics enabled)
 Between the channels Yes Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
In groups of 2
Integration time/conversion
Permitted potential difference time/ resolution (per
channel)
 Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
 Parameters can be Yes
 Between MANA and 75 VDC 60 VAC assigned
Minternal (UISO)
 Basic conversion time in 23/72/83
Insulation tested with 500 VDC ms
Current consumption  Additional conversion 4
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA time for open-circuit
monitoring, in ms
 From supply voltage L+ max. 240 mA
 Resolution including 16 bits
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W sign

 Noise suppression 400/60/50

for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high

values

Basic response time of 46/144/166 ms

module (all channels
enabled)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-137
Analog Modules

Analog Value Generation (Cont’d) Type K -200 °C to +1372 °C ±2.1 °C

Measuring principle Integrating -230 °C to -200 °C ±2.9 °C
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Type N -200 °C to +1300 °C ±2.2 °C
Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) -230 °C to -200 °C ±3.0 °C
 Parameters can be Yes Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.5 °C
assigned
-50 °C to +100 °C ±1.8 °C
 Basic conversion time in 1.0
ms Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.7 °C

 Additional conversion 93 1) -50 °C to +100 °C ±2.0 °C

time for open-circuit
Type +200 °C to +1820 °C ±2.3 °C
monitoring, in ms
B 4)
 Resolution including 16 bits
+45 °C +200 °C ±2.5 °C
sign
Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±2.3 °C
 Noise suppression for 400/60/50
frequency f1 in Hz 0 °C +100 °C ±2.5 °C
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
values range)
Basic response time of 10 ms  Thermocouple
module (all channels
enabled) Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.2 °C

Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error -230 °C to -200 °C ±0.5 °C

Noise suppression for f = n
(f1 ± 1%), (f1 = Type U -150 °C to +400 °C ±0.2 °C
interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
-200 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
 Common-mode > 100 dB
interference Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±0.2 °C
(Ucm < 60 VAC)
-230 °C to -200 °C ±0.5 °C
 Series-mode > 90 dB 2)
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±0.2 °C
interference (peak value
of interference < rated -210 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
value of input range)
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±0.2 °C
Crosstalk between the > 100 dB
inputs -200 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred Type K -200 °C to +1372 °C ±0.2 °C
to 0 to 60 °C input range) Note: This limit does not cover
the error cold connection point3) -230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C

 Thermocouple Type N -200 °C to +1300 °C ±0.2 °C

Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.7 °C -230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.2 °C

Type U -150 °C to +400 °C ±0.9 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±0.5 °C

-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.2 °C Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.2 °C

Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±1.2 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±0.5 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C Type +200 °C to +1820 °C ±0.3 °C

B 4)
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±1.4 °C
+45 °C to +200 °C ±0.5 °C
-210 °C to -150 °C ±1.7 °C
Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±0.3 °C
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±1.5 °C
0 °C +100 °C ±0.5 °C
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.8 °C

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-138 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K Data for Selecting a Sensor

reference to the input range)
Input ranges (rated values)/
Linearity error (with ± 0.02% input resistance
reference to the input range)  Thermocouples Type B, C, N, E, R, S, J, L,
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.01% T, K, U
steady state at 25 °C, Maximum input voltage for 20 VDC continuous; 75
referred to the output voltage input (destruction VDC for max. 1 s (duty
range 3) limit) factor 1:20)
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Characteristic linearization Parameters can be
Interrupts assigned

 Hardware interrupt Parameters can be Temperature compensation Parameters can be

assigned assigned

(channels 0 to 7)  Internal temperature Possible

compensation
 Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned  External temperature Possible
compensation with
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be Pt 100
assigned
 Compensation for 0°C Possible
 Group error display Red LED (SF) comparison point
 Diagnostics information Possible temperature
read-out  Compensation for 50°C Possible
comparison point
temperature
 Technical unit for Degrees Celsius/
temperature degrees Fahrenheit
measurement

1) Open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds.

2) Series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows:
50 Hz > 70 db
60 Hz > 70 db
400 Hz > 80 db
3) The operational limit comprises only the basic error of the analog input at Ta = 25 °C and the
total temperature error. The total error must cover the error for the compensation of the cold
connection point. Internal compensation of the cold connection point = max. 1.5 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point = accuracy of the used external RTD is
+0.1 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point, where the connection point is held at 0 °C
or 50 °C = accuracy of the connection point temperature control.
4) Because of the slight rise over the range of approx. 0 °C to 85 °C, the lack of compensation of
the comparison point temperature only has a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there
is no compensation and the measuring method ”Compensation to 0 °C” is set, the deviation in
the type B thermocouple duringtemperature measurement is: 200 °C to 1802 °C <0.5 °C

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-139
Analog Modules

4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8
TC

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8
TC bits in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module

SM 331; AI 8 x TC with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8
TC in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-69 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
Yes/no
 Diagnostic Interrupt Yes/no
No
 Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
 Hardware interrupt Yes/no
at end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
 Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
 Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768

Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
 With wire-break Yes/no No
check

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-140 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-69 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Measurement
 Measuring method Deactivated TC-IL
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
TC-L00C thermocouple
(linear, ref. temperature 0°C) Channel
Dynamic
TC-L50C thermocouple group
(linear, ref. temp. 50°C)
 Measuring range For the settable measuring ranges of Type K
the input channels, please refer to
the individual module description.
 Reaction to open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
 Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees Dynamic Module
Fahrenheit Celsius
 Module filtering 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels, Dynamic Module
mode 8 channels software filter hardware
4 channels hardware filter filter
 Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50/60/400 Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz group
 Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel
Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-141
Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8  TC are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.

Table 4-70 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8
TC to Channel Groups

Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit

violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.

Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8
TC operates in one of the following modes:
 ”Hardware Filter, 8 Channels”
 ”Software Filter, 8 Channels”
 ”Hardware Filter, 4 Channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-142 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8
TC
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-35).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-44 Hardware Filter 8 Channels Scan Time

Scan time in the mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8
TC is 91 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Each channel
needs a time of 98 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 196 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU)
2
Scan time = (91 ms + 7 ms)
2
Scan time = 196 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-143
Analog Modules

”Software filter 8 channels” mode

In 8-channel software filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8
TC
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-45).

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K0 K2 K4 K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

K1 K3 K5 K7

Figure 4-45 Software Filter 8 Channels Scan Time

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-144 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel software filter mode of analog input module SM331; AI 8
TC, the
channel conversion time is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set
an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including
communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz,
the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. As with 8-channel
hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS
relays with a switchover time of 7 ms to the other channel of the group. Table 4-71
shows the scan time of the module at a certain interference frequency.

Table 4-71 Scan Times in ”Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Programmed Channel scan time* Module scan time

interference frequency (all channels)
suppression
50 Hz 83 ms 166 ms
60 Hz 72 ms 144 ms
400 Hz 23 ms 46 ms

* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 7 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group

”Hardware filter 4 channels” mode

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8
TC does
not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module
contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)

Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-46 Hardware Filter 4 Channels Scan Time

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-145
Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8
TC is 10 ms. As the
module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan
time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating mode prolongs the
scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 93 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-78.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-146 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 8
TC

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 0 °C
 Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 50 °C
 Thermocouples, linearization with internal comparison
 Thermocouple, linearization with external comparison
You perform the setting with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
Set the ”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid
diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus
input of the channel.
In the ”4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the ”measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.

Table 4-72 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;AI 8
TC

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

TC-L00C: Type B You will find the digitized analog
(thermocouple, linear, reference Type C values in Section 4.3.1 in the
temperature 0 °C) temperature range
Type E
TC-L50C:
Type J
(thermocouple, linear, reference
temperature 50 °C) Type K
TC-IL: Type L
(thermocouple, linear, internal Type N
compensation) Type R
TC-EL: Type S
(thermocouple, linear, external
compensation) Type T
Type U

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-147
Analog Modules

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
AI 8
TC from the range of values shown in Table 4-69.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the tables below.

Table 4-73 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in in °C

Thermo- Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

couple Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
in °C Dec. Hex. in °C Dec. Hex.
Type B 1820.1 18201 471AH 0 0 0
Type C --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type E --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type J 1200.1 12001 2EE1H <-210.0 <-2100 < F7CCH
Type K 1372.1 13721 3599H <-270.0 <-2700 < F574H
Type L 900.1 9001 2329H <-200.0 <-2000 < F830H
Type N --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type R, S 1769.1 1769.1 451BH -50.1 -501 FE0BH
Type T 400.1 4001 0FA1H <-270.0 <-2700 < F574H
Type U 600.1 6001 1771H <-200.0 <-2000 < F830H

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-148 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-74 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in in °F

Thermo- Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

couple Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
in °F Dec. Hex. in °F Dec. Hex.
Type B 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 0 0 0
Type C --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type E --- --- -- --- --- --
Type J 2192.2 21922 55A2H <-346.0 <-3460 < F27CH
Type K 2501.8 25018 61BAH <454.0 <-4540 <EE44H
Type L 1652.2 16522 408AH <-328.0 <-3280 F330H
Type N --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type R, S 3216.4 3216.4 7DA4H -58.2 -582 FDBAH
Type T 752.2 7522 1062H <454.0 <-4540 <EE44H
Type U 1112.2 11122 2B72H <-328.0 <-3280 < F330H

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.

Table 4-75 Content of the 4 Bytes with Additional Information from OB40 during a Hardware
Interrupt or an End-of-Scan-Cycle Interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
Upper limit exceeded in
mark- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
ers
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned byte 3

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-149
Analog Modules

4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2
12 bits;

(6ES7 331-7KBx2-0AB0)

Order number: ”Standard module”

6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 331-7KB82-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 2
12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 Two inputs in one channel group
 Measured-value resolution (depending on the integration time set)
– 9 bits + sign
– 12 bits + sign
– 14 bits + sign
 Measuring method selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Temperature
 Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 One channel with limit monitoring
 Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface
 Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one
coding key is inserted in position D)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-150 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time
selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel,
the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical
Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-11).

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

Thermocouples, Resistance test

Voltage measurement
Fault indicator – red
Current measurement

L+ 24V
SF Internal Current Multi- Meas. range M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0
supply source plexer module
M0 M0
M1 + CH1 IC0 +
M1 IC0

Internal
T compensation

+ External compensation Comp +

None
Comp
Comp–/ Mana
ADC

Isolation

Backplane bus SF
interface

Figure 4-47 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (refer to the
technical specifications for the module).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-151
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Measuring principle Integrating
(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 250 g time/ resolution (per
channel)
Data for Specific Module
 Parameters can be Yes
Supports clocked operation No assigned
Number of inputs 2  Integration time in 2.5 162/3 20 100
 For resistance-type 1 milliseconds
sensor
 Basic conversion time 3 17 22 102
Length of cable max. 200 m including Integration
 Shielded max. 50 m at 80 mV and time in milliseconds
thermocouples Additional conversion 1 1 1 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time for measuring
resistance, in ms
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC or
electronics L +
Additional conversion 10 10 10 10
 Reverse polarity Yes time for open-circuit
protection monitoring, in ms
Power supply of the or
transmitters Additional conversion 16 16 16 16
 Supply current max. 60 mA (per channel) time for measuring
resistance and
 Short-circuit-proof Yes open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
Constant current for typ. 1.67 mA
resistance-type sensor  Resolution in bits (incl. 9 12 12 14
overrange) bits bits bits bits
Isolation
 Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10
 Between channels and Yes frequency f1 in Hz
backplane bus
 Basic execution time of 6 34 44 204
 Between channels and Yes the module, in ms (all
power supply of the channels enabled)
electronics
Smoothing of the measured None
Permitted potential
values
difference 2.5 VDC
 Between inputs and
MANA (UCM)
– At signal = 0 V
– Not for 2-wire
transmitter
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal (UISO)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 50 mA
 From the backplane bus max. 30 mA (without
L+ two-wire transmitter)
Power dissipation of the typ. 1.3 W
module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-152 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Temperature error of internal 1%

compensation
Noise suppression for f = n
(f1  1 %),
(f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2... Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
 Common-mode > 70 dB Interrupts
interference  Hardware interrupt Programmable
(UCM < 2.5 V) when limit has been channel 0
 Series-mode noise > 40 dB exceeded
(peak value of  Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable
noise < nominal value of
input range) Diagnostic functions Programmable

Crosstalk between the > 50 dB  Group error display Red LED (SF)
inputs  Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the input range) Data for Selecting a Sensor

 Voltage input 80 mV 1% Input range (rated

values)/Input resistance
250 to  0.6 %
1000mV  Voltage  80 mV /10 MΩ

2.5 to 10 V  0.8 %  250 mV /10 MΩ

 500 mV /10 MΩ
 Current input 3.2 to 20 mA  0.7 %
1000 mV /10 MΩ
 Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω;  0, 7 %  2.5 V /100kΩ
600 Ω
5V /100kΩ
 Thermocouple Type E, N, J,  1, 1 % 1 to 5 V; /100kΩ
K, L
 10 V /100kΩ
 Resistance Pt 100/  0, 7 %
thermometer Ni 100  Current  3.2 mA /25 Ω
 10 mA /25 Ω
Pt 100  0, 8 %
climate  20 mA /25 Ω
0 to 20 mA; /25 Ω
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input
range) 4 to 20 mA: /25 Ω

 Voltage input 80 mV  0.6 %  Resistors 150 Ω /10 ΜΩ

300 Ω /10 ΜΩ
250 to  0.4 %
1000mV 600 Ω /10 ΜΩ

2.5 to 10 V  0.6 %  Thermocouples Type E, N, J, /10 ΜΩ

K, L
 Current input 3.2 to 20 mA  0.5 %
 Resistance Pt 100, /10 ΜΩ
 Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω;  0.5 % thermometer Ni 100
600 Ω
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
 Thermocouple Type E, N, J,  0.7 % voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
K, L limit) (duty factor 1:20)
 Resistance Pt 100/  0.5 % Maximum input current for 40 mA
thermometer Ni 100 current input (destruction
Pt 100  0.6 % limit)
climate
Temperature error (with  0.005 %/K
reference to the input range)
Linearity error (with  0.05 %
reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady  0.05 %
state at 25 C referred to
input range)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-153
Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

 For measuring voltage Possible  For thermocouples assigned
Type E, N, J, K, L
 For measuring current
 For RTD Pt 100
As two-wire transmitter Possible (standard, climate range)
Ni 100
As four-wire transmitter Possible (standard, climate range)
 Temperature compensation Parameters can be
For measuring assigned
resistance Possible  Internal temperature Possible
With two-conductor Possible compensation
connection
With three-conductor
Possible  External temperature Possible
connection compensation with
compensating box
With four-conductor
connection  Compensation for 0 C Possible
comparison point
 Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω temperature
transmitter
 Technical unit for Degrees Celsius
temperature
measurement

4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits by means of a

measuring range module on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range module

If necessary, the measuring range module must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do
this are described in detail in Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in Section 4.24.2 tells you which assignment you have to
select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the
necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range module is preset to ”B” (voltage;  10 V) when the module
is supplied.
To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only
have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting.
Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-154 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-76 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits Using Measuring Range Module

Measuring Range Module Measuring Method Measuring Range

Setting
A Voltage 1000 mV
B Voltage 10 V
C Current, 4 to 20 mA
four-wire transmitter
D Current, 4 to 20 mA
two-wire transmitter

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.

Table 4-77 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
upon limit violation

Trigger for hardware

interrupt
 Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
 Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
 Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
 With wire-break Yes/no No
check

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-155
Analog Modules

Table 4-77 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2
12 bits

Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Measurement
 Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance (four-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
TC-I Thermocouple Channel or
(internal comparison) Dynamic channel
TC-E Thermocouple group
(external comparison)
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
 Measuring range Refer to Section 4.24.2 for the 10 V
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
 Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
suppression

Channel groups
The two channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2
12 bits are combined
to a channel group. You can only ever assign parameters to the channel group.
The SM 331; AI 2
12 bits has a measuring range module for the channel group 0.

Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, the analog input module has only
one channel. The ”2nd” channel is used for current injection (IC).
The measured value is obtained by accessing the ”1st” channel. The ”2nd” channel
has the default carry value ”7FFFH”.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set a hardware interrupt in STEP 7 for the channel group. Note, however,
that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in
each case – in other words, for channel 0.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-156 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-78.

4.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;

AI 2
12 bits

Measuring methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
 Voltage measurement
 Current measurement
 Resistance test
 Temperature measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range module on the module
and with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way,
you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the
”measuring method” parameter for unused channels to ”disabled”. In this way you
shorten the scan time of the module.
If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-157
Analog Modules

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
 Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
 Current measurement, two-wire transmitter:
There are two ways to use the channels:
a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel
group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module triggers a
single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 k You may then
enable diagnostics for this channel group.
 Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, four-wire transmitter: Connect the
unused input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range
module on the module and with the ”measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

Table 4-78 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
U: Voltage  80 mV A You will find the digitized analog
 250 mV values in Section 4.3.1 in the
voltage measuring range
 500 mV
 1000 mV
 2.5 V B
5V
1 to 5 V
 10 V
TC-I: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(internal compensation) Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in  80 mV
(thermovoltage the voltage measuring range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
[ ]
TC-E: Thermocouples Type L [Fe-CuNi]
(external compensation)
(thermovoltage
measurement)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-158 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Table 4-78 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D You will find the digitized analog
transmitter) values in Section 4.3.1 in the
current measuring range
4DMU: Current (4-wire  3.2 mA C
transmitter)  10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
 20 mA
R-4L: Resistors 150  A You will find the digitized analog
(four-conductor connection) 300  values in Section 4.3.1 in the
resistance measuring range
600 
TC-IL: Thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in the
compensation) temperature range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
(temperature measurement) The characteristics are linearized:
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
 Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
 Ni 100 according to IEC DIN
TC-EL: Thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A 43760
(linear, external Type E [NiCr-CuNi]  Thermocouple to DIN 584,
compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] type L to DIN 43710.
(temperature measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A
(linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate
connection), Pt 100 standard
(temperature measurement)
Ni 100 standard

Default settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the ”voltage” measuring method
und the ” 10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8
12 bits in
STEP 7.

Wire-break check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements
(thermocouples and bulb resistors).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-159
Analog Modules

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring

range
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break
check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current
falls below 3.6 mA.
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break
check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt
when the underflow is reached.

4.25 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 y 12 bits;

(6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits has the following characteristic
features
 8 outputs in 8 channel groups
 The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
 Resolution 12 bits
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-160 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 8 y 12 bits

Voltage outputs Voltage outputs

Fault indicator – red
Current outputs Current outputs

DAC DAC

Internal
supply

Isolation

Backplane bus
interface

Figure 4-48 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8
12 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-161
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W × H × D 40 × 125 × 117  Resolution including sign

(in millimeters)
 ± 10 V; ± 20 mA; 11 bits +
Weight Approx. 272 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V sign
Data for Specific Module  0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA; 12 bits
 Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
Supports clocked No
operation Settling time
 For resistive load 0.2 ms
Number of inputs 8
 For capacitive load 3.3 ms
Length of cable  For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
 Shielded max. 200 m 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error

Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC  Crosstalk between the > 40 dB

 Reverse polarity protection Yes outputs
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
Isolation reference to the output range)
 Between channels and Yes  Voltage outputs ±0.5 %
backplane bus
 Between channels and Yes
 Current outputs ±0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25 °C referred to the
electronics output range)
 Between the channels No  Output voltage ± 0.4 %
 Between channels and load Yes  Output current ± 0.5 %
voltage L+
 Temperature error (with ±0.002 % /K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output
range)
 Between S– and MANA 3 VDC
(UCM)  Linearity error (with + 0.05 %
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC reference to the output
Minternal (UISO) range)
 Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.05 %
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
steady state at 25°C,
Current consumption referred to the output
range)
 From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
 Output ripple; band ± 0.05 %
 From supply voltage L+ (no max. 340 mA width 0 to 50 kHz (with
load) reference to the output
Power dissipation of the module typically 6.0 W range)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-162 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Voltage outputs

Interrupts  Short-circuit protection Yes

 Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable  Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
 Group error display assigned  No-load voltage max. 18 V

 Diagnostics information Red LED (SF) Destruction limit for

read-out Possible voltages/currents connected
from outside
Data for Selecting an Actuator
 Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
Output ranges (rated values) 75 V for max. 1 s
 Voltage ± 10 V (mark-to-space ratio
0 to 10 V 1:20)
1 to 5 V
 Current max. 50 mA DC
 Current ± 20 mA
0 to 20 mA Connection of actuators
4 to 20 mA  For voltage output
Impedance (in the nominal Four-conductor connection Possible
output range)
 For current output
 For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ Two-conductor connection Possible
– capacitive load max. 1
F
 For current outputs max. 500 Ω
– At UCM < 1 V max. 600 Ω
– For inductive load max. 10 mH

4.25.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits

Note
If the load voltage (L+) is switched off and on, this may result in incorrect output
values at the output for approx. 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-47.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-163
Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits
is assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 8
12
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-79.

4.25.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 8
12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the ”output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the ”output type” parameter to ”disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-164 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-79 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module der SM 332; AO 8
12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
 20 mA

Default settings
The default settings of the module are ”Voltage” for the output type and ”10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-break check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8
12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8
12 bits carries out a short-circuit test
only for voltage outputs.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-165
Analog Modules

4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits;

(6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 4 outputs in 4 channel groups
 The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
 Resolution of 16 bits
 Supports clocked operation
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable substitute value output
 Galvanic isolation between:
– Backplane bus interface and analog output channel
– The different analog output channels
– Analog output and L+, M
– Backplane bus interface and L+, M

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-166 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output moduleSM 332;

AO 4
16 bits

Fault indicator – red

Current Voltage
Outputs Outputs
1 L+
24 V
SF

Isolation
3 QI0 QV 0

4 S 0+
5 CH0 S 0 – CH0

6 MANA 0 M ANA 0

7 QI1 QV 1

8 S 1+
9 CH1 S 1 – CH1
MANA 1 M ANA 1
10

11 QI2 QV 2

12 S 2+

13 CH2 S 2 – CH2
Back-
plane 14 MANA 2 M ANA 2
bus
IM 15 QI3 QV 3

16 S 3+

17 CH3 S 3 – CH3
18 MANA 3 M ANA 3

M
20

Figure 4-49 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-167
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Resolution 15 bits + sign

(in millimeters) (including overrange)

Weight Approx. 220 g  1 to 5 V 13 bits

Data for Specific Module  4 to 20 mA 14 bits
Supports clocked Yes Conversion time max. 1.5 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 4  For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable  For capacitive load 1.0 ms

 Shielded max. 200 m  For inductive load 0.2 ms

Voltages, Currents, and Potentials Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Crosstalk between > 100 dB

outputs
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
Isolation reference to the output range)
 Between channels and Yes  Voltage outputs ±0.12%
backplane bus
 Current outputs ±0.18%
 Between channels and Yes
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
 Between the channels Yes  Voltage outputs ±0.02%
 Between channels and load Yes  Current outputs ±0.02%
voltage L+
Temperature error (with ±0.001%
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
 Between the outputs (ECM) 200 VDC / 120 VAC Linearity error (with reference to ±0.004%
the output range)
 Between MANA and 200 VDC / 120 VAC
Minternal (UISO) Repeat accuracy (in the steady ±0.002 %
state at 25° C, referred to the
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
output range)
Current consumption Output ripple; band width 0 to ±0.05 %
 From the backplane bus max. 60 mA 50 kHz (with reference to the
output range)
 From the load voltage L+ max. 240 mA
(no load) Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W Interrupts

 Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable

Diagnostic functions Programmable

 Group error display Red LED (SF)

 Diagnostic information Possible

readable

Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-168 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
 Voltage ±10 V  Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V 75 VDC for no more than
0.1 s
 Current ±20 mA (pulse duty factor 1 : 20)
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA  Current max. 50 mA DC

Load resistance (in the nominal Connection of actuators

range of the output)  For voltage output
 For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ – Four-conductor Possible
– Capacitive load max. 1 µF connection (measuring
circuit)
 For current outputs max. 500 Ω
 For current output
– Inductive load max. 1 mH
– Two-conductor Possible
Voltage outputs connection
 Short-circuit protection Yes
 Short-circuit current max. 40 mA

Current outputs
 No-load voltage max. 18 V

4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-47.

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits is
assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4
16
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-169
Analog Modules

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-79.

4.26.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4
16 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the ”output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the ”output type” parameter to ”disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-80 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
16 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
 20 mA

Default settings
The default settings of the module are ”Voltage” for the output type and ” 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits in STEP 7.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4
16 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-170 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.27 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits;

(6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 4 outputs in 4 channel groups
 The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
 Resolution 12 bits
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable substitute value output
 Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-171
Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 4
12 bits

Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs

L+
SF Internal 24V
DAC
supply
QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0 CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1 CH1
MANA MANA

QI2 QV2
Backplane bus
SF S2 +
interface CH2 S2 CH2
MANA MANA
QI3 QV3
S3 +
CH3 S3 CH3
MANA MANA

M M

Figure 4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-172 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
  10 V;  20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module  0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 4  For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable  For capacitive load 3.3 ms
 Shielded max. 200 m  For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error

 Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus  Voltage outputs  0.5 %
 Between channels and Yes  Current outputs  0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
 Between the channels No  Voltage outputs  0.4 %
 Between channels and load Yes  Current outputs  0.5 %
voltage L+
Temperature error (with  0.002 %/K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
 Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to  0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at  0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz  0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
 From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
Interrupts
 From the load voltage L+ max. 240 mA
(no load)  Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W
Diagnostic functions Programmable
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
 Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-173
Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
 Voltage ±10 V  Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
 Current ±20 mA  Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA Connection of actuators

Load resistance (in the nominal  For voltage output

range of the output) – Four-conductor Possible
 For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection (measuring
circuit)
– Capacitive load max. 1 µF
 For current output
 For current outputs max. 500 Ω
– Two-conductor Possible
– At UCM< 1V max. 600  connection
– Inductive load max. 10 mH

Voltage outputs
 Short-circuit protection Yes
 Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
 No-load voltage max. 18 V

4.27.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits

Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-47.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-174 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits
is assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4
12
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ”group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-79.

4.27.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4
12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the ”output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the ”output type” parameter to ”disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-175
Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-81 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
 20 mA

Default settings
The default settings of the module are ”Voltage” for the output type and ” 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-break check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4
12 bits carries out a short-circuit test
only for voltage outputs.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4
12 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges

1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA
The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to
20 mA:
You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to become de-energized
(refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-29 and 4-30).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-176 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.28 Analog Input/Output ModuleSM 332; AO 2
12 bits;

(6ES7 332-5HBx1-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0

Order number: ”SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
 2 output in 2 channels groups
 The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
 Resolution 12 bits
 Programmable diagnostics
 Programmable diagnostic interrupt
 Programmable substitute value output
 Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-177
Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits

Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs

L+
SF Internal 24V
DAC
supply QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0 CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1 CH1
MANA MANA

Backplane bus
SF
interface

M
M

Figure 4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-178 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
  10 V;  20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module  0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 2  For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable  For capacitive load 3.3 ms
 Shielded max. 200 m  For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error

 Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
 Between channels and Yes
backplane bus  Voltage outputs  0.5 %
 Between channels and Yes  Current outputs  0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
 Between the channels No  Voltage outputs  0.4 %
 Between channels and load Yes  Current outputs  0.5 %
voltage L+
Temperature error (with  0.002 %/K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
 Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to  0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at  0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz  0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
 From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
Interrupts
 From the load voltage L+ max. 135 mA
(no load)  Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W
Diagnostic functions Programmable
 Group error display Red LED (SF)
 Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-179
Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
 Voltage ±10 V  Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
 Current ±20 mA  Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA Connection of actuators

Load resistance (in the nominal  For voltage output

range of the output) – Two-conductor Possible
 For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection

– Capacitive load max. 1 µF – Four-conductor Possible

connection
 For current outputs max. 500 Ω (measuring circuit)
– At UCM< 1V max. 600   For current output
– Inductive load max. 10 mH – Two-conductor Possible
Voltage outputs connection

 Short-circuit protection Yes

 Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
 No-load voltage max. 18 V

4.28.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits

Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-47.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-180 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits
is assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332;
AO 2
12 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values can arise across the
output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-79.

4.28.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 2
12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the ”output type” parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the ”output type” parameter to ”disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-181
Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 4-82 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in
 10 V Section 4.3.2 in the voltage
and current output ranges
Current 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
 20 mA

Default settings
The default settings of the module are ”Voltage” for the output type and ” 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-break check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2
12 bits carries out a short-circuit check
only for voltage outputs.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 2
12 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges

1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA
The following special characteristic applies to output ranges
1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA:
You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to remain de-energized
(refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-29 and 4-30).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-182 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.29 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;

AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits; (6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0

Characteristics
The analog input/output module SM 334: AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits has the following
characteristic features:
 Four inputs, two outputs
 Resolution 8 bits
 Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of
wiring
 Measuring range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
 Output range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
 Both voltage and current output options
 Non-isolated against the backplane bus interface
 Isolated from load voltage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-183
Analog Modules

Module view and block diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits
Select the measuring method of the input channels and the output type of the
output channels via the wiring.

L+
24V
Internal MV0 +
supply V

Current measurement
M0 CH0
MI0 +
A
MV1 +
ADC V
M1 CH1
MI1 +

Voltage
A
MV2 +
V
M2 CH2
A MI2 +

MV3 +
V
Backplane bus M3
interface MI3 + CH3
A
QV0
DAC V

Current outputs
MANA CH0
MANA A QI0
QV1

Voltage
V MANA
CH1
MANA A QI1
M
M

Figure 4-52 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-184 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits

Dimensions and Weight  Basic conversion time 100

including Integration time in
Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 milliseconds
(in millimeters)
 Resolution including sign 8 bits
Weight Approx. 285 g
Time constant of the input max. 0.8 ms
Data for Specific Module filter
Supports clocked No Basic execution time of the max. 5 ms
operation module (all channels enabled)
Number of inputs 4 Analog Value Generation for the Outputs
Number of outputs 2 Resolution including sign 8 bits
Length of cable Conversion time (per channel) max. 500
s
 Shielded max. 200 m
Settling time
Voltages, Currents, Potentials  For resistive load 0.3 ms
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC  For capacitive load 3.0 ms
Power rated voltage of the rated 24 VDC  For inductive load 0.3 ms
electronics voltage and rated
Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error for the
load voltage L+
Inputs
Isolation
Noise suppression for f = n
(f1  1 %)
 Between channels and No (f1 = interference frequency)
backplane bus
 Common-mode > 60 dB
 Between channels and Yes interference
power supply of the (Upp < 1 V)
electronics
Crosstalk between the outputs > 50 dB
Between the channels No
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
Permitted potential difference reference to the input range)

 Between inputs and MANA 1 VDC  Voltage input  0.9 %

(UCM)  Current input  0.8 %
 Between the inputs (ECM) 1 VDC Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to input
Insulation tested with 500 VDC range)

Current consumption  Voltage input  0.7 %

 Current input  0.6 %
 From the backplane bus max. 55 mA
Temperature error (with  0.005 %/K
 From power supply and max. 110 mA reference to the input range)
load voltage L+ (no load)
Linearity error (with reference to  0.05 %
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W the input range)
Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Repeatability (in steady state at  0.05 %
Measuring principle Instantaneous value 25 C referred to input range)
conversion Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz  0.05 %
Integration/conversion time (per (referred to output range)
channel)
 Parameters can be No
assigned
 Integration time in 500
milliseconds

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-185
Analog Modules

Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Data for Selecting an Actuator

Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB Output ranges (rated values)
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with  Voltage 0 to 10 V
reference to the output range)  Current 0 to 20 mA
 Voltage outputs 0.6 % Impedance (in the nominal
 Current outputs 1.0 % output range)

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to the  For voltage outputs min. 5 k
output range) – Capacitive load max. 1
F
 Voltage outputs 0.5 %  For current outputs max. 300 
 Current outputs 0.5 % – Inductive load max. 1 m

Temperature error (with refe- 0.02 %/K Voltage outputs

rence to the output range)  Short-circuit protection Yes
Linearity error (with reference to  0.05 %  Short-circuit current max. 11 mA
the output range) Current outputs
Repeat accuracy (in the steady  0.05 %  No-load voltage max. 15 V
state at 25 C referred to the
output range) Destruction limit against
voltages/currents applied from
Output ripple (bandwidth  0.05 % outside
referred to the output range)
 Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous;
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics  Current max. 50 mA DC
Interrupts None
Connection of actuators
Diagnostic functions None  For voltage output
Data for Selecting a Sensor Two-conductor connection Possible
Four-conductor connection Not possible
Input range (rated values)/Input
(measuring circuit)
resistance
 Voltage 0 to 10 V/100 k 
Connection of the sensor
 Current 0 to 20 mA/50 
 For measuring current
Two-conductor connection Possible
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Maximum input current for 40 mA
current input (destruction limit)

Connection of the sensor

 For measuring voltage Possible
 For measuring current
As two-wire transmitter Not possible
As four-wire transmitter Possible

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-186 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.29.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits

The analog/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits is a non-isolated module.

You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits.

Important information on connecting the module

Note
Note when connecting the SM 334 that:
 the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the
chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire
with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.
If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches
off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run
without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed.
 the supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not
be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the
destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high
potential (+24 V).

Addressing
The inputs and outputs of the module are addressed as of the initial module
address.
The address of a channel is obtained from the module start address and an
address offset.

Input addresses
The following addresses apply to the inputs:

Chan- Address
nel
0 Initial module address
1 Module start address + 2 bytes address offset
2 Module start address + 4 bytes address offset
3 Module start address + 6 bytes address offset

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-187
Analog Modules

Output addresses
The following channel addresses apply to the module outputs:

Chan- Address
nel
0 Initial module address
1 Module start address + 2 bytes address offset

4.29.2 Measuring/Output Method and Measuring/Output Range of the

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits

You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits.

Selecting the measurement method and the type of output

Select the measuring method of an input channel (voltage, current) by wiring the
input channel appropriately.
Select the type of output of an output channel (voltage, current) by wiring the
output channel appropriately.

Unused channels
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to
MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum noise immunity for the analog module.
Unused output channels must be left open.

Measuring ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits has the measuring ranges
0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA.
Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution and no
negative measuring ranges. Take this into account when you read measured value
tables 4-10 and 4-14 on pages 4-14 and 4-16.

Output ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8 bits has the output ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA.
Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution the analog
outputs do not have underranges. Take this into account when you read tables
4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-29 and 4-30.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-188 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2
12 bits; (6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0

Characteristics
The SM 334 has the following characteristic features:
 Four inputs in two groups
 2 outputs (voltage outputs)
 Resolution of 12 bits + sign
 Measuring method selectable
– Voltage
– Resistors
– Temperature
 Isolated against the backplane bus interface
 Isolated from load voltage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-189
Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

Voltage input Resistance

test

L+ 24V
Current IC01+ CH0
source
M0 +
Internal M0
supply
Multiplexer M1 + CH1
M1
IC01
MANA
IC23+
Backplane bus

M2+ CH2
interface

M2 +

U
M2 M2
M3 +
M3 + CH3
U M3 M3
MANA IC23
DAC QV0
V MANA CH0
MANA
QV1
V MANA CH1
MANA
M
M

Voltage
outputs

Figure 4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-190 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation for the Inputs

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
117 Measuring principle Integrating
(in millimeters)
Integration/conversion time (per
Weight Approx. 200 g channel)
Data for Specific Module  Parameters can be Yes
assigned
Supports clocked No
operation  Integration time in 162/3 20
milliseconds
Number of inputs 4
 For resistance-type sensor 4
 Basic conversion time 72 85
including Integration time in
Number of outputs 2 milliseconds
Shielded line length max. 100 m  Additional conversion time 72 85
for measuring resistance, in
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
ms
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC
 Resolution in bits (incl.) 12 bits 12 bits
 Reverse polarity protection Yes overrange)
Supply voltage of the rated 24 VDC  Suppression of interference 60 50
electronics voltage and rated voltage for interference
load voltage L+ frequency f1 in Hertz
Power supply of the Smoothing of the measured Programmable,
transmitters values in 2 stages
 Short-circuit-proof Yes Time constant of the input 0.9 ms
filter
Constant measured current for
resistance-type sensor Basic response time of module 350 ms
(all channels enabled)
 For PT 100 typ. 490
A
Analog Value Generation for the Outputs
 At 10 k at 105
A
Resolution (incl. Overrange 12 bits
Isolation
 Between channels and Yes Conversion time (per channel) 500
s
backplane bus Settling time
 Between channels and Yes  For resistive load max. 0.8 ms
power supply of the
electronics
 For capacitive load max. 0.8 ms

Between the channels No

Permitted potential difference
 Between inputs and MANA 1V
(UCM)
 Between the inputs (ECM) 1V
 Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Minternal-(UISO)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
 From power supply and max. 80 mA
load voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 2 W

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-191
Analog Modules

Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error for the Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Inputs
Interrupts None
Noise suppression for f = n
(f1  1 %)
Diagnostic functions None
(f1 = interference frequency)
Data for Selecting a Sensor
 Common-mode > 38 dB
interference Input range (rated values)/Input
(Upp < 1 V) resistance
 Series-mode interference > 36 dB  Voltage 0 to 10 V 100 k 
(peak value of interference
< rated value of input
 Resistors 10 k 10 m
range)  Temperature PT 100 10 m
Crosstalk between the inputs > 88 dB Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
(duty factor 1:20)
reference to the input range)
Connection of the sensor
 Voltage input 0 to 10 V 0.7 %
 Resistor input 10 k  3.5 %
 For measuring voltage Possible

 Temperature input Pt 100 1%

 For measuring resistance
With two-conductor Possible
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input
connection
range)
With three-conductor Possible
 Voltage input 0 to 10 V 0.5 % connection
 Resistor input 10 k  2.8 % With four-conductor Possible
 Temperature input Pt 100 0.8 % connection

Temperature error (with 0.01 %/K Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

reference to the input range) assigned

Linearity error (with reference to 0.05 %  For RTD PT 100 (climate range)
the input range) User data in engineering Degrees Celsius
Repeat accuracy (in the steady  0.05 % format
state at 25 C, referred to the Data for Selecting an Actuator
input range)
Output range (rated value)
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the
Outputs  Voltage 0 to 10 V

Crosstalk between the outputs > 88 dB Impedance (in the nominal output range)

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with  For voltage outputs min. 2.5 k
reference to the output range) – Capacitive load max. 1.0
F
 Voltage outputs 1.0 % Voltage outputs
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output  Short-circuit protection Yes
range)
 Short-circuit current max. 10 mA
 Voltage outputs 0.85 %
Destruction limit for voltages/
Temperature error (with 0.01 %/K currents connected from
reference to the output range) outside
Linearity error (with reference to  0.01 %  Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous;
the output range)
Connection of actuators
Repeat accuracy (in the steady  0.01 %
state at 25C, referred to the  For voltage output
output range) Two-Conductor Connection Possible
Output ripple; band width 0 to  0.1 % Four-conductor connection Not possible
50 kHz (with reference to the (measuring circuit)
output range)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-192 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

Note
Below the rated load voltage range, incorrect intermediate values occur at the
output when the rated load voltage supply (L+) is switched on/off.

STEP 7 V 4.0 tool for parameter assignment

The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits is contained in the module catalog in STEP 7 V
4.0 or higher.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-43, on page 4-48.

4.30.2 Measuring/Output Method and Measuring/Output Range of the

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

Connecting the inputs and outputs

You can connect the inputs as voltage, resistance or temperature measurement
inputs, or deactivate them.
You can connect the outputs as voltage, or disable them.
Perform connection of the inputs and outputs with the parameters ”measuring
method” and ”output method” in STEP 7.

Connection options for the input channels

You can connect the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits in the following combinations:

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-193
Analog Modules

Channel Wiring Versions

Channels 0  2 x temperature or
and 1  2 x resistance
Channels 2  2 x voltage,
and 3  2 x resistance,
 2 x temperature,
 1 x temperature and 1 x voltage, or
 1 x resistance and 1 x voltage

Note
Simultaneous connection of a temperature sensor and a resistor to channels 0 and
1 and 2 and 3 is not allowed.
The reason common current source for both channels.

Unused channels
Set the ”measuring method” parameter for unused input channels to ”disabled”. In
this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to
MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog
input module.
So that unused output channels of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the ”output type” parameter to ”disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

Measuring ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the measuring ranges.

Table 4-83 Measuring ranges of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

Method Selected Measuring Range Description

U: Voltage 0 to 10 V You will find the digital
analog values in
R-4L: Resistance (four-conductor 10 k
Section 4.3.1
connection)
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate
(linear, four-conductor connection)
(temperature measurement)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-194 A5E00105505-02
 Analog Modules

Default settings of inputs

The default settings of the module are the ”Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor
connection)” measuring method and the ”Pt 100 climate” measuring range. You
can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
parameterizing the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12 bits in STEP 7.

Output ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the output ranges.

Table 4-84 Output Ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2
12 bits

Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 0 to 10 V You will find the digital
analog values in Section
4.3.2 in the voltage output
range

Default settings of outputs

The default settings of the module are ”Voltage” for the output type and ”0 to 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of measuring method and
measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI4/AO 2
2 bits in STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 4-195
Analog Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

4-196 A5E00105505-02
Other Signal Modules 5
Changes and improvements since the previous version of the reference manual
A new overview section will make it easier for you to access the information:
 The “Module Overview”section shows you the modules that are available,
together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find
the module suitable for your task.

In this Chapter

Section Contents Page

5.1 Module Overview 5-2
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; 5-3
(6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0)
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0) 5-5
5.4 Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; 5-7
(6ES7 338-4BC01-0AB0)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-1
Other Signal Modules

5.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the signal
modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to
choose the suitable module for your task.

Table 5-1 Other Signal Modules Characteristics at a Glance

Module Simulator Module Dummy Module DM 370 Position Detection

SM 374; IN/OUT 16 Module
SM 338; POS-INPUT
Characteristics
Number of  Up to 16 inputs or Reserves one slot for one  3 inputs for connection
inputs/outputs outputs non-programmed module of encoders absolute
(SSI)
 2 digital inputs for
freezing encoder
values
Suitable for... Simulation of: Dummy for: Position detection with up
 16 inputs or  Interface Modules to 3 encoders absolute
(SSI)
 16 outputs or  Non-programmed
Encoder types: Encoder
 8 input and 8 outputs signal modules
absolute (SSI) with 13 bit,
 Modules occupying 21 bit or 25 bit message
two slots
frame length
Data formats: Gray code
or binary code
Programmable No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No Adjustable
Interrupt
Special Features The function can be set When replacing the Encoders absolute with a
using screwdriver DM 370 with anther monoflop time of more
module, the mechanical than 64
s must not be
configuration and the used on the SM 338
address assignment of the
overall configuration
remain unchanged

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-2 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;

(6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0

Characteristics
The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 has the following salient features:
 Simulation of:
– 16 inputs or
– 16 outputs or
– 8 inputs and 8 outputs (with the same start addresses each!)
 Status displays for simulation of inputs and outputs
 The function can be set using screwdriver

Note
Do not actuate the switch for setting the mode when the CPU is in the RUN mode!

Configuration with STEP 7

Simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is not included in the module catalog of
STEP 7. In other words, the Order Number of SM 374 is not detected by STEP 7.
You must therefore ”simulate” the desired function of the simulator module for
configuration in the following manner:
 If you want to use the SM 374 with 16 inputs, enter the Order Number of a
digital input module with 16 inputs in STEP 7;
Example: 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0
 If you want to use the SM 374 with 16 outputs, enter the Order Number of a
digital input module with 16 outputs in STEP 7;
Example: 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0
 If you want to use SM 374 with 8 inputs and 8 outputs, enter the Order
Number of a digital input/output module with 8 inputs and 8 outputs in STEP 7;
Example: 6ES7 323-1BH00-0AA0

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-3
Other Signal Modules

Module view (without front door)

Switch for input

status

Switch for setting the

function

Channel number

Status display – green

Figure 5-1 Module View of Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16

Technical specifications of the SM 374; IN/OUT 16

Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
110 Current consumption from the max. 80 mA
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 190 g Power dissipation of the module typ. 0.35 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Simulation either of 16 inputs Status display Yes, green LED per
16 outputs channel
8 input and outputs
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions No

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-4 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0

Characteristics
Dummy module DM 370 reserves a slot for an unprogrammed module. It can be a
dummy for:
 Interface modules (without reserving address space)
 Unprogrammed signal modules (with reservation address area)
 Modules occupying 2 slots (with reservation of address area)
When replacing the dummy module with another module from the S7-300, the
mechanical configuration and the address assignment remain unchanged.

Configuration with STEP 7

Use STEP 7 to configure the dummy module only if you are using the module to
reserve the slot for a parameterized signal module. If the module is reserving the
slot for an interface module, there is no need to configure with STEP 7.

Modules occupying two slots

For modules that occupy two slots, you must plug in two dummy modules. In doing
so, you reserve the address area only with the dummy module at slot ”x” (not with
the dummy module at ”x + 1”; for the steps you need to perform refer to Table 5-2).
Not more than 8 modules must be inserted in a mounting rack (SM/FM/CP). If, for
example, you reserve one slot for an 80 mm module with two dummy modules,
you may only insert seven more modules (SM/FM/CP) since the dummy module
only occupies the address area for one module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-5
Other Signal Modules

Module view

NA
A

Switch for
address
assignment

Front View Rear view

Figure 5-2 Module View of Dummy Module DM 370

Switch settings for address assignment

The table below shows how you have to set the switch on the back of the module
to match the module type.

Table 5-2 Meaning of the Switch Positions of the Dummy Module DM 370

Switch Position Meaning Use in an ET 200M configuration with

active bus modules
(Insert and Remove)
Dummy module reserves the slot No
NA for an interface module (NA = No
Address, that is no address
A space reserved)

Dummy module reserves the slot Dummy module reserves the slot for a
NA for a signal module (A = Address, signal module. If you use the dummy
that is address space reserved) module for an “empty slot”, you must
A
configure the “empty slot” with 0 bytes
input/output addresses.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-6 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

Technical specifications of the DM 370

Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
120 Current consumption from the Approx. 5 mA
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 180 g Power loss typ. 0.03 W

5.4 Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;

(6ES7 338-4BC01-0AB0)

Order Number
6ES7 338-4BC01-0AB0

Characteristics
Position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT features the following
characteristics:
 3 inputs for the connection of up to three encoders absolute (SSI) and 2 digital
inputs for freezing encoder values
 Direct reaction to encoder values in moving systems possible
 Processing of the encoder values acquired by the SM 338 in the user program
 Isochrone mode
 You can select the following types of encoder value detection (Section 5.4.4):
– Free-running
– Isochrone
 24 VDC rated input voltage
 Isolated from CPU

Supported encoder types

The following encoder types are supported by the SM 338; POS-INPUT :
 The encoder absolute (SSI) with 13 bit message frame length
 The encoder absolute (SSI) with 21 bit message frame length
 The encoder absolute (SSI) with 25 bit message frame length

Supported data formats

The SM 338; POS-INPUT supports the gray code and binary code data formats.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-7
Other Signal Modules

5.4.1 Isochrone Mode

Note
The principles of isochrone mode are described in a separate manual.

Hardware
You will require the following for isochrone mode of the SM 338:
 A CPU that supports isochrone mode
 A DP master that supports the equidistant bus cycle
 Slave interface module (IM 153-x) that supports isochrone mode

Features
Depending on the system parameter assignment, the SM 338 works in either
non-isochrone or isochrone mode.
In isochrone mode, the transmission of data between the DP master and SM 338
is isochrone to the PROFIBUS DP cycle.
In isochrone mode the 16 bytes of the feedback interface are consistent.
If clocking is lost due to faults or failure or a delay in global control (GC), the
SM 338 will return to isochrone mode at the next cycle without an error response.
If clocking is lost, the feedback interface is not updated.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-8 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.4.2 Terminal connection diagram and block diagram

Connection to
Fault indicator - red the ground of
the CPU
Voltage moni- Short-circuit 1 L+ 24V
SF toring protection
2 M
3 OD (data)

S7–300 backplane bus

4 OD (data)
RS 422 OC (clock)
5 SSI
6 OC (clock)
7 1D (data)
8 1D (data)
9 1C (clock)
SSI
Logic
circuitry 10 1C (clock)
11 2D (data)
12 2D (data)
13 2C (clock)
SSI
14 2C (clock)
15 DI 0 (digital
DI 0 16 DI 1 inputs)
DI 1 17 24 VDC (enc.)
18 24 VDC (enc.)
19 M (encoder)
20 M (encoder)

Twisted-pair lines

Figure 5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Wiring Rules
Be sure to observe the following important rules when wiring the module:
 The ground of the encoder supply is non-isolated to the ground of the CPU.
Therefore connect pin 2 of the SM 338 (M) to the ground of the CPU with low
impedance.
 The encoder lines (pins 3 to 14) must be shielded, twisted-pair cables. Support
the shield on either side.
To support the shield on the SM 338, use the shield supporting element (Order
number: 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0).
 If you exceed the maximum output current (900 mA) of the encoder supply, you
must connect an external power supply.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-9
Other Signal Modules

5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

5.4.4 Encoder Value Detection

The absolute encoder transfers its encoder values in message frames to the
SM 338. The transmission of message frames is initiated by the SM 338.
 in non-isochrone mode the encoder value detection will run freely.
 in isochrone mode the encoder value detection will occur synchronously to the
PROFIBUS DP cycle at the time Ti.

Free-Running Encoder Value Detection

The SM 338 initiates the transmission of a message frame each time the
parameterized monoflop time elapses.
The SM 338 processes the detected encoder value asynchronously to these
free-running message frames in the cycle of the update rate (see the technical
specifications).
Because of this, some old encoder values result with the free-running detection of
encoder values. The difference between the maximum and minimum age is the
jitter (see the Technical Specifications).

Isochrone Encoder Value Detection

Isochrone encoder value detection is carried out automatically when the
equidistant bus cycle is activated in the DP master system and the DP slave is
synchronized to the DP cycle.
The SM 338 initiates the transmission of a message frame in each PROFIBUS DP
cycle at the time Ti.
The SM 338 processes the transmitted encoder value at a clocked rate to the
PROFIBUS DP cycle.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-10 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.4.5 Gray / Binary Converter

When gray is set, the encoder value supplied by the absolute encoder in gray code
is converted to binary code. When binary is set, the encoder value that is delivered
is not converted.

Note
If you selected the setting Gray, the SM 338 always converts the total encoder
value (13, 21, 25 bits). Preceding special bits thus influence the encoder value and
trailing bits can under some circumstances be corrupted.

5.4.6 Transmitted Encoder Value and Normalizing

The transmitted encoder value contains the encoder position of the absolute value
encoder. Depending on the encoder that is used, other bits that are located before
and after the encoder position are transmitted in addition to the encoder position.
So that the SM 338 can determine the encoder position, specify the following:
 Normalizing, Positions (0..12),
 Normalizing, Steps / revolution

Normalizing, Positions
With normalization, you specify the representation of the encoder value in the
feedback interface.
 With “Positions” = 1, 2....12, you specify that trailing, irrelevant bits in the
encoder value are to be discounted and the encoder is right-justified in the
address area (see the following example).
 With “Positions” = 0, you specify that trailing bits are retained and are available
for evaluation.
This can make sense if you use an absolute encoder, which transmits
information in the bits located behind (see manufacturer specifications) and if
you intend to evaluate this information (note chapter 5.4.5).

Steps/revolution parameter
A maximum of 13 bits are available for the steps / revolution. In accordance to the
specification “Positions”, the resulting number of steps / revolution will be
displayed.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-11
Other Signal Modules

Example of encoder value normalizing

You use a single turn encoder with 29 steps = 512 steps / revolution
(resolution/360°).
You have parameterized the following in STEP 7:
 Encoder absolute: 13-bit
 Normalizing: 4 places
 Steps / revolution: 512

Prior to normalizing: periodically acquired encoder value 100

31 Data double word
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X
Relevant bits 0

Transmitted bits

After normalizing: encoder value 100

31 Data double word 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Relevant bits

Result: Bits 0 to 3 (4 places, identified by “x”) have been excluded.

5.4.7 Enable FREEZE function

With the FREEZE function, you “freeze” the current encoder values of the SM 338.
The FREEZE function is connected to digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 of the SM 338.
Freezing is triggered by transitional edges (rising pulse edge) across DI 0 or DI 1.
A frozen encoder value is identified by the set bit 31 (output address). With one
digital input you can freeze one, two or three encoder values.
You have to enable the FREEZE function – in other words parameterize
accordingly in STEP 7.
The encoder values are retained until the end of the FREEZE function and can
thus be evaluated as a function of the result.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-12 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

Terminating the FREEZE function

You have to terminate the FREEZE function for each encoder input. Acknowledge
the function in the user program by setting bit 0, 1 and 2 with the STEP 7 operation
T PAB “xyz” (for an example program refer to Section 5.4.9) according to the
channel.
After acknowledgment, bit 31 of the corresponding encoder value is deleted and
updated again. The encoder values can be frozen again.
The encoder values can be frozen again as soon as the acknowledgment bit in the
output address of the module has been deleted.
In isochrone mode, acknowledgment is done at To time. The encoder values can
be frozen again via the digital outputs as from this period.

Note
The freeze function is acknowledged automatically if you reassign different
parameters to the corresponding channel (see chapter5.4.8).
The freeze function remains unaffected if the parameters are identical.

5.4.8 Assigning Parameters to the SM 338; POS-INPUT

You assign parameters to the SM 338; POS-INPUT in STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the
CPU transfers the parameters to the SM 338.
It is not possible to reassign the parameters by means of the user program.

Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
for the SM 338 in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7 (the default appears in bold).

Table 5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Parameter Value Range Remark

Enable Enabling parameter.
 Diagnostic interrupt Yes / no Works for all 3 channels.
Encoder absolute (SSI) 1 None; 13-bit; 21-bit; 25-bit None: The encoder input is
switched off.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-13
Other Signal Modules

Table 5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Parameter Value Range Remark

Code type 1 Gray; Binary Code supplied by the encoder
Transmission rate 1,3 125 kHz; 250 kHz; 500 kHz; 1 MHz Data transfer rate of the SSI
position detection. Note the
connection between the cable
lengths and the baud rate (see
Technical specifications)
Monoflop time 1,2,3 16
s; 32
s; 48
s; 64 ms The monoflop time is the interval
between two SSI message
frames.
The programmed monoflop time
must be greater than the
monoflop time of the encoder
absolute.
Normalizing 1 On account of normalizing, the
 Positions 0 to 12 encoder is right-justified in the
address area; irrelevant places
 Steps / revolution 4 2 to 8192
are discarded.
Enable Freeze Off; 0; 1 Specification of the digital input,
whose positive edge causes the
encoder value to freeze.
1 See the technical specifications of the absolute encoder.
2 The monoflop time is the time between 2 SSI frames. The parameterized monoflop time must be
greater than the monoflop time of the absolute encoder (refer to the technical specifications of the ma-
nufacturer). The time 2 × (1 / transmission rate) is added to the value parameterized in HWCONFIG.
At a transmission rate of 125 kHz and a parameterized monoflop time of 16
s, a monoflop time of
32
s is in fact effective.
3 The following limitation applies to the monoflop time of the absolute encoder:
(1 / transmission rate) < monoflop time of the absolute encoder < 64
s + 2 × (1 / transmission rate)
4 To the power of 2

Note
Note that the transmission rate and the monoflop time affect the accuracy and
topicality of the encoder values in non isochrone mode.
In isochrone mode the transmission rate and the monoflop time affect the
accuracy of the FREEZE function (refer to the technical specifications of the
encoder manufacturer).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-14 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.4.9 Addressing SM 338; POS-INPUT

Data areas for the encoder values

The inputs and outputs of the SM 338 are addressed as of the initial module
address. You determine the input and output addresses during configuration of the
SM 338 in STEP 7.

Input addresses

Table 5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses

Encoder Input Input Address (from Configuration) + Address Offset

0 “Initial module address”
1 “Initial module address” + 4 bytes address offset
2 “Initial module address” + 8 bytes address offset

Structure of the data double word

The data double word is structured as follows at each encoder input:

31 0

Encoder value in gray code or binary code

FREEZE
0 = encoder value is not frozen. The value is continuously updated.
1 = encoder value is frozen. The value remains the same until
acknowledgment.

Output address

7 0
Initial module address

Acknowledgement of the FREEZE function:

Bit 0 = encoder input 0
Bit 1 = encoder input 1
Bit 2 = encoder input 2

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-15
Other Signal Modules

Reading out data areas

You can read out the data area in your user program with the STEP 7 operation
L PED “xyz”.

Example of access to encoder values and use of the FREEZE function

You want to read out and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs.
The initial module address is 256.

STL Explanation
L PED 256 // The encoder value in the address area for
encoder input 0 is read.
T MD 100 // The encoder value is stored in the memory
double word.
U M 100.7 // Determine and store FREEZE status for
= M 99.0 // acknowledgement later

L PED 260 // The encoder value in the address area for

encoder input 1 is read.
T MD 104 // The encoder value is stored in the memory
double word.
U M 104.7 // Determine and store FREEZE status for
= M 99.1 // acknowledgement later

L PED 264 // The encoder value in the address area for

encoder input 2 is read.
T MD 108 // The encoder value is stored in the memory
double word.
U M 108.7 // Determine and store FREEZE status for
= M 99.2 // acknowledgement later

L MB 99 // Load the FREEZE status and

T PAB 256 // acknowledge (SM 338: output address 256)

Afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the bit memory
address area MD 100, MD 104 and MD 108. The encoder value is in bits 0 to 30 of
the memory double word.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-16 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.4.10 Diagnostics of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The SM 338 makes diagnostic messages available. In other words, all diagnostic
messages are provided by the SM 338 without your having to do anything.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
 The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the module and
forwarded to the CPU.
 The SF LED on the module lights.
 If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

The SM 338 indicates errors by means of its SF-LED (group error LED). The SF
LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the SM 338. It goes
out when all errors have been rectified.
The group fault SF LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).
The SF LED lights briefly during startup, during the SM 338 self-test.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-17
Other Signal Modules

Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 338;
POS-INPUT.

Table 5-5 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagno-

stics
Module problem SF Module
Internal malfunction SF Module
External malfunction SF Module
Channel error present SF Module
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module
Module not parameterized SF Module
Wrong parameters SF Module
Channel information available SF Module
Time monitoring triggered SF Module
Channel error present SF Channel (encoder
input)
Configuring/parameter assignment error SF Channel (encoder
input)
External channel error (encoder error) SF Channel (encoder
input)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-18 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

Causes of errors and troubleshooting

Table 5-6 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Troubleshooting

Diagnostics Mes- Possible Error Cause Remedy

sage
Module malfunction An error detected by the module has
occurred
Internal error The module has detected an error
within the programmable logic
controller
External error The module has detected an error
outside the programmable logic
controller
Channel error present Indicates that only certain channels
are faulty
External auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing

Module not The module requires the information Message queued after power-on until
parameterized as to whether it should work with parameter transmission by the COU
system default parameters or with has been completed; parameterize the
your parameters module, as required
Wrong parameters One parameter or the combination of Reassign module parameter
parameters is not plausible
Channel information Channel error present; the module can
present supply additional channel information
Watchdog tripped Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference
interference
Channel error present An error detected by the module has
occurred at the encoder input
Configuration/paramet Illegal parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter
erization error module
External channel error Wire break of encoder cable, encoder Check connected encoder
(encoder error) cable not connected or encoder
defective

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-19
Other Signal Modules

5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Introduction
This section describes the interrupt behavior of the SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
SM 338 can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.4.8).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting
all errors) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block OB 82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-20 A5E00105505-02
 Other Signal Modules

5.4.12 Technical specifications of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Dimensions and Weight Input delay 0 > 1: max. 300
s

Dimensions W x H x D 40
125
120 1 > 0: max. 300
s
(mm) Maximum repetition 1 kHz
Weight Approx. 235 g frequency

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Connection of a two-wire Possible

BERO type 2
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Shielded line length 600 m
 Range 20.4 to 28.8 V
 Reverse polarity No Unshielded line length 32 m
protection Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Isolation No, only from shield Interrupts
Permitted potential  Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
difference assigned
 Between input (M 1 VDC Status display for digital LED (green)
connection) and central inputs
grounding point of CPU Group error/fault LED (red)
Encoder supply Unsharpness of Encoder Value
 Output voltage L+ –0,8V
Free-running encoder value detection
 Output current max. 900 mA short
circuit-proof  Maximum Age1 (2
frame time) +
monoflop time + 580
s
Current consumption
 From the backplane max. 160 mA  Minimun Age1 Frame time + 130
s
bus  Jitter Frame time + monoflop
time + 450
s
 From the load voltage max. 10 mA
L+ (no load) Update rate Evaluation of the frame
every 450
s
Power dissipation of the typ. 3W
module Isochrone encoder value detection
Encoder Inputs POS-INPUT 0 to 2  Age Encoder value at time Ti in
the current PROFIBUS DP
Position detection Absolute cycle
Differential signals for SSI According to RS422 Unsharpness of freezed Encoder Value (FREEZE)
data and SSI clock
Data transmission rate and  125 kHz max. 320 m Free-running encoder value detection
line length with absolute
encoders (twisted and  250 kHz max. 160 m  Maximum Age1 (2
frame time) +
monoflop time + 580
s
shielded pair)  500 kHz max. 60 m
 1 MHz max. 20 m  Minimun Age1 Frame time + 130
s

Frame time of the 13-bit 21-bit 25-bit  Jitter Frame time + monoflop
time + 450
s
encoders
112
s 176
s 208
s
 125 kHz Update rate Evaluation of the frame
every 450
s
56
s 88
s 104
s
 250 kHz
28
s 44
s 52
s Isochrone encoder value detection
 500 kHz 14
s 22
s 26
s
 1 MHz 16
s, 32
s, 48
s, 64
s
 Jitter Max (Frame time n +
param. Monoflop time n)
Monoflop time 2
n = 0, 1, 2, (Channel)
Digital inputs DI 0, DI 1
1 Age of the encoder values determined by the method of
Isolation No, only from shield
transmission and the processing
Input voltage 0 signal: –3 V to 5 V 2 The following limitation applies to the monoflop
1 signal: 11 V to 30.2 V time of the absolute encoder: (1 / transmission
Input current 0 signal: 2 mA rate) < monoflop time of the absolute encoder
(closed-circuit current) < 64
s + 2 × (1 / transmission rate)
1 signal: 9 mA (typically)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 5-21
Other Signal Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

5-22 A5E00105505-02
Interface Modules 6
Interface modules
In this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features
of the interface modules for the S7-300.

Contents
The following interface modules are described in this chapter:

Section Contents Page

6.1 Module Overview 6-2
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0) 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0) 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0) 6-7

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 6-1
Interface Modules

6.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the interface
modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to
choose the suitable module for your task.

Table 6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module Interface Module IM 360 Interface Module IM 361 Interface Module IM 365

Characteristics
Suitable for  0  1 to 3  0 and 1
plugging into
S7-300 mounting
racks
Data transmission  From IM 360 to IM 361  From the IM 360 to the  From IM 365 to IM 365
over the connecting IM 361 or from the IM via connecting cable
cable 386 361 to the IM 361 via 386
connecting cable 386
Distance  Max. 10 m  Max. 10 m  1 m, permanently
between... connected

Special Features --- ---  Preassembled module

pair
 Install only signal
modules in rack 1
 IM 365 does not route
the communication
bus to subrack 1

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

6-2 A5E00105505-02
 Interface Modules

6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 360 has the following characteristic features:
 Interface for rack 0 of the S7-300
 Data transfer from IM 360 to IM 361 over the connecting cable 368
 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)

Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 360 has the following status and fault LEDs.

LED Meaning Explanation

SF Group error/fault The LED lights up if
 the connecting cable is missing.
 IM 361 is switched off.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 6-3
Interface Modules

Front view
Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the interface module IM 360.

X1 OUT
SF

Front view

Figure 6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 360.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W
H
D 40
125
120
(in millimeters)
Weight Approx. 250 g
Data for Specific Module
Length of cable
 Maximum length to 10 m
next IM
Current consumption
 From the backplane 350 mA
bus
Power loss typ. 2 W
Status and fault LEDs Yes

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

6-4 A5E00105505-02
 Interface Modules

6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 361 has the following characteristic features:
 24 VDC power supply
 Interface for racks 1 to 3 of the S7-300
 Current output via the S7-300 backplane bus max. 0.8 A
 Data transfer from the IM 360 to the IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361
via connecting cable 368
 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)
 Maximum distance between IM 361 and IM 361 is 10 m

Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 361 has the following status and fault LEDs.

LED Meaning Explanation

SF Group error/fault The LED lights up if
 the connecting cable is
missing
 the series-connected
IM 361 is switched off
 the CPU is in the
POWER OFF state
5 VDC 5 VDC supply for the S7-300 –
backplane bus

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 6-5
Interface Modules

Front view
Figure 6-2 shows the front view of the interface module IM 361.

X1 OUT
SF

5 VDC

M
L+
M

X2 IN

Figure 6-2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

6-6 A5E00105505-02
 Interface Modules

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 361.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W
H
D 80
125
120
(in millimeters)
Weight 505 g
Data for Specific Module
Length of cable
Maximum length to next IM 10 m
Current consumption
From 24 VDC 0.5 A
Power loss typ. 5 W
Current output
To backplane bus 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs Yes

6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 365 has the following characteristic features:
 Pre-assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1
 Total power supply of 1.2 A, of which up to 0.8 A can be used per rack.
 Connecting cable with a length of 1 m already permanently connected
 Install only signal modules in rack 1
 IM 365 does not forward the C bus to rack 1, i.e. you cannot plug FMs with a C
bus function in rack 1.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 6-7
Interface Modules

Front view
Figure 6-3 shows the front view of the interface module IM 365.

IM 365 IM 365
RECEIVE SEND

In rack 1 In rack 0

Figure 6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 365.

Dimensions and Weight Data for Specific Module

Dimensions 40
125
120 Length of cable
W
H
D per rack Maximum length to next IM 1m
(in millimeters)
Current consumption
Total weight 580 g
From the backplane bus 100 mA
Power loss typ. 0.5 W
Current output max. 1.2 A
Per rack 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs No

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

6-8 A5E00105505-02
RS 485 Repeater 7
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the RS 485-Repeater.
Included in the description are:
 The purpose of the RS 485 repeater
 The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters
 The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals
 Information about grounded and non-grounded operation
 Technical specifications and the block diagram

Further information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware
and Installation in the Chapter ”Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS-DP network”.

Diagnostic repeater
Compared to the RS 485 repeater, the diagnostic repeater has new characteristics:
Diagnostic function and modeling as the DP slave. For additional information, refer
to the Diagnostic Repeater for PROFIBUS-DP manual, order no.
6ES7 972-0AB00-8xA0.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

7.1 Application and Characteristics; 7-2
(6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)
7.2 Appearance of the RS-485 Repeater; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation 7-4
7.4 Technical Specification 7-7

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 7-1
RS 485 Repeater

7.1 Application and Characteristics;

(6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)

Order number
6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0

What is an RS 485 repeater?

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus
segments.

Application of the RS 485 repeater

You need an RS 485 repeater if:
 More than 32 nodes are connected to the bus
 Bus segments are to be operated non-grounded on the bus, or
 The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. (See table 7-1).

Table 7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment

Baud Rate Max. Cable Length of a Segment (in m)

9.6 to 187.5 kbd 1000
500 kbaud 400
1.5 Mbaud 200
3 to 12 Mbaud 100

Rules
If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters:
 Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.
 The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in
Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters

Baud Rate Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes (in m) with

RS 485 Repeater (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)
9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 10000
500 kbaud 4000
1.5 Mbaud 2000
3 to 12 Mbaud 1000

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

7-2 A5E00105505-02
 RS 485 Repeater

7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater;

(6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)
The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its
functions.

Table 7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater

Repeater Design No. Function

Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin ”M5.2” is
the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage
10
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2

difference between terminals ”A2” and ”B2”).
 Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable

of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2
 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1
 Terminating resistance for bus segment 1
ON  Switch for OFF operating mode

11 (= isolate bus segments from each other – for example, for

DP1
PG
OFF
startup
OP 12

DP2
 Terminating resistance for bus segment 2
ON
 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2
SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2  Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the
 standard rail
Interface for programming device/OP in bus segment 1

10 LED 24 V supply voltage
 11 LED for bus segment 1
12 LED for bus segment 2

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 7-3
RS 485 Repeater

7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded

Operation

Grounded or ungrounded
The RS 485 repeater is ...
 Grounded, if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded
potential
 Ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded
potential

Note
The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the
PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. Ground connection is effected since the
MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG/OP socket is connected
internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater.

Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals ”M” and
”PE” on the top of the RS 485 repeater.

Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, ”M” and ”PE” on the top of the
RS 485 repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage of the
RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

7-4 A5E00105505-02
 RS 485 Repeater

Terminal connection diagram

In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential
(ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are
discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to
Figure 7-1) to the protective conductor.

PE
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2

22 nF 10 MΩ

A1 B1 A1 B1

Ground bus

Figure 7-1 RC Network with 10 MΩ for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference

Potential

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 7-5
RS 485 Repeater

Isolation between bus segments

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. The
PG/OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1. Figure 7-2
shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.

24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2

Terminals for bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1

ON

PG/OP PG
DP1

interface OP
OFF

DP2

ON
Isolation SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2 Terminals for bus segment 2

Figure 7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments

Amplification of the bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment
1 or the PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

7-6 A5E00105505-02
 RS 485 Repeater

7.4 Technical Specifications

Technical specifications of the RS 485 repeater

Technical Specification
Power supply
 Rated voltage 24 VDC
 Ripple 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current consumption at rated voltage
 Without node at PG/OP socket 100 mA
 Node at PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) 130 mA
 Node at PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA

Isolation Yes, 500 VAC

Connection of fiber optic cables Yes, via repeater adapters
Redundancy operation No
Transmission rate (automatically detected by the repeater) 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, 45.45 kbaud,
93.75 kbaud, 187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud.
1.5 Mbaud. 3 Mbaud, 6 Mbaud, 12
Mbaud
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions W
H
D 45
128
67
Weight (incl. packaging) 350 g

Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)

View Pin No. Signal Name Designation

1 – –
2 M24V Ground 24 V
5 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9 4 RTS Request To Send
4
8 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
3
7 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
2
6 7 P24V 24 V
1
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 – –

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 7-7
RS 485 Repeater

Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

 Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other.
 Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are galvanically isolated from each
other.
 Signals are amplified
– between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2
– between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2

Segment 1 Segment 2
A1 A2
Logic
B1 B2
A1 A2
B1 B2

PG/OP- 5V 1M 5V 1M
socket
24V 24V
L+ (24 V) L+ (24 V)
M M
A1
B1 PE
5V M 5.2
M5 V

Figure 7-3 Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

7-8 A5E00105505-02
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP
connect TPA 8
Changes and improvements compared with the last edition of the
Reference Manual
The descriptions of SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA are
summarized in this chapter. In this way it was possible to extract and give
precedence to generally valid information.
A new overview section will make it easier for you to access the information.
The section entitled ”Module Overview” shows the basic configuration of SIMATIC
TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. In addition, you will also find out
which modules in the S7-300 family can be used with SIMATIC TOP connect/...
TPA.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

8.1 Module Overview 8-2
8.2 Wiring Components 8-4
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect with Digital Modules 8-12
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect TPA with Analog Modules 8-20

Structure of the chapter

Sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect
TPA.
Section 8.3 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect and thus
supplements the preceding sections.
Section 8.4 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect TPA and thus
supplements Sections 8.1 und 8.2.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-1
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.1 Module Overview

Introduction
”SIMATIC TOP connect” denotes components for wiring digital modules.
”SIMATIC TOP connect TPA” denotes components for wiring analog modules.

Wiring
Wiring with SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA is a fast and cost-effective alternative to
conventional wiring of the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector of
the module. When using these components, you wire actuators and sensors ”in
situ” on one more terminal blocks. You establish the connection to the module by
means of a connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable).

Configuration of SIMATIC TOP connect with a S7-300

A SIMATIC TOP connect and a SIMATIC TOP connect TPA always consist of:
 A front connector module with flat ribbon connection
,
 One or more terminal blocks  and
 One or more connecting cables with plug-and-socket connectors at ends 



Figure 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-2 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Advantages
Use of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA features the following advantages:
 Fast, low-cost wiring (the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary)
 Simple mounting of the components (front connector module, connecting cable,
terminal block)
 Each component can be replaced separately
 Connecting cable configurable without waste
 Wiring errors are drastically reduced
 Neat and tidy cabinet wiring
 The supply voltage for the module can be connected to components of
SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
 Simplification of the terminals for M- and L+ connection

Range of modules
The table below lists all the modules which you can wire with SIMATIC TOP
connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.
You will find a detailed list of the components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
with their order numbers in Table 8-5 on page 8-12 and Table 8-13 on page 8-20.

Table 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: Connectable Modules

Component Front view of terminal block Wiring possible with module...

SM 321; DI 32
DC 24 V
SIMATIC TOP SM 321; DI 16
DC 24 V
connect SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; source input
SM 322; DO 32
DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 322; DO 16
DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic
interrupt
SM 322; DO 8
DC 24 V/2 A
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8
DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2
12 bits
SIMATIC TOP SM 331; AI 8
12bits
connect TPA

SM 332; AO 4
12bits
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2
12 bits
A B C D E F G H I K
SM 332; AO 4
16bits
Y YK K A A A A Z Z

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
8/8bits
Y Z
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2
12bits
SM 335; AI 4/AO 4
14 bits;

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-3
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.2 Wiring Components

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner
or later.

Sequence of steps for wiring

Table 8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA

Step Procedure Refer to Section...

1. Cut connecting cable to length and terminate 8.2.1
2. Wire the front connector module 8.2.2 and 8.3 or 8.4
3. Connect the connecting cable to the terminal 8.2.3 and 8.3 or 8.4
block
4. Wire actuators/sensors to the terminal block 8.2.4

8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate

Maximum length of cable

The length of the connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable) between the
SIMATIC S7 and the terminal blocks must not be more than 30 m.

Using the connectors

You must attach connectors to either end of the round-sheath ribbon cable, for
connection to the front connector module and the terminal block.

Connect the round-sheath ribbon cable to connector

1. Cut the round-sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the
cable sheath at both ends.
You will find the length of the cable sheath that has to be removed in the
following table:

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-4 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

external internal external internal

Cable sheath to ribbon ribbon ribbon ribbon
be removed cable cable cable cable
Cable end to ...
20-pin 40-pin
front front 20-pin 40-pin
connec- connec- front connector front connector
tor tor
... top connector of front
connector module 1 x 16 core 110 mm 115 mm
shielded/uns
... bottom connector of
hielded
front connector module 70 mm 75 mm
... top connector of front
connector module 95 mm 115 mm
... bottom connector of 2 x 16 core 95 mm 115 mm
front connector module unshielded
40 mm 75 mm
... socket of terminal 40 mm 100 mm
block

2. Thread the cable into the 16-pin connector.

It is important that you note the position of the details marked in the following
figure.

Triangle
Marked Core
Nose

Figure 8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector

3. Clamp the end of the cable into the connector with the crimping tool.
4. Attach the strain relief device to the connector of the terminal block as follows:
– Fold back the cable over the connector
– Push the enclosed strain relief device over the cable
– Snap the strain relief device into place on the connector

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-5
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module

Introduction
This chapter describes the principle of wiring the front connector modules. Note
also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect
TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among
other things, selection criteria for the front connector modules and specific
connection examples.

Using the front connector module

You require the front connector module to connect the connecting cable to the
module. In addition, you can connect the supply voltage of the module to the front
connector module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-6 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage

The following table shows you what you have to consider when connecting the
module supply voltage to the terminal block or front connector module.
The terminals for the supply voltage are screws or spring-loaded terminals (refer to
Section 8.2.4 for handling spring-loaded terminals).

Table 8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage

Rules for ... Terminal block Front connector

Spring-loaded Screw-type Up to 4 Up to 8
connection connection Terminals Terminals
Conductor
cross-sections suitable
for connection:
Solid conductors No No No
Stranded conductors
 Without end ferrules 0.25 to1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.25 to
1.5 mm2 0.75 mm2
 With end ferrules 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.25 to
1.5 mm2 0.75 mm2
No of conductors per 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2 (sum) in a common
terminal end ferrule
Max. diameter of ∅ 3.1 mm ∅ 3.1 mm ∅ 2.0 mm
conductor insulation
Length of conductor
insulation to be stripped
 Without insulation 11 mm 6 mm
collar –
 With insulation collar 11 mm
End ferrules to
DIN 46228
 Without insulation Model A; up to 12 mm Model A; up to 12 mm Model A; 5 to 7 mm long
collar long long –
 With insulation collar
– 0.25 to 1.0 mm2 Model E; up to 12 mm Model E; up to 12 mm
long long
– 1.5 mm2 Model E; 12 mm long Model E; 18 mm long

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-7
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Connect the connecting cable and the supply voltage to the front connector
module
1. Open the front door of the module.
2. Bring the front connector into the wiring position.
3. If necessary, connect the cables for the incoming supply of the module supply
voltage.
4. Insert the connecting cable into the front connector module as shown in the
following figure:

Figure 8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module

5. Twist every connecting cable 90 downwards and turn through one whole turn
to the extent possible.

Additional steps for wiring for 32-channel digital modules

Note
When using 32-channel digital modules, you must observe the assignment of the
supply connections to the connecting cable terminals and the assignment of the
connecting cable terminals to the address bytes of the module (refer to Figure 8-4
and Table 8-4).

6. Thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector. This
strain relief assembly is used to fix the connecting cables in the narrow cable
stowage area of the module.
7. Thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-8 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

The following figure shows the front view of the front connector module for
32-channel digital modules.

Opening for the cable to be connected + Opening for the
_ screwdriver
+
_ Supply terminals for 

Supply terminals for


Supply terminals for 
+
_ Supply terminals for
+
_
Legend:




Openings for strain relief

to : Terminals for connecting cable; refer to Table 8-4 for the address assignment

Figure 8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

Assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital

modules

Table 8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel

Digital Modules

Refer to Address Assignment for

Figure 8-4:
Connecting Digital Input Digital Output Digital Input/Output
Cable Terminal Module Module Module

IB x QB x IB x
 IB (x+1) QB (x+1) IB (x+1)
 IB (x+2) QB (x+2) QB x
IB (x+3) QB (x+3) QB (x+1)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-9
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block

Introduction
A description of how to mount the terminal blocks is presented in the following.
Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP
connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find,
among other things, selection criteria for the different terminal blocks and specific
connection examples.

Mounting the terminal block and connecting cable

1. Attach the terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with
EN 50 022.
2. Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block as shown in the following
figure:

Figure 8-5 Insert the Connecting Cable into the Terminal Block

8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block

Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals

To mount the signal leads of the actuators/sensors to the terminal block and the
supply lines to the terminal block and front connector module, you can choose
between screw-type and spring-loaded components.
The principle of spring-loaded components is dealt with in greater detail in the
following, since it allows fast and simple connection of the signal lines and supply
cables.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-10 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Spring-loaded terminal block

Opening for the cable to

be connected

Opening for the

screwdriver for pressing
the spring-loaded contact

Figure 8-6 Spring-Loaded Terminal Block

Caution
! The spring-loaded contact will be damaged, if you insert the screwdriver into the
opening for the cable.
Make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the
terminal block.

Attaching the cable to the spring-loaded contact

Attach the cables to the spring-loaded contacts as follows:
1. Use a screwdriver
to press down the spring-loaded terminal in the
rectangular opening and to hold it down.
2. Insert the cable  into the round opening of the corresponding spring-loaded
terminal as far as it will go.
3. Remove the screwdriver  from the spring-loaded terminal. The cable is held
by the spring-loaded contact.




Figure 8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-11
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect with Digital Modules

Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect, you
must first select the components as a function of the module and method of
connection (screw type or spring-loaded terminal, one-conductor, three-conductor
or 2A connection; relay).

8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid

Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect.

Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number

Terminal ... for one-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AB0
block connection 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AA0
... for one-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 924-0AA00-1AB0
connection (10 items) 6ES7 924-0AA00-1AA0
... for three-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AB0
connection 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AA0
... for three-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 924-0CA00-1AB0
connection (10 items) 6ES7 924-0CA00-1AA0
... for 2A modules Spring-loaded 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AB0
screw-type 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AA0
... for 2A modules (10 items) Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 924-0BB00-1AB0
6ES7 924-0BB00-1AA0
... for relays Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 924-0CD00-0AB0
6ES7 924-0CD00-0AA0
Front for 32-channel modules Voltage supply via:
connector (refer to Figure 8-4) Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7 921 3AA20-0AA0
for 16-channel modules Voltage supply via:
spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 921-3AA00-0AA0
6ES7 921-3AB00-0AA0
for 16-channel 2A modules Voltage supply via:
spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7 921-3AC00-0AA0
6ES7 921-3AD00-0AA0
Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0
connectors)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-12 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect, continued

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number

Round-sheath Unshielded 30 m 6ES7 923-0CD00-0AA0
ribbon cable 60 m 6ES7 923-0CG00-0AA0
1x 16
Shielded 30 m 6ES7 923-0CD00-0BA0
60 m 6ES7 923-0CG00-0BA0
Round-sheath Unshielded 30 m 6ES7 923-2CD00-0AA0
ribbon cable 60 m 6ES7 923-2CG00-0AA0
2 x 16
Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6ES7 928-0AA00-0AA0

Selection aid
In the following table you will find the components of SIMATIC TOP connect with
which you can wire the digital modules.

Table 8-6 Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP connect Components

Digital Modules Terminal block for... Front connector

module for...
One-con- Three-con- 2A Relays SM; 16 2A
ductor ductor mod- or 32 mod-
connection connection ules channels ules
SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC   – –  –
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC   – –  –
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC;   – –  –
source input
SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 V   –   –
SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 V   –   –
SM 322; DO 8
24VDC/0.5 V;   – –  –
with diagnostic interrupt
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/2 A – –  – – 
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24VDC/   – –  –
0.5 A
SM 323;   – –  –
DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

One-conductor or three-conductor connection

With the three-conductor connection, you can optionally apply the supply voltage
for the module to the front connector module or to the terminal block. With the
one-conductor connection, this can only be done to the front connector module.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-13
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

2A module connection
You require the following information on wiring 2A modules only when you want to
use the SM 322; 8
DO 24 VDC/2 A with SIMATIC TOP connect.

8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor

Connection

Connection Notes

Table 8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection

Digital Modules Connection Notes

Supply Voltage Feed-In Additional Descrip-
jumper re- tion on ter-
At front Add. At front quired at minal
connector ground connector power sup- block not
only conn. at or terminal ply in line with
terminal block description
block on SM
SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC  – – – –
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC  – – – –
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; source  – – – –
input
SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 A  – – – –
SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A  – – – –
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A  – – – 
with diagnostic interrupt
SM 323;  – – – –
DI 16/DO 16
DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 323;  – – – –
DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-14 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection

Table 8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Top row:
Terminals 0 to 7: inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7

Connecting the power supply

Always connect the supply voltage to the front connector module Observe the
wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
In the following example, you must connect L+ to Plus of the upper terminal and M
to Minus of the lower terminal.

Connecting the terminal block for one-conductor connection

–
+
L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
M 20

–
+
Front connector module

Terminal block Terminal block

Figure 8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-15
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor

Connection

Connection Notes

Table 8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection

Digital modules Connection notes

Supply voltage feed-in Additional Descrip-
jumper re- tion on ter-
At front Add. At front quired at minal
connector ground connector power sup- block not
only conn. at or terminal ply in line with
terminal block description
block on SM
SM 321; DI 32
24 VDC – –   –
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC – –   –
SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; source – –   –
input
SM 322; DO 32
24 VDC/0.5 A – –  – –
SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/0.5 A – –  – –
SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A – –   
with diagnostic interrupt
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16
24 – –  – –
VDC/0.5 A
SM 323; – –  – –
DI 8/DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A

Assignment of the terminal block for three-conductor connection

Table 8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Top row:
Terminals 0to 7:inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7

Center row:
All terminals: M potential

Bottom row:
All terminals: L + potential

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-16 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Connecting the power supply

Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
With some digital modules, two jumpers are generally required for connecting the
supply voltage (refer to Table 8-9 on page 8-16).
You can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block.
Irrespective of this, you must interconnect the two Plus terminals and the two
Minus terminals.

Connecting the terminal block for three-conductor connection

–
+
L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
M 20

– +

Front connector

Jumper (1)

Terminal block Terminal block

Jumper (2)
Jumper (1) or jumper (2) required

Figure 8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-17
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules

You can use the terminal block for 2A modules to wire the SM 322;
8
DO 24 VDC/2A.

Connection Notes

Table 8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection

Digital Modules Connection Notes

Supply Voltage Feed-In Add. Descr. on
jumper re- terminal
At front Add. At front
quired for block not
connector ground connector
power sup- in line with
only conn. at or terminal
ply descr. on
terminal block
SM
block
SM 322; DO 16
24 VDC/2 A   – – –

Assignment of the terminal block for connection of 2A modules

Table 8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules

Front View of Terminal Block Assignments of the Assignments of the

Terminals (left) Terminals (right)
Top row: Top row, on right:
Terminals 0 to 3: Terminals 0 to 3:
outputs x.0 to x.3 outputs x.4 to x.7
Center row: Center row, on right:
Terminals 0 to 3: Terminals 0 to 3:
potential M1 for x.0 to potential M2 for x.4 to
x.3 x.7
M1 M2
Bottom row: Bottom row:
two-terminal two-terminal
connection for M1 connection for M2

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-18 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Connecting the power supply

Please observe the following when connecting the power supply:
 Apply the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
 Connect the supply voltage at the front connector module to the potential
terminals using separate cables.
 You must equip each terminal block with a cable for M1 or M2, in addition to the
connecting cable.
 Connect M1 or M2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal
block. You may jumper the potential of M1 and M2.

Connection to terminal block for 2A modules

M1
–
+
1 L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 M 10
2 L+ 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2 M 20

– +

M2

Front connector

Terminal
block

Figure 8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-19
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect TPA with Analog Modules

Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect TPA,
you must first select the components as a function of the method of connection
(screw-type or spring-loaded terminal).

8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid

Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.

Table 8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Order number

Terminal block Quantity: 1 Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7 924-0CC00-0AB0
Screw-type terminals 6ES7 924-0CC00-0AA0
Quantity: 10 Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7 924-0CC00-1AB0
Screw-type terminals 6ES7 924-0CC00-1AA0
Front connector Voltage supply via:
Spring-loaded terminals
Screw-type terminals 6ES7 921-3AF00-0AA0
6ES7 921-3AG00-0AA0
Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shielding plate for terminal block, set of 4 6ES7 928-1BA00-0AA0
Terminal element for:
2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0
Round-sheath ribbon cable, shielded 30 m 6ES7 923-0CD00-0BA0
∅ 8 mm 60 m 6ES7 923-0CG00-0BA0
Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6ES7 928-0AA00-0AA0

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-20 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal

Allocation

Terminal marking
On the TPA terminal block, the terminals are identified by letters. This simplifies
the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the
terminal block.

Terminal block assignment

Table 8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Terminals Z and Y can be used for multiplying arbitrary
potentials and signals.

A B C D E F G H I K

The terminals having identical letters are electrically

Y YK K A A A A Z Z
Y Z interconnected, with the exception of terminals Z and
Z, and also Y and Y.

Multiplier terminal
The lower tier of terminals on the terminal block is designed as 2
5 multiplier
terminals.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-21
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Terminal allocation of an analog module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Terminal Terminal assignment on

number on terminal block TPA
module
Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2

1 1 Y Y
2 2 B
3 3 C
4 4 D
5 5 E
6 6 F
7 7 G
8 8 H
9 9 I
10 10 K K

11 11 A A
12 12 B
13 13 C
14 14 D
15 15 E
16 16 F
17 17 G
18 18 H
19 19 I
20 20 Z Z

Figure 8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-22 A5E00105505-02
 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield

Two options for connecting the shield

You can connect the signal line shield to ground as follows:
 On the analog module by means of a shield-support element
(refer to the manual Hardware and Installation for the S7-300 or the manual
Distributed I/O device ET 200M in the section on wiring)
 Directly to the terminal block by means of a shielding plate

Connecting the shield to the terminal block using a shielding plate

1. Before mounting, attach a shielding plate to the terminal block.
2. Mount the terminal block on the DIN rail.
(In the figure below, you can see that the shielding plate is applied to the rear of
the terminal block and thus there is a connection to the grounded rail.)
3. Place the signal-line shield with the shield terminals on the shielding plate.

Shield support for shield terminal and

Loosen connecting cable to analog module
shielding plate

Press down lightly on the

release to loosen the
shielding plate Terminal block

Shielding
plate
Snap the
shielding plate Shield support fro shield terminal
into place and signal lines from
actuators/sensors

Snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block.

Figure 8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 8-23
SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8.4.4 Connection Example

Connecting the load voltage supply

You can connect the load voltage supply of the analog module to the front
connector module. Their are separate terminals on the front connector module for
the load voltage L+ und M. Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.

Allocation of front connector to terminal block

The upper socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal
block 1 and the lower socket of the front connector module is the connection for
terminal block 2.

Connection example
The illustration below shows an example of connecting the analog input module
SM 321; AI 8
12 bits in ”Resistance Test” mode.

Resistance test Terminal assignment on

terminal block TPA
Terminal number on Terminal Terminal
module block 1 block 2

L+ L+ 1 Y Y
SF
M0 + CH0 2 B
M0 3 C
IC0 + 4 D
IC0 5 E
M1 + CH2 6 F
M1 7 G
IC1 + 8 H
IC1 9 I
Comp + 10 K K

Comp
Comp–/ Mana 11 A A
M2 + CH4 12 B
M2 13 C
IC2 + 14 D
IC2 15 E
M3 + CH6 16 F
M3 17 G
IC3 + 18 H
IC3 19 I
M M 20 Z Z
M

Figure 8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8
12 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

8-24 A5E00105505-02
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A
In this chapter

Section Contents Page

A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User A-1
Program
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD A-11
A.6 Parameters der SM 331; AI 8
TC A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
16 bits A-29
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules A-35
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8
12 bits A-38
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules A-40

A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User
Program

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use a SFC:
 To reassign parameters to the module and
 To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-1
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Parameters stored in data records

The parameters of the signal modules are located in data records 0 and 1; for
some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well.

Modifiable parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module
using SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this!
You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.

SFCs for parameter assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in
the user program:

Table A-1 SFCs for Assigning Parameters to Signal Modules

SFC Identifier Application

No.
55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28)
to the addressed signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the
CPU to the addressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128)
from the CPU to the addressed signal module.

Description of the parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module
classes. The parameters of the signal modules are described:
 In the on-line help of STEP 7
 In this reference manual
You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module
concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules
in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that
purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-2 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
 In STEP 7
 With SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Input delay No Yes
0
Diagnostics No Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Hardware interrupt with rising edge Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt with falling edge Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-3
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
digital input modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to ”1”.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Hardware interrupt

on rising edge at channel group 0

on falling edge at channel group 0
on rising edge at channel group 1
on falling edge at channel group 1
on rising edge at channel group 2
on falling edge at channel group 2
on rising edge at channel group 3
on falling edge at channel group 3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Hardware interrupt

on rising edge at channel group 4

on falling edge at channel group 4
on rising edge at channel group 5
on falling edge at channel group 5
on rising edge at channel group 6
on falling edge at channel group 6
on rising edge at channel group 7
on falling edge at channel group 7

Byte 3 Not relevant

Figure A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-4 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
 In STEP 7
 With SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics 0 No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP 1 Yes Yes
Enable substitute value ”1” Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-5
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
digital output modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to ”1”.

7 6 1 0
Byte 0
Behavior on CPU STOP
Hold last valid value
Apply substitute value
Diagnostics interrupt enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Substitute value

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Substitute value

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8

Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15

Byte 3 Not relevant

Figure A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Note
You should only enable the parameters in byte 0, ”Hold last valid value” and
”Enable substitute value” as an alternative.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-6 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
 In STEP 7
 With SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Temperature unit 0 No Yes
Temperature coefficient No Yes
Smoothing No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Interference suppression Yes Yes
1
Measuring method Yes Yes
Measuring range Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-7
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog input modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to ”1”.

7 6 2 0
Byte 0

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics interrupt enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Byte 1 Interference suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Channel group 2 See Table A-5
Channel group 3

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Measurement channel group 0
Byte 3 Measurement channel group 1
Byte 4 Measurement channel group 2
Byte 5 Measurement channel group 3

Measuring Range
See Table A-6
Measuring Method

Byte 6 High Byte Upper limit value channel

Byte 7 Low Byte group 0; channel 0
Byte 8 High Byte Lower limit value channel
Byte 9 Low Byte group 0; channel 0
Byte 10 High Byte Upper limit value channel
Byte 11 Low Byte group 1; channel 2
Byte 12 High Byte Lower limit value channel
Byte 13 Low Byte group 1; channel 2

Note: For the channel groups, only one limit value for channel 1 is ever set.

Figure A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-8 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3). You must count the resulting
integration time separately for each channel!

Table A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules

Interference Suppression Integration Code

Time
400 Hz 2.5 ms 2#00
60 Hz 16.7 ms 2#01
50 Hz 20 ms 2#10
10 Hz 100 ms 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5
of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3).

Note
Please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected,
depending on the measuring range (see Chapter 4)!

Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001  80 mV 2#0001
 250 mV 2#0010
 500 mV 2#0011
1V 2#0100
 2.5 V 2#0101
5V 2#0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
 10 V 2#1001
 25 mV 2#1010
 50 mV 2#1011

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-9
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Four-wire transmit- 2#0010  3.2 mA 2#0000
ter  10 mA 2#0001
0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
 20 mA 2#0100
 5 mA 2#0101
Two-wire transmit- 2#0011 4 to 20 mA 2#0011
ter
Resistance, four- 2#0100 150  2#0010
conductor connec- 300  2#0100
tion 600  2#0110
10 k 2#1001
Resistor four-con- 2#0110 52 to 148  2#0001
ductor connection; 250  2#0011
100  compensa- 400  2#0101
tion 700  2#0111
Thermal resist- 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
ance + lineariza- Ni 100 climate 2#0001
tion four-conductor Pt 100 standard range 2#0010
connection Pt 200 standard range 2#0011
Pt 500 standard range 2#0100
Pt 1000 standard range 2#0101
Ni 1000 standard range 2#0110
Pt 200 climate 2#0111
Pt 500 climate 2#1000
Pt 1000 climate 2#1001
Ni 1000 climate 2#1001
Ni 100 standard range 2#1011
Thermocouples in- 2#1010 Type B [PtRh – PtRh] 2#0000
ternal comparison Type N [NiCrSi – NiSi] 2#0001
Type E [NiCr – CuNi] 2#0010
Thermocouples 2#1011
Type R [PtRh –Pt] 2#0011
external compari-
Type S [PtRh –Pt] 2#0100
son
Type J [Fe – CuNi IEC] 2#0101
Thermocouples 2#1101 Type L [Fe – CuNi] 2#0110
+ linearization in- Type T [Cu – CuNi] 2#0111
ternal comparison Type K [NiCr – Ni] 2#1000
Type U [Cu –Cu Ni] 2#1001
Thermocouples 2#1110
+ linearization ex-
ternal comparison

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-10 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input
module SM 331; AI 8
RTD.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
 In STEP 7
 With SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
0
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Temperature unit Yes Yes
Measuring method Yes Yes
Measuring range Yes Yes
Module filtering mode Yes Yes
Temperature coefficient Yes Yes
128
Interference suppression Yes Yes
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-11
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for SM 331;
AI 8
RTD. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to ”1”.

7 6 2 0
Byte 0

Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius

1: degrees Fahrenheit
Cycle end interrupt enable
Diagnostics interrupt enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8
RTD

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-12 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8
RTD.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module filtering mode (refer to
Byte 0
Table A-8)
Byte 1 Interference suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(refer to Table A-9)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measuring method, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 3

Measuring range, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-10)
Byte 4

Temperature coefficient, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 0
(refer to Table A-12)
Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 6

Measuring range, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 7

Temperature coefficient, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 1
(refer to Table A-12)

Figure A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8
RTD

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-13
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 8

Measuring method, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 9

Measuring range, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 10

Temperature coefficient, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 2
(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 12

Measuring range, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-10)

Byte 13

Temperature coefficient, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-11)
Smoothing, channel group 3
(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte channel 1

Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte channel 1

Figure A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD (Continued)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-14 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 22 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 23 Low Byte channel 2

Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value
Byte 28 High Byte channel group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte channel 3

Byte 30 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte channel 4
Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2
Byte 35 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 36 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte channel 6

Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte channel 7

Byte 44 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte channel 7

Figure A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD (Continued)

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-15
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you
enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Module filtering mode Code

8 channels hardware filter 2#00000000
8 channels software filter 2#00000001
4 channels hardware filter 2#00000010

Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Note that the settings 50 Hz, 60 Hz
and 400 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60 and
400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.

Table A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50/60/400 Hz 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of
data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).

Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Resistance, four-conductor 2#0100 150  2#0010
connection 300  2#0100
600  2#0110
Resistance, three-conductor 2#0101 150  2#0010
connection 300  2#0100
600  2#0110

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-16 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Thermal 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#00000000
resistance + linearization Ni 100 climate 2#00000001
four-conductor connection Pt 100 standard 2#00000010
Ni 100 standard 2#00000011
Pt 500 standard 2#00000100
Pt 1000 standard 2#00000101
Ni 1000 standard 2#00000110
Pt 200 climate 2#00000111
Pt 500 climate 2#00001000
Pt 1000 climate 2#00001001
Ni 1000 climate 2#00001010
Pt 200 standard 2#00001011
Ni 120 standard 2#00001100
Ni 120 climate 2#00001101
Cu 10 climate 2#00001110
Cu 10 standard 2#00001111
Ni 200 standard 2#00010000
Ni 200 climate 2#00010001
Ni 500 standard 2#00010010
Ni 500 climate 2#00010011
Thermal resistance + 2#1001 Pt 100 climate 2#00000000
linearization three-conductor Ni 100 climate 2#00000001
connection Pt 100 standard 2#00000010
Ni 100 standard 2#00000011
Pt 500 standard 2#00000100
Pt 1000 standard 2#00000101
Ni 1000 standard 2#00000110
Pt 200 climate 2#00000111
Pt 500 climate 2#00001000
Pt 1000 climate 2#00001001
Ni 1000 climate 2#00001010
Pt 200 standard 2#00001011
Ni 120 standard 2#00001100
Ni 120 climate 2#00001101
Cu 10 climate 2#00001110
Cu 10 standard 2#00001111
Ni 200 standard 2#00010000
Ni 200 climate 2#00010001
Ni 500 standard 2#00010010
Ni 500 climate 2#00010011

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-17
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Temperature coefficient of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter
in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Temperature coefficient Code

Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (IPTS-68) 2#0000
Pt0.003916 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0001
Pt0.003902 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0010
Pt0.003920 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0011
Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) 2#0100
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1000
Ni 0.006720 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1001
Cu0.00427 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1100

Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in
the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8
RTD

Smoothing Code
None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-18 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.6 Parameters der SM 331; AI 8
TC

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input
module SM 331; AI 8
TC.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
 In STEP 7
 With SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
0
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Temperature unit Yes Yes
Measuring method Yes Yes
128
Measuring range Yes Yes
Module filtering mode Yes Yes
Reaction to open thermocouple Yes Yes
Interference suppression Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-19
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to ”1”.

7 6 2 0
Byte 0

Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius

1: degrees Fahrenheit
Cycle end interrupt enable
Diagnostics interrupt enable
Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8
TC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-20 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8
TC.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module filtering mode (refer to
Byte 0
Table A-14)
Byte 1 Interference suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(refer to Table A-15)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measuring method, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 3

Measuring range, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 4

Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 0
(refer to Table A-17)

Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 6

Measuring range, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 7

Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 1
(refer to Table A-17)

Figure A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-21
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 8

Measuring method, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 9

Measuring range, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 10

Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 2
(refer to Table A-17)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 12

Measuring range, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-16)

Byte 13

Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 3
(refer to Table A-17)

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte channel 1

Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte channel 1

Figure A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC (Continued)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-22 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 22 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 23 Low Byte channel 2

Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value
Byte 28 High Byte channel group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte channel 3

Byte 30 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte channel 4
Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2
Byte 35 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 36 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte channel 6

Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte channel 7

Byte 44 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte channel 7

Figure A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8
TC (Continued)

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-23
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you
enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).

Table A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Module Filtering Mode Code

8 channels hardware filter 2#00000000
8 channels software filter 2#00000001
4 channels hardware filter 2#00000010

Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9). Note that the settings 400 Hz, 60
Hz and 50 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60 and
400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.

Table A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8
TC

Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50/60/400 Hz 2#11

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-24 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of
data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).

Table A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Measuring Method Code Measuring Code

Range
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Thermocouple, linear, 2#1010 B 2#0000
reference temperature 0 °C N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, 2#1011 B 2#0000
reference temperature 50 °C N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, internal comparison 2#1101 B 2#0000
N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, external comparison 2#1110 B 2#0000
N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-25
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Reaction to open thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

The table below contains the codes for the reactions to an open thermocouple,
which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).

Table A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Reaction to open thermocouple Code

Overflow 2#0
Underflow 2#1

Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in
the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).

Table A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8
TC

Smoothing Code
None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-26 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8
13 bits

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog input module.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to ”1”.

7 6 5 4 3 2 10
Byte 0 Temperature measurement

7 6 5 4 3 2 10
Byte 1 Interference suppression

7 6 5 4 3 2 10
Byte 2 Measuring method and range channel 0
Byte 3 Measuring method and range channel 1
Byte 4 Measuring method and range channel 2
Byte 5 Measuring method and range channel 3
Byte 6 Measuring method and range channel 4
Byte 7 Measuring method and range channel 5
Byte 8 Measuring method and range channel 6
Byte 9 Measuring method and range channel 7

Figure A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Temperature measurement
The table below contains the codes for the different temperature measurements,
which you enter in byte 0 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).

Table A-19 Codes for Temperature Measurement of the Analog Input Module

Temperature unit for linearization Code

Degrees Celsius 2#0000 0000
Degrees Fahrenheit 2#0000 1000
Kelvin 2#0001 0000

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-27
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12). You must work out the resulting
integration time separately for each module!

Table A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module

Interference Suppression Integration Time Code

60 Hz 16.6 ms 2#01
50 Hz 20 ms 2#10

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input module and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 9 of
data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).

Note
Please note that the analog input module must be wired in accordance with the
measuring range and at the front connector correspondingly!

Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module

Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001  50 mV 2#1011
 500 mV 2#0011
1V 2#0100
5V 2# 0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
 20 mA 2#0100
Resistors 2#0101 600  2#0110
6 k 2#1000
Bulb resistor 2#1001 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
(linear) Pt 100 standard range 2#0010

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-28 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Parameters
Table A-22 contains all the parameters which you can set for the isolated analog
input module SM 331; AI 8 × bits. This comparison indicates which methods you
can use for the configuration of the individual parameters:
 SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
 STEP 7 programming device
The parameters that you have set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the
module by means of SFC 56 or SFC 57.

Table A-22 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Data Record Configurable with...

Parameter
No. ... SFC 55 ...programming device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics: With wire-break 0 No Yes
check
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Module mode Yes Yes
Interference suppression Yes Yes
Measuring method Yes Yes
Measuring range Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-29
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1

Figure A-13 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the isolated
analog input module SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits.
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to ”1”.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 0

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-30 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

Figure A-14, A-15, A-16 shows the structure of data record 128 for the parameters
of the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module mode (see Table A-23)
Byte 0
Byte 1 Interference
frequency suppression

Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Refer to Table A-24
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Measuring method, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 3

Measuring range, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 4

Smoothing, channel group 0

(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 6

Measuring range, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 7

Smoothing, channel group 1

(refer to Table A-12)

Figure A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-31
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 8

Measuring method, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 9

Measuring range, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 10

Smoothing, channel group 2

(refer to Table A-12)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 12

Measuring range, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-25)

Byte 13

Smoothing, channel group 3

(refer to Table A-12)

Upper limit value

Byte 14 High Byte channel group 0;
channel 0
Byte 15 Low Byte
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Byte 17 Low Byte channel 0

Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 19 Low Byte channel 1

Byte 20 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 21 Low Byte channel 1

Figure A-15 Data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits (continued)

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-32 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Upper limit value

Byte 22 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 2
Byte 23 Low Byte
Byte 24 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 1;
Byte 25 Low Byte channel 2

Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Byte 28 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 1;
Byte 29 Low Byte channel 3

Upper limit value

Byte 30 High Byte
channel group 2;
Byte 31 Low Byte channel 4

Byte 32 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 33 Low Byte channel 4

Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2
Byte 35 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 36 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 2;
Byte 37 Low Byte channel 5

Byte 38 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 39 Low Byte channel 6
Byte 40 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 3;
Byte 41 Low Byte channel 6

High Byte Upper limit value

Byte 42
channel group 3;
Byte 43 Low Byte channel 7

Byte 44 High Byte Lower limit value

channel group 3;
Byte 45 Low Byte channel 7

Figure A-16 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits (continued)

Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-33
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Module modes
Table A-23 contains the codes for the module modes, which you enter in byte 0 of
data record 128 (see Figure A-14).

Table A-23 Codes for the Modes of SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Module Mode Code

8 channels 2#00000000
4 channels 2#00000001

Interference suppression
Table A-24 contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte
1 of data record 128 (see Figure A-5). Note that 4-channel mode only functions if
interference frequency suppression of 50, 60 and 400 Hz is set.

Table A-24 Codes for Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60 und 400 Hz 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

Table A-25 contains all the measuring ranges for the isolated analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits. Table A-25 also shows the codes for measuring methods
and measuring ranges. You must enter these codes in accordance with the
required measuring range in the relevant byte of data record 128 (see Figure
A-14).

Table A-25 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits
Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 ±5V 2#0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
± 10 V 2#1001
Current (4-wire transmitter) 2#0002 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
± 20 mA 2#0100

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-34 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Settings for input smoothing

Table A-26 contains all the smoothing settings for the isolated analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits. You must enter these codes in accordance with the
required smoothing mode in the relevant byte of data record 128 (see
Figure A-14).

Table A-26 Codes for the Smoothing Mode Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 × 16 bits

Smoothing mode setting Code

None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameters
Table A-27 contains all the parameters you can set for analog output modules..
The comparison shows:
 Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
 Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”.

The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module
with SFCs 56 and 57.

Table A-27 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics 0 No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP Yes Yes
Output type 1 Yes Yes
Output range Yes Yes
Substitute value Yes Yes

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-35
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog output modules.
You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in
byte 0 to ”1”.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

7 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP

Channel group 0
Channel group 1 0 = Outputs
Channel group 2 de-energized
Channel group 3 1 = Hold last value

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Output channel group 0
Byte 3 Output channel group 1
Byte 4 Output channel group 2
Byte 5 Output channel group 3

Output range
Output type Refer to Table A-28

Byte 6 High Byte

Substitute value channel group 0
Byte 7 Low Byte
Byte 8 High Byte
Substitute value channel group 1
Byte 9 Low Byte
Byte 10 High Byte
Substitute value channel group 2
Byte 11 Low Byte
Byte 12 High Byte
Substitute value channel group 3
Byte 13 Low Byte

Figure A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-36 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Setting substitute values

Note
For output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value
E500H so that the output remains de-energized (refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on
pages 4-29 and 4-30).
The representation of the substitute values corresponds to the analog value
representation. You should observe the relevant range limits when setting the
substitute values.

Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog
output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of
data record 1 (refer to Figure A-17).

Table A-28 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules

Output type Code Output Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
 20 mA 2#0100

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-37
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits

Parameters
Table A-27 contains all the parameters that you can set for the analog output
module SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits. The comparison shows:
 Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
 Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”.

The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module
with SFCs 56 and 57.

Table A-29 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits.

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics 0 No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP Yes Yes
1
Output type Yes Yes
Output range Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-38 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1

The diagram below shows the structure of data record 1 of the parameters of the
SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits.
You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in
byte 0 to ”1”.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP

Channel 4 Channel 0
Channel 5 Channel 1 0 = Outputs
Channel 6 Channel 2 de-energized
Channel 7 Channel 3 1 = Hold last value

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Output channel 0
Byte 3 Output channel 1
Byte 4 Output channel 2
Byte 5 Output channel 3
Byte 6 Output channel 4
Byte 7 Output channel 5
Byte 8 Output channel 6
Byte 9 Output channel 7

Output Range
Output type See Table A-30

Bytes 10 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-39
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Output method and output range

The following table contains all the output methods and output ranges of the
SM 332; AO 8 × 12 bits , with their coding. You must enter these codes in bytes 2
to 9 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-18).

Table A-30 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM332;
AO 8 × 12 bits
Output Type Code Output Range Code
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
± 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
± 20 mA 2#0100

A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input/output
modules.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
 In STEP 7
 With SFC 55 ”WR_PARM”
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A-31 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Measuring method Yes Yes
Measuring range Yes Yes
Integration time 1 Yes Yes
Output type Yes Yes
Output range Yes Yes

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-40 A5E00105505-02
 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
analog input/output modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to ”1”.

7 0
Byte 0 Not relevant

7 0
Byte 1 Reset Time
Set the same parameters for
all channels.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3

7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Meas. channel 0
Byte 3 Meas. channel 1
Byte 4 Meas. channel 2
Byte 5 Meas. channel 3

Measuring Measuring
Method Range
7 4 3 0
Byte 6 Output channel 0
Byte 7 Output channel 1

Output type Output Range

Byte 8

: : Not relevant
Byte 13

Figure A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 A-41
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes
2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).

Table A-32 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V 2#1000
Resistance, four-conductor connection 2#0100 10 k 2#1001
Thermal resistance + linearization 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
four-conductor connection

Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog
input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 6 and 7
of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).

Table A-33 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Output type Code Output Range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V 2#1000

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A-42 A5E00105505-02
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B
In this Appendix

Section Contents Page

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User B-1
Program
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 7 B-5
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT B-7

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User

Program

In this Appendix
This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data.
You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics
data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program.

Diagnostic data are contained in data records

The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are contained in
data records 0 and 1:
 Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current
status of a programmable logic controller.
 Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained
in data record 0 and as many as 12 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal
modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for
that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 B-1
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are
described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit
concerned is set to ”1”.

Bytes 0 and 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0

Module problem
Internal malfunction
External malfunction
Channel error present
External auxiliary supply missing
Front connector missing
Module not parameterized.
Incorrect parameter in the module

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 0 0

Module type (see Table B-1)

Channel information available
User information available

Figure B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data

Module types
The following table contains the IDs of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).

Table B-1 Codes of the Module Types

Code Module Type

0101 Analog module
0110 CPU
1000 Function module
1100 CP
1111 Digital module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

B-2 A5E00105505-02
 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

Bytes 2 and 3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 0

Memory module or measuring range module

(for analog modules) incorrect or missing
Communication fault
Operating status 0: RUN
1: STOP
Scan time-out
Module-internal supply voltage failure
Battery empty
Complete backup supply failure

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 3 0

Rack failure
Processor failure
EPROM error
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Fuse blown
Hardware interrupt lost

Figure B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 B-3
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

Bytes 4 to 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 4

Channel type B#16#70: Digital input

B#16#71: Analog input
B#16#72: Digital output
B#16#73: Analog output

Further channel type available? 0: no

1: yes

7 0
Byte 5 Number of diagnostics bits that
the module outputs per channel
7 0
Byte 6 Number of channels of the same
type in one module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 7

Channel error channel 0 / channel group 0

Channel error channel 1 / channel group 1
...
...
...
...
...
Channel error channel 6 / channel group 6
Channel error channel 7 / channel group 7

Figure B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

B-4 A5E00105505-02
 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8

From byte 8 up to byte 15, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic
data. The figures below show the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel
or a channel group of the specific module. The following general rule applies:
When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to ”1”.
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the
section called ”Diagnostics of the Modules”.

Digital input channel of the SM 321; DI 16
24 VDC; with hardware and
diagnostic interrupts

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Ground fault
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Sensor supply missing

Figure B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Digital output channel of the SM 322; DO 8
24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic

interrupt

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Ground fault
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
External auxiliary supply missing
Overtemperature

Figure B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24
VDC/0.5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 B-5
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

Analog input channel of the SM 331 modules with diagnostics capability

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Common mode error
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Reference channel error
Underflow
Overflow

Figure B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics
Capability

Analog output channel of the SM 332 modules with diagnostics capability

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error

Common mode error
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
External auxiliary supply missing

Figure B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics
Capability

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

B-6 A5E00105505-02
 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for position
detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT are described below. The following general
rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to ”1”.
Section 5.4 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate
remedies.

Bytes 0 and 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0 0 0

Module problem
Internal malfunction
External malfunction
Channel error present
Module not parameterized.
Incorrect parameter in the module

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 0 0 0

Module class 05H

Channel information available

Figure B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 B-7
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

Bytes 2 to 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 0

Scan time-out

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 3 Not relevant

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 4 0

Channel type 79H: SM POS-INPUT

7 0
Byte 5 Number of diagnostics bits that the module
outputs per channel: 8 bits long
7 0
Byte 6 Number of channels of the same
type in one module: 3 channels

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0

Channel error, channel 0

Channel error, channel 1
Channel error, channel 2

Figure B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Bytes 8 to 10
From byte 8 up to byte 10, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic
data. The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel
of the SM 338; POS-INPUT.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0

Configuration/parameterization error
(internal channel error)
Encoder error (external channel error)

Figure B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

B-8 A5E00105505-02
Dimension Drawings C
Introduction
In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings for the most important
components of an S7-300. The specifications in these dimension drawings are
required for dimensioning the S7-300 configuration. The dimensions of an S7-300
configuration must be taken into account when installing an S7-300 in cabinets,
switchgear rooms, etc. This appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of
the CPUs of the S7-300 or M7-300 or of the IM 153-1. These dimension drawings
are contained in the relevant manuals.

Contents
In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings of the following S7-300
components.

Section Contents Page

C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules C-9
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules C-14
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules C-14
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories C-17

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-1
Dimension Drawings

C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails

483 mm standard rail

Figure C-1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail.

8.7 465.2

163.9 155

7
24

19
35

15 11
482.6

Figure C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-2 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

530 mm standard rail

Figure C-2 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm standard rail.

15 20
25 = 500

25

5.2
24

19
35

15 18
530

Figure C-2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail

830 mm standard rail

Figure C-3 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm standard rail.

15 32
25 = 800

25 5.2
24

19
35

15 18
830

Figure C-3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-3
Dimension Drawings

2000 mm standard rail

Figure C-4 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail.
24

19
35

15 2000

Figure C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail

160 mm rail
Figure C-5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail.
32.5

M6
57.2

122

10

10 140 6
160 15

Figure C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-4 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

482.6 mm rail
Figure C-6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482.6 mm rail.

32.5

7
M6
57.2

122
10

8.3 466 6
482.6 15

Figure C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width

530 mm rail
Figure C-7 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm rail.
32.5

M6
57.2

122

10

15 500 6
530 15

Figure C-7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-5
Dimension Drawings

830 mm rail
Figure C-8 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm rail.

32.5

7
M6
57.2

122
10

15 800 6
830 15

Figure C-8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width

2000 mm rail
Figure C-9 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail.
122

2000 6
15

Figure C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-6 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

Rail for ”Insert and Remove” function

Figure C-10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the ”Insert and Remove”
function with active bus module, S7-300 module and explosion-proof partition. The
rail is 482.6 mm or 530 mm long.

Explosion-proof
partition

S7-300 module

166
152
Active bus module

59
Rail for the ”Insert
and Remove”
function
122
125
155

Figure C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for ”Insert and Remove” Function with Active Bus
Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-7
Dimension Drawings

Bus modules (Expansion buses)

Figure C-11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the ”Insert
and Remove” function.

Bus modules
BM PS/IM (...7HA)
BM IM/IM (...7HD)
BM 2
40 (...7HB)
BM 1
80 (...7HC)

97
92

Figure C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-8 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules

PS 307; 2 A
Figure C-12 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 2 A power supply
module.

127.5

50 120

125

Figure C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-9
Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5A
Figure C-13 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 5 A power supply
module.

127.5

80 120

125

Figure C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-10 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 10 A
Figure C-14 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 10 A power supply
module.

127.5
200 120

125

Figure C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-11
Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP

Figures C-15 and C-16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a
power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Observe
the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the
PS 307; 5 A with the CPU.

132
27

68

Figure C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2
DP. Front View

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-12 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP

Figure C-16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module PS 307; 5 A
with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP in the side view.

130

120

125
6 13

Figure C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2
DP. Side View

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-13
Dimension Drawings

C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules

IM 360
Figure C-17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 360.

40 120

125
Figure C-17 Interface Module IM 360

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-14 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

IM 361
Figure C-18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 361.

80 120

125
Figure C-18 Interface Module IM 361

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-15
Dimension Drawings

IM 365
Figure C-19 shows the dimension drawing of interface module IM 365.

40 120

125
9
120

125

Figure C-19 Interface Module IM 365

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-16 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules

Signal module
Figure C-20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module.
A signal module might look slightly different than the example below. The
dimensions however are always the same.

40 120

130
125
Figure C-20 Signal Module

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-17
Dimension Drawings

C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories

Shield connecting element

Figure C-21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in
connection with two signal modules.

120

190
40

80

Figure C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-18 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

Figure C-22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

70
60 40.5

35.5

Figure C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier

Figure C-23 shows the dimension drawing of the 2-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.
35

70

60 40.5

35.5

Figure C-23 SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-19
Dimension Drawings

SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier

Figure C-24 shows the dimension drawing of the 1-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

55
52 40.5

35.5

Figure C-24 SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier

RS 485 repeater on standard rail

Figure C-25 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the standard
rail.

45 73
128
125

Figure C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-20 A5E00105505-02
 Dimension Drawings

RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

Figure C-26 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the S7-300
rail.

45 70

125
Figure C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 C-21
Dimension Drawings

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

C-22 A5E00105505-02
Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300
Modules D
Spare parts
Table D-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7-300
programmable controllers.

Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts

S7-300 Parts Order number

Bus connector 6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0
Power connector between power supply unit 6ES7 390-7BA00-0AA0
and CPU
Labeling strip (Qty 10)
 For 8/16-channel modules 6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0
 For 32-channel modules 6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0
Labeling strips to be printed
 For 16-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0
(red) 6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0
 For 32-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0
(red) 6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0
 Instructions for printing labeling strips with www.siemens.de/automation/csi/
artwork product
Contribution ID No.: 11978022
Slot numbering label 6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector 20-pin
 Screw-type Connection 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
 Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0
Front connector 40-pin
 Screw-type Connection 6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 D-1
Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules

Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts, Fortsetzung

S7-300 Parts Order number

Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals
 Screw-type Connection 6ES7 921-3AB00-0AA0
 Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 921-3AA00-0AA0
Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals
 Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 921-3AA20-0AA0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier, with
 Screw-type Connection 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AA0
 Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AB0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier, with
 Screw-type Connection 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AA0
 Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AB0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier, with
 Screw-type Connection 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AA0
 Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AB0
Round-sheath ribbon cable (16-pin)
 Unshielded 30 m 6ES7 923-0CD00-0AA0
 Unshielded 60 m 6ES7 923-0CG00-0AA0
 Shielded 30 m 6ES7 923-0CD00-0BA0
 Shielded 60 m 6ES7 923-0CG00-0BA0
Plug-in connectors, 16-pin, set of 8 (insulation 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shield connecting element 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
Shield connection terminals for
 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
2 to 6 mm
 1 cable with a shield diameter of 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
3 to 8 mm
 1 cable with a shield diameter of 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0
4 to 13 mm
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7 974-0AA00-0AA0
Fuse set for 120/230 VAC digital output 6ES7 973-1HD00-0AA0
modules (contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse
carriers)
Interconnecting cable between IM 360 and
IM 361 or IM 361 and IM 361
 1m 6ES7 368-3BB01-0AA0
 2.5 m 6ES7 368-3BC51-0AA0
 5m 6ES7 368-3BF01-0AA0
 10 m 6ES7 368-3CB01-0AA0

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

D-2 A5E00105505-02
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic
Sensitive Devices (ESD) E
Introduction
In this appendix, we explain
 what is meant by ”electrostatic sensitive devices”
 the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic
sensitive devices.

Contents
This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices:

Section Contents Page

E.1 What is ESD? E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge E-4
Damage

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 E-1
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

E.1 What is ESD?

Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components.
Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages
and thus to any electrostatic discharge.
The abbreviation ESD has been introduced for these Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices/Modules.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

Caution
! Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the
voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are
present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without
previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused
by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only
after a prolonged period of operation.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

E-2 A5E00105505-02
 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons

Charging
Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its
surroundings can be charged electrostatically.
Figure E-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can
build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure.
These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2.

Voltage in kV
(kV)
16 1 Synthetic material
15
14 2 Wool
13
3 Antistatic material,
12 for example, wood
11 1 or concrete
10
9
8
7
6
5
4 2
3
2
3
1
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air
humidity in
%

Figure E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 E-3
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge

Damage

Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently
grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid
electrostatic charging.

Avoid direct contact

You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable
(for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of
components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot
affect the sensitive devices.
If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your
body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use
grounded measuring devices only.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

E-4 A5E00105505-02
List of Abbreviations F
Abbreviation Explanation
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to digital converter
AI Aanalog input
AO Analog output
PLC Programmable logic controller
COMP Compensating terminal
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of a PLC
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
ES Encoder supply
EWS Apply substitute value
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read only memory
IC Constant-current lead
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
LWH Hold last valid value
FOC Fiber-optic cable
M Ground terminal
M+ Measuring lead (positive)
M– Measuring lead (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 F-1
List of Abbreviations

MPI Multipoint interface

OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PII Process-image input table
PIQ Process-image output table
PLC Programmable logic control
PS Power supply
QI Analog output current
QV Analog output voltage
RAM Random access memory
RL Load impedance
S+ Detector lead (positive)
S– Detector lead (negative)
SF ”Group error” error LED
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
SSI Synchronous serial interface
TD Text display
UCM Common mode voltage
Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

F-2 A5E00105505-02
Glossary

Address
An address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are:
input I 12.1; memory word MW 25; data block DB 3.

Aggregate current
Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module.

Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to communi-
cate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. The inter-
connection of the modules is established by the bus connector.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 C, referred to the rated range
of the analog module.

Bus
A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several nodes. Data
transmission can be serial or parallel, and be performed over electric conductors
or fiber-optic cables.

Bus segment
A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments
are interconnected by means of  repeaters.

Common mode voltage

A voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured
between this group and any reference point (usually to ground).

Communication processor
Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking,
point-to-point connection.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Glossary-1
Glossary

Comparison point
When using thermocouples on analog input modules: point of known tempera-
ture (for example, compensating box).

Compensating box
Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with
thermocouples on analog input modules. The compensating box is a
compensation circuit for compensating temperature fluctuations at the
Comparison point.

Complete restart
When a CPU starts up (say, when the mode selector switch is moved from
STOP to RUN or when the mains supply is turned on), OB 100 (Restart) is
processed before cyclic programming processing (OB 1).
With a complete restart, the Process input image is read in and the STEP 7
user program is processed, starting with the first instruction in OB1.

Configure
Select and put together different components on a programmable logic controller
and install the requisite software and adapt to the specific use (for example, by
assigning parameters to the modules).

CP
 Communications processor

CPU
The CPU (central processing unit) is a CPU module of the  programmable
logic controller that stores and runs the user program. It contains the operating
system, memory, processing unit and communication interface.

Default setting
The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other
value is used.

Destruction limit
Limit of permitted input voltage / input current.
If this limit is exceeded, the measuring accuracy may deteriorate. If the
destruction limit is exceeded by a vast amount, this may destroy the internal
measuring circuit.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Glossary-2 A5E00105505-02
 Glossary

Diagnostic buffer
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU which stores the
diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred.
For troubleshooting, the user can read out the exact error cause in STEP 7 (PLC
-> Module State) from the diagnostic buffer.

Diagnostic data
All the diagnostics events that occurred are collected in the CPU and entered in
the  Diagnostic buffer. If there is an error OB, it is started.

Diagnostic interrupt
Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors by means of diagnostic
interrupts to the  CPU. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the
course of a diagnostic interrupt.

Diagnostics
Generic term for  System diagnostics, process error diagnosis and user-defi-
ned diagnostics.

Direct access
A direct access is the direct accessing of the CPU by means of the  Backplane
bus to modules while avoiding the  Process image.

Encoder absolute
An encoder absolute determines the path traveled during position detection by
reading a numerical value. In the case of encoders absolute with a serial
interface (SSI), path information is transferred synchronously and serially
according to the SSI protocol (synchronous serial interface).

Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor), which brings the bodies
of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approxi-
mately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages bet-
ween these bodies.

FREEZE
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
FREEZE function is a control command for freezing current encoder values of
the SM 338 to the instantaneous value.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Glossary-3
Glossary

Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every
point.
In the proximity of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential differing
from zero. The term ”reference ground” is frequently used to describe such cir-
cumstances.

Ground, to
To ground means connect an electrically conductive part by means of a groun-
ding system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a
very good contact to ground).

Hardware interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a
certain event in the process (overshooting or undershooting of a limit value; a
module has completed the cyclic conversion of its channels).
The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. In accordance with the priority of
this interrupt, the  Organization block assigned to it is scanned.

Hold last value (LWH)

The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode.

Input delay
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to sup-
press injected interference. Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay
are suppressed.
The set input delay is subject to a tolerance, which can be taken from the techni-
cal specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses long interfering
pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones.
The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the en-
coder and the module. For example, a high input delay has to be set for long
unshielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m).

Integration time
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The integration time is the
inverse value of the Interference frequency suppression in ms.

Interface, multipoint
MPI

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Glossary-4 A5E00105505-02
 Glossary

Interference frequency suppression

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the AC net-
work can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low
voltage ranges and with thermocouples. This parameter is used by the user to
specify the prevailing line frequency on his system.

Interrupt
The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running
of the user program. These run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware
interrupts, among other things. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system
automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program
the reaction he wants (for example, in an FB).

Interrupt, diagnostic
 Diagnostic Interrupt

Interrupt, hardware
 Hardware interrupt

Interrupt, end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

 Hardware interrupt

Linearity error
The linearity error identifies the maximum deviation of the measured/output value
from the ideal linear relationship between the measuring/output signal and the
digital value. The data is a percentage and relates to the rated range of the
analog module.

Logic block
In a SIMATIC S7 context, a logic block is a block that contains a part of the
STEP 7 user program. By contrast, a data block only contains data. There are
the following logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs),
functions (FCs), system function block (SFBs), system functions (SFCs).

Measuring range module

Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adapta-
tion to different measuring ranges.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Glossary-5
Glossary

Module filtering mode

By operating mode we mean:
1. The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the
PG
2. The type of program execution in the CPU
3. A parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules

Monoflop time
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames ( Encoder
absolute).

MPI
The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programmer port of the SIMATIC S7. It is
used to access programmable modules ((CPUs, CPs), text displays and operator
panel from a central point. The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each
other.

Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the
control and load circuit are electrically connected.

Normalizing
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. Nor-
malizing right justifies the encoder value of the encoder absolute; non-relevant
places are discarded.

OB
Organization block

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring or output error of the analog module over
the entire temperature range, referred to the rated range of the analog module.

Optically isolated
With optically isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the con-
trol and load circuit are galvanically isolated; for example, by an optocoupler,
contact assembly or repeater. Input/output circuits can be connected to common
potential.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Glossary-6 A5E00105505-02
 Glossary

Organization block
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system of
the CPU and the user program. The order in which the user program is
processed is defined in the organization blocks.

Parameters
1. Tag of a Logic block
2. Tag for setting the characteristics of a module (one or more per module).
When delivered to the customer, each module has a practical basic setting for its
parameters, which the user can modify in STEP 7.

Process image
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in
process image.
A distinction is made between the process-image of inputs and of outputs. The
process input image (PII) is read by the input modules before the operating
system scans the user program. The process output image (PIQ) is transferred
to the output modules at the end of program scanning.

Product status
Products having an identical order number are distinguished by their product
status. The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions,
modifications due to production reasons (use of new component parts and
components) and troubleshooting.

Programming device
A programming device (PG) is a personal computer in a specific industry-stan-
dard and compact design. A PG is completely equipped for programming SIMA-
TIC programmable logic controllers.

Reaction to open thermocouple

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when using Thermocouples. This
parameter defines whether ”Overflow” (7FFFH) or ”Underflow” (8000H) is output
by the module in the event of an open thermocouple.

Reference potential
Potential from the point of view of which the voltages of the involved circuits are
analyzed and measured.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Glossary-7
Glossary

Repeat accuracy
The repeat accuracy identifies the maximum deviation among the
measured/output values that then occurs, when the same input signal is again
applied or the same input value specified. The repeat accuracy relates to the
rated range of the module and applies to the settled temperature state.

Repeater
Equipment for the amplification of bus signals and connection of  bus
segments over long distances.

Resolution
With analog modules, the number of bits which represent the digitized analog
value in binary. Resolution depends on the module and with analog input
modules on the  integration time. The precision of the resolution of a measured
value increases with the length of the integration time. The resolution can be as
many as 16 bits, including sign.

Retentivity
Data areas in data blocks, and also timers, counters and memory markers are
retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER
DOWN.

Scan time
The scan time is the time required by the CPU to scan the user program
once.

Segment
Bus segment

SFC
System function

Signal module
Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the program-
mable logic controller. There are input modules, output modules, input/output
modules (both digital and analog).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Glossary-8 A5E00105505-02
 Glossary

Smoothing
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoo-
thed by digital filtering. For specific modules it is possible to choose between no,
low, medium and high smoothing. The higher the smoothing, the greater is the
time constant of the digital filter.

STARTUP
The STARTUP mode is transversed during the transition from STOP mode to
RUN mode. STARTUP can be triggered by the  Mode switch or following
power-on or by means of an operator input on the programming device. With the
S7-300 and M7-300, a Complete restart is performed.

Status mode
The SIMATIC S7 programmable logic controllers are familiar with the following of
status modes: STOP,  STARTUP, RUN and STOP.

Substitute value
Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal out-
put modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process va-
lue when signal input modules have failed.
The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 (old
value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). They are values which the output(s) have
to output in the event of a CPU STOP.

System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur
within the programmable logic controller. Examples of such errors are: program
errors or failures on modules. System errors can be indicated with LED displays
or in STEP 7.

System function
A system function (SFC) is a function that is integrated in the operating system
of the CPU a function that can be triggered in the STEP 7 user program, if
necessary.

Temperature coefficient
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures
with a resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient you select
depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to DIN standard).

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Glossary-9
Glossary

Temperature error
The temperature error identifies the drift of the measured/output value caused by
the change in the ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a
percentage per Kelvin and relates to the rated range of the analog module.

Temperature errors of internal compensation

The temperature error of internal compensation only occurs during thermocouple
measurement. It identifies the additional error which is to be taken into account
and added to the actual temperature error when ”internal comparison” mode is
selected. The data is either given as a percentage relative to the physical rated
range of the analog module or as an absolute value in C.

Two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection
Method of connection to the module – for example, of resistance
thermometers/resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of
loads at the voltage output of an analog output module.

Two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter

Kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input
module; 4-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter)

Ungrounded
Without galvanic connection to ground

User program
The user program contains all the statements, tags and data for signal
processing used to control a system or a process. It is assigned to a
programmable module (CPU, FM, for example) and can be structured in smaller
units (blocks).

Wire-break
Parameter in STEP 7. A wire-break test is used for monitoring the connection
from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. With wire-
break, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized
input/output.

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Glossary-10 A5E00105505-02
Index
A Analog input module
SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, 4-150
Accessories, D-1
SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, 4-111
Active bus module, dimension drawing, C-8
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, 4-105
Actuator connection, to analog output module,
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-83, 4-92
4-72
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, 4-122
Address, Glossary-1
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, 4-135
Addressing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-16
smoothing of analog input values, 4-46
Aggregate current, Glossary-1
structure of data record 1, A-8
Ambient conditions, mechanical, 1-10, 1-16
temperature coefficient, 4-46
Analog functions, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
temperature unit, 4-45
Analog input module
underflow, 4-80
causes of errors and remedies, 4-79
wire-break, 4-79, 4-80
common-mode error, 4-79
wire-break check, 4-44
configuring error, 4-79
Analog input modules, SM 331,
connecting resistance thermometers, 4-57
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6
connecting resistors, 4-57
Analog input/module, structure of data record
connecting sensor, 4-49
1, A-41
connecting thermocouple, 4-63
Analog input/output module
diagnostic interrupt, 4-44
integration time, 4-48
diagnostic message in measured value,
measurement, 4-48
4-78
measuring method, 4-48
diagnostic messages, 4-78
measuring range, 4-48
diagnostics, 4-44
output range, 4-48
group diagnostics, 4-44
output type, 4-48
interference frequency suppression, 4-46,
parameters, 4-48, A-40
A-9
SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits, 4-177
isolated, 4-49
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits, 4-189
limit value, 4-44
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits, 4-183
load voltage missing, 4-79
Analog module
measurement, 4-45
assigning parameters, 4-43
measuring method, 4-45
behavior, 4-34
measuring methods and measuring ranges,
determination of measuring error/output
A-9
error, 4-38
measuring range, 4-45
diagnostics, 4-77
module filtering mode, 4-45
dimension drawing, C-17
non-isolated, 4-49
group error LED, 4-78
overflow, 4-80
interrupts, 4-81
parameter assignment error, 4-79
sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-8
parameters, 4-44, A-7
SF LED, 4-78
potential difference, 4-49
supply voltage failure, 4-35
reaction with open thermocouple, 4-45

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Index-11
Index

Analog output channel, conversion time, 4-41 Approval

Analog output module CE, 1-2
causes of errors and remedies, 4-80 CSA, 1-3
connecting loads and actuators, 4-72 FM, 1-4
connecting loads to current output, 4-76 Shipbuilding, 1-4
connecting loads to voltage output, 4-73 UL, 1-3
diagnostic interrupt, 4-47 Approvals, Standards, 1-2
diagnostic messages, 4-79 Auxiliary voltage missing, SM 338;
diagnostics, 4-47 POS-INPUT, 5-20
group diagnostics, 4-47
isolated, 4-72
load voltage missing, 4-80 B
M short-circuit, 4-80
Backplane bus, Glossary-1
non-isolated, 4-72
Backup battery, 1-9
output methods and output ranges, A-37
shipping and storage conditions, 1-8
output range, 4-47
Basic error limit, 4-38
output type, 4-47
Basic knowledge, iii
parameter assignment error, 4-80
Battery. See backup battery
parameters, 4-47
Behavior, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-28
response time, 4-42
Bus segment, Glossary-1
response with CPU-STOP, 4-47
Bytes 0 and 1
setting substitute values, A-37
of diagnostic data, B-2
settling time, 4-42
of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits, 4-171
B-7
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, 4-166
Bytes 2 and 3, of diagnostic data, B-3
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, 4-160
Bytes 2 to 7, of diagnostic data for SM 338;
structure of data record 1, A-36
POS-INPUT, B-8
Analog output modules, parameters, A-35
Bytes 4 to 7, of diagnostic data, B-4
Analog output modules, SM 332,
Bytes 8 to 10, of diagnostic data for SM 338;
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6
POS-INPUT, B-8
Analog value
conversion, 4-10
sign, 4-10
Analog value representation, 4-10
binary representation of input ranges, 4-13
binary representation of output ranges, 4-26
for current measuring ranges, 4-16–4-18
for current output ranges, 4-30–4-33
for resistance type transmitters, 4-17
for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors,
4-17, 4-18, 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23,
4-24, 4-25
for RTD resistance temperature detectors,
4-19, 4-20
for voltage measuring ranges, 4-14–4-16
for voltage output ranges, 4-28–4-31
Analog-to-digital conversion, 4-39

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Index-12 A5E00105505-02
 Index

C D
Cables, for analog signals, 4-49, 4-72 Data record, for diagnostic data, B-1
Causes of error and remedial measures Data record 1
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-30 analog input module configuration, A-8
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78 analog output module configuration, A-36
Causes of errors and remedies digital input module configuration, A-4
analog input module, 4-79 digital output module configuration, A-6
analog output module, 4-80 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-27
CE, Approval, 1-2 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-12
Changes, in manual, iii structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-20
Channel error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 structure of analog input/output module,
Channel information present, SM 338; A-41
POS-INPUT, 5-20 Data record 128
Channel-specific diagnostics, B-5 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-13
Climatic conditions, 1-11 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-21
Code type, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15 Data record1, Configuration SM 332; AO 8 x
Commissioning analog modules, sequence of 12 bits, A-39
steps, 4-8 Data records, for parameters, A-2
Commissioning digital modules, sequence of Default setting, Glossary-2
steps, 3-10 Degree of protection, 1-12
Common mode voltage, Glossary-1 IP 20, 1-12
Common-mode error, analog input module, Destruction limit, Glossary-2
4-79 Diagnostic buffer, Glossary-3
Communication processor, Glossary-1 Diagnostic data, Glossary-3
Comparison point, 4-67, Glossary-2 bytes 0 and 1, B-2
Compensating box, 4-65 bytes 2 and 3, B-3
connecting, 4-66 bytes 4 to 7, B-4
Compensation channel-specific, B-5
external, 4-65 channel-specific, for analog input modules
internal, 4-64, 4-66 of SM 331, B-6
Complete restart, Glossary-2 channel-specific, for analog output modules
Configuration error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 of SM 332, B-6
Configure, Glossary-2 channel-specific, for SM 321; DI 16 x 24
Configuring error, analog input module, 4-79 VDC, B-5
Conversion time channel-specific, for SM 322; DO 8 x 24
analog input channels, 4-39 VDC/0.5 A, B-5
analog output channel, 4-41 channel-specific, for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
Converting, analog values, 4-10 B-8
CP, Glossary-1 data record, B-1
CPU, Glossary-2 SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7
CSA, Approval, 1-3 Diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
Current sensors, connecting, 4-55 bytes 0 and 1, B-7
Diagnostic data of SM 338; POS-INPUT
Bytes 2 to 7, B-8
Bytes 8 to 10, B-8
Diagnostic interrupt
analog input module, 4-44
analog output module, 4-47
of analog modules, 4-81
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-26, 3-31
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-75, 3-79
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-21

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Index-13
Index

Diagnostic interrupt enable, SM 338; Digital output module

POS-INPUT, 5-14 parameters, A-5
Diagnostic messages, 3-12, 4-77, 5-18 SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A, 3-64
of analog input modules, 4-78 SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-52
of analog output modules, 4-79 SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High
reading out, 3-13, 4-78, 5-18 Speed, 3-55
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-77 SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC, 3-58
Diagnostics SM 322; DO 32 x 120 VAC/1.0 A, 3-48
analog input module, 4-44 SM 322; DO 32 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL ,
analog output module, 4-47 3-86
of analog modules, 4-77 SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-45
of digital modules, 3-12 SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A, 3-83
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-26, 3-28 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-18, 5-19 diagnostic interrupt, 3-70
system, Glossary-9 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A, 3-67
Diagnostics entry, 4-36 SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A, 3-80
Digital input module structure of data record 1, A-6
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-18 Dimension drawing, active bus module, C-8
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed, 3-21 Dimension drawings, C-1
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input, analog module, C-17
3-33 digital module, C-17
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; with hardware IM 361, C-14
and diagnostic interrupts, 3-23 interface module, C-14
SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC, 3-37 power supply module PS 307, C-9
SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V, 3-39 PS 307, C-9
SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V, 3-35 rail, C-2
SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC, 3-16 RS 485 repeater, C-20
SM 321; DI 32 x 120/230 VAC ISOL, 3-43 shield connecting element, C-18
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC, 3-13 signal module, C-17
SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC, 3-41 SIMATIC TOP connect, C-19
structure of data record 1, A-4 Direct access, Glossary-3
Digital input modules, parameters, A-3 Documentation package, v
Digital input/output module Dummy module, DM 370, 5-5
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A,
3-110
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-114
Digital module
assigning parameters, 3-11
diagnostics, 3-12
dimension drawing, C-17
group error LED, 3-13
sequence of steps for commissioning, 3-10
SF LED, 3-13

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Index-14 A5E00105505-02
 Index

E H
Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-6 Hardware interrupt, Glossary-4
Encoder absolute, Glossary-3 End of scan cycle, 4-83
Encoder absolute (SSI), SM 338; POS-INPUT, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-26, 3-32
5-14 when limit exceeded, 4-82
Encoder error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 Hardware interrupt lost, SM 321; DI 16 x 24
Encoder value detection, clocked, 5-11 VDC, 3-30, 3-32
Environmental conditions, 1-9 Hold last value, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5
extended, 1-14 A, 3-75
Outdoor modules, 1-16
EPROM error
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-30 I
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
Identifiers for Australia, 1-4
Equipotential bonding, Glossary-3
IEC 61131, 1-4
Error, of an analog module, 4-38
IM 360
Error causes and troubleshooting, SM 338;
dimension drawing, C-14
POS-INPUT, 5-20
interface module, 6-3
Extended environmental conditions, 1-14
IM 361, interface module, 6-5
External auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321; DI
IM 365
16 x 24 VDC, 3-30
dimension drawing, C-16
interface module, 6-7
Input delay, Glossary-4
F SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-26
FM, Approval, 1-4 Insulation test, 1-12
Four-conductor connection, 4-58, Glossary-10 Integration time, Glossary-4
Four-wire transmitter, Glossary-10 analog input/output module, 4-48
Four-wire transmitters, 4-57 Interface module, 6-1
FREEZE, Glossary-3 dimension drawing, C-14
Freeze function, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-13, IM 360, 6-3
5-15 IM 361, 6-5
Fuse blown IM 365, 6-7
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-30 Interference
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78 pulse-shaped, 1-6
sinusoidal, 1-7
Interference frequency suppression,
G Glossary-5
analog input module, 4-46, A-9
Ground, Glossary-4
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
Grounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24, A-28
Group diagnostics
Internal auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321; DI
analog input module, 4-44
16 x 24 VDC, 3-30
analog output module, 4-47
Internal compensation, Temperature error,
Group error LED
Glossary-10
analog module, 4-78
Internal error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20
digital module, 3-13
Interrupt, Glossary-5
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-18

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Index-15
Index

Interrupt-triggering channels, SM 321; DI 16 x Measuring range

24 VDC, 3-32 analog input channels, 4-31
Interrupts analog input module, 4-45, A-9
enabling, 3-31, 3-79, 4-81, 5-21 analog input/output module, 4-48
of analog modules, 4-81 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-21 Measuring range module, 4-31
IP 20, 1-12 replugging, 4-32
Isochrone mode, SM 338, 5-9 Measuring sensors, isolated, 4-50
Isolated measuring sensors, 4-50 Module Classes, ID, B-2
connecting, 4-50 Module filtering mode, Glossary-6
analog input module, 4-45
Module malfunction, SM 338; POS-INPUT,
L 5-20
Module overview, 4-3
Lack of encoder supply, SM 321; DI 16 x 24
digital modules, 3-4
VDC, 3-30
other signal modules, 5-2
Limit value, analog input module, 4-44
SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-2
Linearity error, Glossary-5
Modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-8
Load connection, to analog output module,
Monoflop time, Glossary-6
4-72
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15
Load connection to current output, to analog
MPI, Glossary-6
output module, 4-76
Load connection to voltage output, to analog
output module, 4-73
Load voltage missing N
analog input module, 4-79 Navigation, through the manual, vi
analog output module, 4-80 No external auxiliary voltage, SM 322; DO 8 x
Logic block, Glossary-5 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
LWH, Glossary-4 No internal auxiliary voltage, SM 322; DO 8 x
24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
No load voltage L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24
M VDC/0.5 A, 3-75, 3-78
Non-isolated, Glossary-6
M short-circuit, analog output module, 4-80
Non-isolated sensors, 4-52
Manual, purpose, iii
connecting, 4-52
Manual changes, iii
Normalizing, Glossary-6
Manual package, v
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-12, 5-15
Measurement
analog input module, 4-45
analog input/output module, 4-48
Measuring method
analog input channels, 4-31
analog input module, 4-45, A-9
analog input/output module, 4-48
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Index-16 A5E00105505-02
 Index

O 6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0, 3-58

6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0, 3-98
OB, Glossary-7
6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0, 3-70
OB 40, 3-32, 4-82
6ES7 322-8BF80-0AA0, 3-70
start information, 4-82
6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0, 3-114
OB 82, 3-31, 3-79, 4-81
6ES7 323-1BH81-0AA0, 3-114
Operating conditions, 1-9
6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0, 3-110
Operating mode
6ES7 331-1KF00-0AB0, 4-105
of CPU, 4-34
6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0, 4-150
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
6ES7 331-7KB82-0AB0, 4-150
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24
6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0, 4-111
Operational limit, 4-38, Glossary-6
6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0, 4-83
Optically isolated, Glossary-6
6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0, 4-92
Order Number
6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0, 4-122
6ES7 338-4BC01-0AB0, 5-8
6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0, 4-135
6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0, 5-5
6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0, 4-177
6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0, 5-3
6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0, 4-177
Order number
6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0, 4-171
6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0, 2-2
6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0, 4-160
6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0, 2-6
6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0, 4-166
6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0, 2-10
6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0, 4-183
6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0, 2-10
6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0, 4-189
6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0, 2-15
6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0, 6-3
6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0, 3-18
6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0, 6-5
6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0, 3-21
6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0, 6-7
6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0, 3-33
6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0, 7-2
6ES7 321-1BH82-0AA0, 3-18
Organization block (OB), Glossary-7
6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0, 3-13
Outdoor modules, 1-14
6ES7 321-1BL80-0AA0, 3-13
Output analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0, 3-35
Output method, analog output module, A-37
6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0, 3-37
Output range
6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0, 3-16
analog input/output module, 4-48
6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0, 3-41
analog output module, 4-47, A-37
6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0, 3-43
Output type
6ES7 321-1FF81-0AA0, 3-41
analog input/output module, 4-48
6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0, 3-39
analog output module, 4-47
6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0, 3-23
Overflow, analog input module, 4-80
6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0, 3-23
6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0, 3-67
6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0, 3-52
6ES7 322-1BH10-0AA0, 3-55
6ES7 322-1BH81-0AA0, 3-52
6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0, 3-45
6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0, 3-80
6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0, 3-48
6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0, 3-83
6ES7 322-1FF81-0AA0, 3-83
6ES7 322-1FH00-0AA0, 3-64
6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0, 3-95
6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0, 3-105
6ES7 322-1HF80-0AA0, 3-105
6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0, 3-92
6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0, 3-86

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Index-17
Index

P Pulse-shaped interference, 1-6

Parameter assignment
for analog modules, 4-43
for digital modules, 3-11 R
in user program, A-1 Radio interference, emission of, 1-7
Parameter assignment error Rail for the ”Insert and Remove” function,
analog input module, 4-79 dimension drawing, C-7
analog output module, 4-80 Rails, dimension drawing, C-2
Parameterization error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, RAM error
5-20 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-30
Parameterization missing, SM 338; SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
POS-INPUT, 5-20 Rated voltages, 1-13
Parameters, Glossary-7 Reaction to open thermocouple, SM 331; AI 8
analog input module, 4-44, A-7 x TC, A-26
analog input/output module, 4-48, A-40 Read analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
analog output module, 4-47 Reference junction temperature with
analog output modules, A-35 thermocouples, compensating, 4-64
data records, A-2 Reference potential, Glossary-7
digital input modules, A-3 Relay output module
digital output module, A-5 SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC, 3-92
dynamic, 3-11, 4-43 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC, 3-95
modifying in user program, 3-11, 4-43 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A, 3-105
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-26 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, 3-98
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-75 Repeat accuracy, Glossary-8
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-11 Repeater, Glossary-8
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-19 See also RS 485-Repeater
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-38 Resistance thermometer connection, to
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14 analog input module, 4-57
static, 3-11, 4-43 Resistor connection, to analog input module,
Parameters, wrong 4-57
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-30 Resolution, 4-10, Glossary-8
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 Response time, 4-42
PARM_MOD, SFC 57, A-2 Response with CPU-STOP, analog output
Pin assignment, RS 485 repeater, 7-7 module, 4-47
POS input module SM 338, 5-8 Retentivity, Glossary-8
Position detection module, SM 338; RS 485 repeater
POS-INPUT, 5-8 Appearance, 7-3
Potential difference, with analog input modules, application, 7-2
4-49 definition, 7-2
Power supply module, 2-1 dimension drawing, C-20
dimension drawing, C-9 grounded operation, 7-4
PS 305 2 A, 2-2 rules, 7-2
PS 307 10 A, 2-15 ungrounded operation, 7-4
PS 307 2 A, 2-6 RS 485-Repeater, 7-1
PS 307 5 A, 2-10 grounded, 7-4
Process image, Glossary-7 ungrounded, 7-4
Product status, Glossary-7
Programming device (PG), Glossary-7
Protection class, 1-12
PS 307, dimension drawing, C-9
Pulse edge, 3-26

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Index-18 A5E00105505-02
 Index

S SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

component selection, 8-20
Scan time, Glossary-8
connection example, 8-24
analog input channels, 4-39
multiplier terminal, 8-21
analog output channels, 4-41
shield connection, 8-23
Screw-type terminals, SIMATIC TOP
terminal allocation to analog module, 8-22
connect/...TPA, 8-10
terminal assignment, 8-21
Sensor connection, to analog input module,
SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA
4-49
advantages of using, 8-3
Sensors, non-isolated, 4-52
components, 8-3
Settling time, 4-42
configuration, 8-2
SF LED
connecting cable, 8-4
analog module, 4-78
connectors, 8-4
digital module, 3-13
mounting terminal block and connecting
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-18
cable, 8-10
SFC, Glossary-8, Glossary-9
screw-type terminals, 8-10
SFC 51, 3-31, 3-79, 4-81
spring-loaded terminals, 8-10
SFC 55 WR_PARM, A-2
wiring, 8-4
SFC 56 WR_DPARM, A-2
wiring actuators/sensors to terminal block,
SFC 57 PARM_MOD, A-2
8-10
SFC 59, 3-31, 3-79, 4-81
wiring rules, 8-7
Shield connecting element, dimension drawing,
wiring the front connector module, 8-6
C-18
wiring with modules..., 8-3
Shipbuilding, Approval, 1-4
Simulator module, SM 374; IN/OUT 16, 5-3
Short-circuit to L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24
Sinusoidal interference, 1-7
VDC/0.5 A, 3-75, 3-78
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Short-circuit to M, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5
A, 3-75, 3-78
diagnostic interrupt, 3-31
Sign, analog value, 4-10
diagnostics, 3-26
Signal module, Glossary-8
EPROM error, 3-30
dimension drawing, C-17
external auxiliary voltage missing, 3-30
SIMATIC Outdoor modules, 1-14
fuse blown, 3-30
SIMATIC TOP connect
input delay, 3-26
components, 8-12
internal auxiliary voltage missing, 3-30
connection for 2A modules, 8-18
interrupts, 3-31
dimension drawing, C-19
lack of encoder supply, 3-30
one-conductor connection, 8-14
redundant encoder supply, 3-24
selecting components, 8-13
voltage type, 3-26
three-conductor connection, 8-16
watchdog, 3-30
wiring 32-channel digital modules, 8-8

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Index-19
Index

SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC SM 331; AI 8 x TC

causes of error and remedial measures, interference frequency suppression, A-24
3-30 measuring methods and measuring ranges,
diagnostic interrupt, 3-26 A-25
hardware interrupt, 3-26, 3-32 operating modes, A-24
hardware interrupt lost, 3-30, 3-32 parameters, A-19
interrupt-triggering channels, 3-32 reaction to open thermocouple, A-26
parameters, wrong, 3-30 smoothing, A-26
RAM error, 3-30 structure of data record 1, A-20
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A structure of data record 128, A-21
apply substitute value ”1”, 3-75 SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits
causes of error and remedial action, 3-78 Parameters, A-38
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 Structure of data record 1, A-39
diagnostic interrupt, 3-75, 3-79 SM 338
diagnostic messages, 3-77 detection of encoder value, 5-11
EPROM error, 3-78 Encoder value detection, 5-11
fuse blown, 3-78 Functions, 5-11
hold last value, 3-75 isochrone mode, 5-9
interrupts, 3-79 POS input module, 5-8
no external auxiliary voltage, 3-78
no internal auxiliary voltage, 3-78
no load voltage L+, 3-75, 3-78
parameters, 3-75
RAM error, 3-78
short-circuit to L+, 3-75, 3-78
short-circuit to M, 3-75, 3-78
substitute value application, 3-75
watchdog, 3-78
wire-break, 3-75, 3-78
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits
Interference frequency suppression, A-28
Measuring methods and measuring ranges,
A-28
structure of data record 1, A-27
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
interference frequency suppression, A-16
operating modes, A-16
parameters, A-11
smoothing, A-18
structure of data record 1, A-12
structure of data record 128, A-13
Temperature coefficient, A-18
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD x 24 bits, measuring
methods and measuring ranges, A-16

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Index-20 A5E00105505-02
 Index

SM 338; POS-INPUT T
addressing, 5-16
Technical specifications, RS 485 repeater, 7-7
auxiliary voltage missing, 5-20
Temperature coefficient, Glossary-9
causes of errors and troubleshooting, 5-20
analog input module, 4-46
channel error, 5-20
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18
channel information present, 5-20
Temperature error, Glossary-10
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-8
Temperature errors of internal compensation,
code type, 5-15
Glossary-10
configuration error, 5-20
Temperature measurement, SM 331; AI 8 x 13
diagnostic data, B-7
bit, A-27
diagnostic interrupt, 5-21
Temperature unit, Analog input module, 4-45
diagnostic interrupt enable, 5-14
Test voltages, 1-12
diagnostics, 5-18
Thermo emf, 4-63
encoder absolute (SSI), 5-14
Thermocouple
encoder error, 5-20
design, 4-63
external error, 5-20
open, reaction to, Glossary-7
Freeze function, 5-13, 5-15
principle of operation, 4-63
group error LED, 5-18
Thermocouple connection, to analog input
internal error, 5-20
module, 4-63
interrupts, 5-21
Three-conductor connection, 4-59,
module malfunction, 5-20
Glossary-10
monoflop time, 5-15
Transmission rate, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15
Normalizing, 5-12
Two-conductor connection, 4-59, Glossary-10
normalizing, 5-15
Two-wire transmitter, Glossary-10
parameterization error, 5-20
Two-wire transmitters, 4-56
parameterization missing, 5-20
parameters, wrong, 5-20
SF LED, 5-18
transmission rate, 5-15
watchdog tripped, 5-20
Smoothing, Glossary-9
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-26
Smoothing analog input values, 4-40
analog input module, 4-46
Spare parts, D-1
Spring-loaded terminals, SIMATIC TOP
connect/...TPA, 8-10
Standards and approvals, 1-2
Startup, Glossary-9
Status mode, Glossary-9
STEP 7 blocks, for analog functions, 4-1
Substitute value, Glossary-9
analog output module, A-37
Substitute value ”1” application, SM 322; DO 8
x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-75
Substitute value application, SM 322; DO 8 x
24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-75
Supply voltage failure, of the analog module,
4-35
System diagnostics, Glossary-9
System function (SFC), Glossary-9

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

A5E00105505-02 Index-21
Index

U W
UL, Approval, 1-3 Watchdog
Underflow, analog input module, 4-80 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-30
Ungrounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
Use in an industrial environment, 1-5 Watchdog tripped, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20
Use in residential environments, 1-5 Wire-break, Glossary-10
Use of the ET 200 / S7-300 in Zone 2, 1-17 Analog input module, 4-79
User program, Glossary-10 analog input module, 4-80
parameter assignment in, A-1 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-75, 3-78
Wire-break check, analog input module, 4-44
WR_DPARM, SFC 56, A-2
V WR_PARM, SFC 55, A-2
Vibrations, 1-10
Voltage sensors, connecting, 4-54
Voltage type, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-26

S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications

Index-22 A5E00105505-02